advertisement
IX Series
IP network-compatible intercom
IX Support Tool Setting Manual
Software version: 5.0.0.0 or later
Important • Before configuring and using the system, read "Setting Manual" and "Operation Manual" carefully.
• For the installation and connection of each device, refer to "Installation Manual." • Begin installation after reading and understanding the procedures for system configuration.
• The setting data is required for after-sales service and other such services. Write the setting data to a CD-R or other media and be sure to give it to the customer.
• The illustrations and images in this manual may vary from the actual ones.
Table of contents
Introduction
Startup and Configuration
Menu bar
2
System Settings (Table View)
3
2.4 Multicast Address (For IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ....... 190
2.5 Video (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ........................... 192
4.3 Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) ......... 225
4.5 Incoming Call (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) ................. 237
4
7.10 Chime (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) ................ 304
7.13 IEEE 802.1X (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ...................... 313
9.5 Monitor (except IXW-MA, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ........................... 357
System Settings (Station View)
5
2.4 Multicast Address (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ........ 389
2.5 Video (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ........................... 390
4.3 Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) ......... 419
4.5 Incoming Call (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) ................. 431
6
7.10 Chime (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) ................ 491
7.13 IEEE 802.1X (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ...................... 498
9.5 Monitor (except IXW-MA, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ........................... 536
7
Introduction
This manual describes the IX Support Tool in detail.
The IX Series offers a separate manual for Installation, Settings, and Operations. Refer to the relevant manual.
Introduction
1. Notational symbols in this manual
The following symbols identify important information concerning operational procedures.
Negligence could cause death or serious injury.
Warning Caution Important
Negligence could result in injury to people or damage to property.
Indicates what should be known before operation. Please read and understand before proceeding.
Indicates tips and additional information for operation.
Note
• Terms displayed on master station and PC screens are indicated as
[XXXX]
.
• Page reference are shown as "Title (→ page XX)," (→ page XX) , or page XX .
• The illustrations and screen shots in this manual may vary from the actual ones.
9
2. Device type
The stations are shown as below.
Master Stations Video Stations
Device Type
IX-MV IX-MV7-* IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*) IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) Audio Stations Others IX-SSA(-*) IX-SS-2G IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) IX-RS-* IXW-MA Introduction
Example Model Name
IX-MV IX-MV7-HW, IX-MV7-W, IX-MV7-HB, IX-MV7-B IX-DV, IX-DVF, IX-DVF-P, IX-DVF-2RA, IX-DVF RA IX-DA, IX-DF, IX-DF-HID, IX-DF-RP10, IX-DF 2RA IX-SSA, IX-SSA-2RA, IX-SSA-RA IX-SS-2G IX-BA, IX-SS, IX-SS-2RA, IX-SS-RA IX-RS-W, IX-RS-B IXW-MA 10
3. Product manuals
Introduction Read the "Installation Manual," "Setting Manual," and "Operation Manual" as needed. Have the person who installs or configures the product refer to the relevant manuals.
Installation Manual
Installation Manual (comes with each station.)
Refer to when installing and connecting each station. (For installers) Manuals can be downloaded from our web site. “ https:// www.aiphone.net/product/support/ .“ Refer to these manuals as necessary.
IX Support Tool Setting Manual (Electronic format (PDF file).)
Describes how to configure and maintain the system using IX Support Tool. (For system administrator)
Monitoring Software (IX Supervision Tool) Operation Manual (Electronic format (PDF file).)
Describes how to use the Monitoring Software. (For system administrator)
Operation Manual (Electronic format (PDF file).)
Describes how to use each station. (For user)
Web Setting Manual (Electronic format (PDF file).)
Describes how to set up each station for the Internet connection. (For system administrator)
Installation Manual (Electronic format (PDF file).)
Describes how to install each station. (For installer) 11
Introduction
4. Station description
4.1
Master Station IX-MV7-*
■ Part names Front 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 5 6 2 3 7 Handset Camera Privacy mask lever (top) Status indicator (orange/blue) Speaker Liquid crystal display (touch panel) Home button Microphone
8 4 5 Front 6 7 2 3 8 4 9 Side 12 Rear 13 10 11 10 11 9 Side 14 15 16 17 12 Rear 13 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 14 15 16 17
3.5 mm 4-pole mini jack MAC address Camera angle adjustment lever Option connector terminal Low voltage cable connection terminal Tabletop fastening screw hole LAN terminal *1 *2 Found by opening cover.
Press and hold the reset button for at least 1 second (less than 5 seconds), then release to restart (reset).
12
Introduction ■ Indicators : ON : OFF
Name
Status indicator Orange flashing
Status (pattern)
Normal flashing 0.75sec
Fast flashing 0.75sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Long OFF time flashing 0.5sec
4sec Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Blue light
Description
Booting Device error, Startup error Communication failure, Line supervision and device check error Firmware version updating Initializing Standby(Depends on setting) Note • For a status other than those noted here, refer to "Operation Manual." • The default language for the master station's display is English.
13
Introduction
4.2
Master Station IX-MV
■ Part names 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Handset Hook switch Speaker Keypad MONITOR button Color LCD monitor Status indicator (orange/blue) Speed Dial buttons (x 6) PRIVACY button / Privacy indicator (blue) TRANSFER button / Transfer indicator (orange) LIST button / List indicator (blue) Reset button (beneath the name plate)
Back 21 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 23 22 SETTING button / Setting indicator (blue) Select button ADJUST button Up/Down and L/R buttons Microphone Door Release button TALK button / Talk indicator (blue) OFF button MAC address Weak electrical current line connection terminal LAN terminal *1 Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
14
Introduction ■ Indicators : ON : OFF
Name
Status indicator Orange flashing
Status (pattern)
Normal flashing 0.75sec
Fast flashing 0.75sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Long OFF time flashing 0.5sec
4sec Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Blue light
Description
Booting Device error Communication failure Firmware version updating Initializing Standby(Depends on setting) Note • For a status other than those noted here, refer to "Operation Manual." • The display language is English by default.
15
4.3
Handset Sub Station IX-RS-*
■ Part names Introduction Back 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 Handset Speaker 3 4 5 6 7 Microphone Status indicator (orange/blue) Call indicator (green) LED lit during operation.
Communication indicator (orange) LED lit during operation.
Door release indicator (green) LED lit during operation.
8 9 10 11 12 Door Release button Only displayed when configured.
Call/TALK button Can be used to call or answer depending on configuration.
“Call Button Function (→page 224)”
Ringtone/call volume
MAC address LAN terminal 13 Weak electrical current line connection terminal 14
*1 The volume can be adjusted for each of the following.
– Volume can be changed during an incoming call or in standby: Ringtone... 0 (Off), 1 (Low) - 10 (High) (a tone is played each time it is adjusted) – Volume can be changed during calls: Handset Receive... 1 (Low) - 10 (High) Hands-free Receive (also changes the paging reception and ringback tone volume)...1 (Low) - 10 (High) *2 Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
16
Introduction ■ Indicators : ON : OFF
Name
Status indicator Orange flashing
Status (pattern)
Normal flashing 0.75sec
Fast flashing 0.75sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Long OFF time flashing 0.5sec
4sec Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Blue light
Description
Booting Device error, Startup error Communication failure Firmware version updating Initializing Standby Note • For a status other than those noted here, refer to "Operation Manual." 17
Introduction
4.4
Video Door Station (IX-DA)/Audio Only Door Station (IX-BA)
■ Part names
IX-DA IX-BA
Side Back 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Call indicator (orange) Camera Microphone Communication indicator (green) Speaker LED for night illumination Call Button Status indicator (red) Drain holes (4) 10 7 8 9 1 3 4 5 15 16 17 18 11 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 12 13 14 MAC address (beneath the panel) Panel Main unit Mounting frame MAC address Camera angle adjustment lever (IX-DA only) Reset button
LAN terminal
*1 *2 Accessible when terminal cover is opened.
Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
18
Introduction ■ Indicators : ON : OFF
Name
Status indicator Red flashing Normal flashing 0.75sec
Fast flashing
Status (pattern)
0.75sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Long OFF time flashing 0.5sec
4sec Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Red light 0.25sec
0.25sec
Description
Booting Device error Communication failure Firmware version updating Initializing Standby Note • For a status other than those noted here, refer to "Operation Manual." 19
Introduction
4.5
Video Door Station (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*))
■ Part Names
IX-DV
Front Back
IX-DVF
Front 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Back 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Status indicator (orange/blue) Call indicator (green) Communication indicator (orange) Camera Microphone Door release indicator (green) LED for night illumination Speaker Call button Surrounding area is lit up with blue light 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Camera angle adjustment lever MAC address Terminal cover Option connector terminal
LAN2 terminal (PoE/PSE)
Reset button
microSD card slot
microSD card release button
*1 *2 Accessible when terminal cover is opened.
Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
Introduction 8 10 2 3 6 1
IX-DVF-2RA
Front 5 4 7 9 11 15 18 20 Back 12 13 14 16 17 19 1 2 3 6 8
IX-DVF-RA
Front 5 4 7 15 18 20 10 11 Back 6 7 8 9 4 5 1 2 3 10 Status indicator (orange/blue) Call indicator (green) Communication indicator (orange) Camera Microphone Door release indicator (green) LED for night illumination Speaker Call button Surrounding area is lit up with blue light Braille 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Urgent call button Camera angle adjustment lever MAC address Terminal cover Option connector terminal
LAN2 terminal (PoE/PSE)
Reset button
microSD card slot
microSD card release button
*1 *2 Accessible when terminal cover is opened.
Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
12 13 14 16 17 19 21
Introduction 2 3 6 8 1
IX-DVF-P
Front 5 4 7 9 16 19 21 Back 1 13 14 15 17 18 20 8 11 2 3 6
IX-DVF-L
Front 5 4 7 9 16 19 21 Back 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 10 Status indicator (orange/blue) Call indicator (green) Communication indicator (orange) Camera Microphone Door release indicator (green) LED for night illumination Speaker Call button Surrounding area is lit up with blue light HID reader Nameplate (with backlight) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Hearing aid (T mode) compatible microphone Camera angle adjustment lever MAC address Terminal cover Option connector terminal
LAN2 terminal (PoE/PSE)
Reset button
microSD card slot
microSD card release button
Hearing aid unit *1 *2 Accessible when terminal cover is opened.
Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
13 14 15 17 18 20 22 22
Introduction 1 2 3 5 6
IX-SSA
Front 4 7 12 15 17 Back 10 11 13 14 16 5 6 8 2 3
IX-SSA-2RA
1 Front 4 7 9 12 15 17 Back 1 5 6 8 2 3
IX-SSA-RA
Front 4 12 15 17 Back 10 11 13 14 16 9 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Status indicator (orange/blue) Call indicator (green) Communication indicator (orange) Microphone Door release indicator (green) Speaker Call button Surrounding area is lit up with blue light.
Braille Urgent call button 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MAC address Terminal cover Option connector terminal
LAN2 terminal (PoE/PSE)
Reset button
microSD card slot
microSD card release button *1 *2 Accessible when terminal cover is opened.
Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
10 11 13 14 16 23
Introduction ■ Indicators : ON, : OFF
Name
Status indicator Orange flashing
Status (pattern)
Normal flashing 0.75sec
Fast flashing 0.75sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Long OFF time flashing 0.5sec
4sec Long initial light ON flashing １sec 0.25sec
0.25sec
Long initial light ON flashing 2sec 0.25sec
Long initial light ON flashing 0.25sec
１sec 0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Blue light
Description
Booting Device error, Startup error Communication failure Firmware version updating Mounting/ unmounting microSD card Initializing Standby Note • For a status other than those noted here, refer to "Operation Manual." 24
Introduction
4.6
Door Station (IX-SS-2G)
■ Part names Back 4 5 6 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 5 6 3 4 Speaker Microphone Call Button Status indicator (orange/blue) Communication indicator (orange) Call indicator (green) 7 8 9 10 11 MAC address
LAN terminal *1 Reset button *1*2
Low voltage cable connection terminal
Terminal cover *1 *2 Found by opening terminal cover.
Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
■ Indicators : ON : OFF
Name
Status indicator Orange flashing Normal flashing
Status (pattern)
0.75sec
0.75sec
Fast flashing 0.25sec
0.25sec
Long OFF time flashing 0.5sec
4sec Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Blue light 0.25sec
Description
Booting Device error, Startup error Communication failure Firmware version updating Initializing Standby Note • For a status other than those noted here, refer to "Operation Manual." 25
Introduction
4.7
I/O Adaptor (IXW-MA)
■ Part names 1 Back 5 2 6 3 4 1 2 3 MAC address
Panel
4 5 6
Status indicator (orange/blue) *1
Option connector terminal LAN terminal *1 *2 The panel must be removed to access it.
Press and hold the reset button for 1 - 4 seconds, then release to restart station.
■ Indicators : ON : OFF
Name
Status indicator Orange flashing Normal flashing
Status (pattern)
0.75sec
0.75sec
Fast flashing 0.25sec
0.25sec
Long OFF time flashing 0.5sec
4sec Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
Long irregular flashing １sec 0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
0.25sec
Blue light 0.25sec
Description
Booting Device error, Startup error Communication failure Firmware version updating Initializing Standby 26
Introduction
5. Configuring the system
After installing and connecting all stations, the system will need to be fully configured before it will be operational.
IX system can be configured in one of the two methods below. Choose one method. Using the "IX Support Tool" (1) is recommended.
(1) Configure the system using the "IX Support Tool" application – Install the application on a PC and use to create the configuration for all stations.
– Search for IX stations on the network; assign and upload configuration data for the system.
(2) Configure each station through a Web browser (WEB Settings Access) – Access each station through a Web browser and enter setting data.
– When using the Web browser method, each station must be configured separately.
Important • Once the system has been configured through a browser, the settings cannot be transferred to the IX Support Tool. Using the IX Support Tool is the recommended method to manage settings.
• If web browser configuration is used to change the "Identification"
“IP Address♦ (→page 182)” , IPv6 Address"
, "Address Book" “Station List (→page 209)” , and "Call Settings"
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 225)”
after configured using the IX Support Tool, it will not be applied to the IX Support Tool settings.
• Save the settings after configuring the system.
27
Introduction
6. Flowcharts for configuring the system
When configuring the system using IX Support Tool, follow the flowchart that fits the application.
Save the settings after configuring the system. Otherwise, it may become impossible to restore the settings after maintenance or after-sales servicing.
Flowcharts are for configuration using IX Support Tool.
To configure a station through a Web browser, refer to "Web Setting Manual" for each station.
For Static IPv4 Address For IPv4 Address with DHCP For Static IPv6 Address
•
“Creating new data (→page 30)”
•
“Change the settings (For static IPv4 address) (→page 32)”
•
“Add a station (For static IPv4 address) (→page 34)”
•
“Delete a station (For static IPv4 address) (→page 35)”
•
“Replace a station (For static IPv4 address) (→page 36)”
•
“Creating new data (→page 37)”
•
“Change the settings (For IPv4 address with DHCP) (→page 39)”
•
“Add a station (For IPv4 address with DHCP) (→page 41)”
•
“Delete a station (For IPv4 address with DHCP) (→page 43)”
•
“Replace a station (due to malfunction, etc.) (For IPv4 address with DHCP) (→page 44)”
•
“Creating new data (→page 46)”
•
“Change the settings (For static IPv6 address) (→page 48)”
•
“Add a station (For static IPv6 address) (→page 50)”
•
“Delete a station (For static IPv6 address) (→page 52)”
•
“Replace a station (due to malfunction, etc.) (For static IPv6 address) (→page 53)”
28
For stateless IPv6 Address For IPv6 Address with DHCP
Introduction •
“Creating new data (→page 55)”
•
“Change the settings (For stateless IPv6 address) (→page 57)”
•
“Add a station (For stateless IPv6 address) (→page 59)”
•
“Delete a station (For stateless IPv6 address) (→page 61)”
•
“Replace a station (due to malfunction, etc.) (For stateless IPv6 address) (→page 62)”
•
“Creating new data (→page 64)”
•
“Change the settings (For IPv6 address with DHCP) (→page 66)”
•
“Add a station (For IPv6 address with DHCP) (→page 68)”
•
“Delete a station (For IPv6 address with DHCP) (→page 70)”
•
“Replace a station (due to malfunction, etc.) (For IPv6 address with DHCP) (→page 71)”
29
Introduction
6.1
For static IPv4 Address
Important
If the settings are not saved, it may be impossible to restore them after maintenance or after-sales servicing.
6.1.1
Creating new data
Use flowchart to create new configuration, e.g., when installing a new system.
1. Set the language.
2. Perform the "Create New System" procedure
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
3. Configure using "Table View"
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
4. Install all stations.
Note the MAC addresses of all the stations.
5. Associate the created setting data to the station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
6. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
7. Set the time for all stations.
30
Introduction
8. Set the display language for each station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to each station's Operation Manual.
9. Complete
31
Introduction
6.1.2
Change the settings (For static IPv4 address)
Use this flowchart when changing the settings.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Perform setup.
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”“System Settings (Station View) (→page 374)”
Were any of the following changed? "Number," "Name," "Location," "IP Address," "Location Registry," "Camera Name"
YES NO
Was "IP Address" changed from among these options?
4. Upload the setting data to the station whose settings were changed.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
YES NO
4. Because the setting data for the station whose IP address was changed is no longer associated, re associate the data.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station will be restarted, and the changed IP Address will be reflected in the station.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
32
Introduction
5. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete 6. Complete
33
Introduction
6.1.3
Add a station (For static IPv4 address)
Use flowchart to add a station.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Add the setting data.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
First, add the station data to “Station Information (→page 170)” .
4. Install the additional station.
5. Associate the setting data with the additional station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
6. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
7. Set the time for the additional station.
8. Set the display language for the additional station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV only).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
9. Complete
34
Introduction
6.1.4
Delete a station (For static IPv4 address)
Use flowchart to delete a station.
Important • If a page is placed without deleting the station from the system, the operation may be delayed.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Delete the data of the station to be deleted.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
35
Introduction
6.1.5
Replace a station (For static IPv4 address)
Use flowchart to replace a station.
1. Set the language.
Can the setting data of the station to be replaced be retrieved?
YES NO
2. Retrieve the setting data from the station to be replaced.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
2. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
3. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
3. Replace the setting data.
*If the settings were changed with the station, they cannot be reflected.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
4. Replace the setting data.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
6. Complete 4. Set the display language for the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
5. Set the display language for the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
5. Complete
36
Introduction
6.2
For IPv4 address with DHCP
Important • Due to the architecture of the IX system, DHCP configuration is only recommended for network environments utilizing managed (static) IP address leasing.
If the settings file is not saved, it may be impossible to restore if post-installation service or maintenance is required.
6.2.1
Creating new data
Use flowchart to create new configuration, e.g., when installing a new system.
1. Set up the DHCP server.
2. Set the language.
3. "Create New System"
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
4. Configure using "Table View"
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
5. Install all stations.
Note the MAC addresses of all the stations.
6. Associate the created setting data to the station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
Each station is restarted and the IP address assigned by DHCP server will be assigned.
If a DHCP address cannot be assigned, it will default to "192.168.1.160." 37
Introduction
7. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
8. Set the time for all stations.
9. Set the display language for each station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to each station's Operation Manual.
10. Complete
38
Introduction
6.2.2
Change the settings (For IPv4 address with DHCP)
Use this flowchart when changing the settings.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Perform setup.
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”“System Settings (Station View) (→page 374)”
Were any of the following changed? "Number," "Name," "Location," "IP Address," "Location Registry," "Camera Name"
YES NO
Was "IP Address" changed from among these options?
4. Upload the setting data to the station whose settings were changed.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
YES NO
4. Because the setting data for the station whose IP address was changed is no longer associated, re associate the data.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station will be restarted, and the changed IP Address will be reflected in the station.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
39
Introduction
5. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete 6. Complete
40
Introduction
6.2.3
Add a station (For IPv4 address with DHCP)
Use flowchart to add a station.
1. Configure so that the IP address for the station to be added to the DHCP server is assigned as a static address.
For information on DHCP server setting methods, refer to the DHCP server manual.
2. Set the language.
3. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
4. Add the setting data.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
First, add the station data to “Station Information (→page 170)” .
5. Install the additional station.
6. Associate the setting data with the additional station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station is restarted and the IP address assigned by DHCP server will be assigned.
If a DHCP address cannot be assigned, it will default to "192.168.1.160."
7. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
41
Introduction
8. Set the time for the additional station.
9. Set the display language for the additional station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
10. Complete
42
Introduction
6.2.4
Delete a station (For IPv4 address with DHCP)
Important • If a page is placed without deleting the station from the system, the operation may be delayed.
Use flowchart to delete a station.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. From the setting data, delete the data of the station to be deleted.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
43
Introduction
6.2.5
Replace a station (due to malfunction, etc.) (For IPv4 address with DHCP)
Use flowchart to replace a station.
Can the setting data of the station to be replaced be retrieved?
YES NO
1. Retrieve the setting data from the station to be replaced.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
1. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
2. Configure so that the IP address for the new station to be installed on the DHCP server is carried over from the old station.
For information on DHCP server setting methods, refer to the DHCP server manual.
3. Set the language.
4. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
4. Replace the setting data.
*If the settings were changed with the station, they cannot be reflected.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
The station is restarted and the IP address set by DHCP server will be assigned. If the IP address assignment fails, it will default to "192.168.1.160." If this happens, cycle power to the station, and then the IP Address will be reassigned.
5. Replace the setting data.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
The station is restarted and the IP address assigned by DHCP server will be assigned.
If a DHCP address cannot be assigned, it will default to "192.168.1.160."
5. Set the display language of the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to each station's Operation Manual.
44
Introduction
6. Set the display language of the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to each station's Operation Manual.
6. Complete 7. Complete
45
Introduction
6.3
For static IPv6 Addres
Important
If the settings are not saved, it may be impossible to restore them after maintenance or after-sales servicing.
6.3.1
Creating new data
Use flowchart to create new configuration, e.g., when installing a new system.
1. Set the language.
2. Perform "Create New System."
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
3. Perform setup using "Table View."
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
4. Install all stations.
Note the MAC addresses of all the stations.
5. Associate the created setting data to the station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
6. Set the communication method for the IX Support Tool to "IPv6."
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
46
Introduction
7. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
8. Set the time for all stations.
9. Set the display language for all stations (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
10. Complete
47
Introduction
6.3.2
Change the settings (For static IPv6 address)
Use this flowchart when changing the settings.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Perform setup.
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”“System Settings (Station View) (→page 374)”
Were any of the following changed? "Number," "Name," "Location," "IP Address," "Location Registry," "Camera Name"
YES NO
Was "IP Address" changed from among these options?
4. Upload the setting data to the station whose settings were changed.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
YES NO
4. Because the setting data for the station whose IP address was changed is no longer associated, re associate the data.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station will be restarted, and the changed IP Address will be reflected in the station.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
48
Introduction
5. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete 6. Complete
49
Introduction
6.3.3
Add a station (For static IPv6 address)
Use flowchart to add a station.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Set the communication method for the IX Support Tool to "IPv4."
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
4. Add the setting data.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
First, add the station data to “Station Information (→page 170)” .
5. Install the additional station.
Note the MAC addresses of all the stations.
6. Associate the setting data with the additional station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
7. Set the communication method for the IX Support Tool to "IPv6."
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
8. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
50
Introduction
9. Set the time for the additional station.
10. Set the display language for the additional station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
11. Complete
51
Introduction
6.3.4
Delete a station (For static IPv6 address)
Use flowchart to delete a station.
Important • If a page is placed without deleting the station from the system, the operation may be delayed.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. From the setting data, delete the data of the station to be deleted.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
52
Introduction
6.3.5
Replace a station (due to malfunction, etc.) (For static IPv6 address)
Use flowchart to replace a station.
1. Set the language.
Can the setting data of the station to be replaced be retrieved?
YES NO
2. Retrieve the setting data from the station to be replaced.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
2. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
3. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
3. Change "Static / DHCP" to "Static IPv6" for the newly installed station and configure an appropriate "IPv6 Address."
To configure a station through a Web browser, refer to the Web Setting Manual for each station.
4. Change "Static / DHCP" to "Static IPv6" for the newly installed station and configure an appropriate "IPv6 Address."
To configure a station through a Web browser, refer to the Web Setting Manual for each station.
4. Replace the setting data.
*If the settings were changed with the station, they cannot be reflected.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
5. Replace the setting data.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
5. Set the display language for the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
53
Introduction
6. Set the display language for the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
6. Complete 7. Complete
54
Introduction
6.4
For stateless IPv6 address
Important
If the settings are not saved, it may be impossible to restore them after maintenance or after-sales servicing.
6.4.1
Creating new data
Use flowchart to create new configuration, e.g., when installing a new system.
1. Install a device (router, etc.) that can transmit Router Advertisement (RA) (that can perform stateless auto-configuration).
Do not change the device so that it cannot transmit Router Advertisement (RA). For how to set up, refer to the manual of the device.
2. Set the language.
3. Perform "Create New System."
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
4. Perform setup using "Table View."
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
5. Install all stations.
Note the MAC addresses of all the stations.
55
Introduction
6. Associate the created setting data to the station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
Each station is restarted and IPv6 Address will be automatically configured.
If IP Address fails to be automatically configured, it will become "FDC2::7000." If this happens, cycle power to the station, and then the IP Address will be automatically reconfigured.
7. Set the communication method for the IX Support Tool to "IPv6."
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
8. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
9. Set the time for all stations.
10. Set the display language for all stations (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
11. Complete
56
Introduction
6.4.2
Change the settings (For stateless IPv6 address)
Use this flowchart when changing the settings.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Perform setup.
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”“System Settings (Station View) (→page 374)”
Were any of the following changed? "Number," "Name," "Location," "IP Address," "Location Registry," "Camera Name"
YES NO
Was "IP Address" changed from among these options?
4. Upload the setting data to the station whose settings were changed.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
YES NO
4. Because the setting data for the station whose IP address was changed is no longer associated, re associate the data.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station will be restarted, and the changed IP Address will be reflected in the station.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
57
Introduction
5. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete 6. Complete
58
Introduction
6.4.3
Add a station (For stateless IPv6 address)
Use flowchart to add a station.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Add the setting data.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
First, add the station data to “Station Information (→page 170)” .
4. Install the additional station.
5. Set the communication method for the IX Support Tool to "IPv4."
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
6. Associate the setting data with the additional station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station is restarted and IPv6 Address will be automatically configured.
If IP Address fails to be automatically configured, it will become "FDC2::7000." If this happens, cycle power to the station, and then the IP Address will be automatically reconfigured.
7. Set the communication method for the IX Support Tool to "IPv6."
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
59
Introduction
8. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
9. Set the time for the additional station.
10. Set the display language for the additional station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
11. Complete
60
Introduction
6.4.4
Delete a station (For stateless IPv6 address)
Use flowchart to delete a station.
Important • If a page is placed without deleting the station from the system, the operation may be delayed.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. From the setting data, delete the data of the station to be deleted.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
61
Introduction
6.4.5
Replace a station (due to malfunction, etc.) (For stateless IPv6 address)
Use flowchart to replace a station.
1. Set the language.
Can the setting data of the station to be replaced be retrieved?
YES NO
2. Retrieve the setting data from the station to be replaced.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
2. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
3. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
3. Change "Static / DHCP" to "Static IPv6" for the newly installed station and configure an appropriate "IPv6 Address."
To configure a station through a Web browser, refer to the Web Setting Manual for each station.
4. Change "Static / DHCP" to "Static IPv6" for the newly installed station and configure an appropriate "IPv6 Address."
To configure a station through a Web browser, refer to the Web Setting Manual for each station.
4. Replace the setting data.
*If the settings were changed with the station, they cannot be reflected.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
The station is restarted and IPv6 Address will be automatically configured.
If IP Address fails to be automatically configured, it will become "FDC2::7000." If this happens, cycle power to the station, and then the IP Address will be automatically reconfigured.
62
Introduction
5. Replace the setting data.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
The station is restarted and IPv6 Address will be automatically configured.
If IP Address fails to be automatically configured, it will become "FDC2::7000." If this happens, cycle power to the station, and then the IP Address will be automatically reconfigured.
5. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
6. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
6. Set the display language for the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
7. Set the display language for the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to the Operation Manual for each station.
7. Complete 8. Complete
63
Introduction
6.5
For IPv6 address with DHCP
Important
If the settings are not saved, it may be impossible to restore them after maintenance or after-sales servicing.
6.5.1
Creating new data
Use flowchart to create new configuration, e.g., when installing a new system.
1. Set up the DHCP server.
Configure so that a static IP address is assigned to the station by the DHCP server.
DUID of the station is "00030001 + MAC address." For information on DHCP server setting methods, refer to the DHCP server manual.
2. Set the language.
3. "Create New System"
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
4. Configure using "Table View"
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
5. Install all stations.
Note the MAC addresses of all the stations.
64
Introduction
6. Associate the created setting data to the station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station is restarted and the IPv6 Address assigned by DHCP server beforehand will be assigned.
If a DHCP address cannot be assigned, it will default to "FDC2::7000."
7. Choose "IPv6" for the communication method of IX Support Tool.
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
8. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
9. Set the time for all stations.
10. Set the display language for each station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to each station's Operation Manual.
11. Complete
65
Introduction
6.5.2
Change the settings (For IPv6 address with DHCP)
Use this flowchart when changing the settings.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. Perform setup.
Follow the instructions for each setting item and perform setup.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”“System Settings (Station View) (→page 374)”
Did you change the "Number," "Name," "Location," "IP Address," "Location Registry," or " Camera Name?"
YES NO
Was "IP Address" changed from among these options?
4. Upload the setting data to the station whose settings were changed.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
YES NO
4. Cancel the association for the setting data for the station whose IP address was changed, then re-associate the data.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station will be restarted, and the changed "IP Address" will be reflected in the station.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
66
Introduction
5. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete 6. Complete
67
Introduction
6.5.3
Add a station (For IPv6 address with DHCP)
Use flowchart to add a station.
1. Configure so that the IP address for the station to be added to the DHCP server is assigned as a static address.
For information on DHCP server setting methods, refer to the DHCP server manual.
2. Set the language.
3. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
4. Add the setting data.
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)”
First, add the station data to “Station Information (→page 170)” .
5. Install the additional station.
6. Choose "IPv4" for the communication method of IX Support Tool.
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
7. Associate the setting data with the additional station.
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
The station is restarted and the IPv6 Address assigned by DHCP server beforehand will be assigned.
If a DHCP address cannot be assigned, it will default to "FDC2::7000." 68
Introduction
8. Choose "IPv6" for the communication method of IX Support Tool.
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)”
9. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
10. Set the time for the additional station.
11. Set the display language of the station to add (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to each station's Operation Manual.
12. Complete
69
Introduction
6.5.4
Delete a station (For IPv6 address with DHCP)
Use flowchart to delete a station.
Important • If a page is placed without deleting the station from the system, the operation may be delayed.
1. Set the language.
2. Retrieve the setting data for all the stations.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
3. From the setting data, delete the data of the station to be deleted.
4. Upload the setting data to all stations.
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
5. Complete
70
Introduction
6.5.5
Replace a station (due to malfunction, etc.) (For IPv6 address with DHCP)
Use flowchart to replace a station.
Can the setting data of the station to be replaced be retrieved?
YES NO
1. Retrieve the setting data from the station to be replaced.
“Download Settings From Station (→page 143)”
1. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
2. Configure so that the IP address for the new station to be installed on the DHCP server is carried over from the old station.
For information on DHCP server setting methods, refer to the DHCP server manual.
3. Set the language.
4. Replace the station.
Note the MAC address of the station to be replaced.
4. Change "Static / DHCP" to "Static IPv6" for the newly installed station and configure an appropriate "IPv6 Address."
To configure a station through a Web browser, refer to Web Setting Manual for each station.
5. Change "Static / DHCP" to "Static IPv6" for the newly installed station and configure an appropriate "IPv6 Address."
To configure a station through a Web browser, refer to Web Setting Manual for each station.
5. Replace the setting data.
*If the settings were changed with the station, they cannot be reflected.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
The station is restarted and the IPv6 Address assigned by DHCP server beforehand will be assigned.
If a DHCP address cannot be assigned, it will default to "FDC2::7000." 71
Introduction
6. Replace the setting data.
“Station Replacement (→page 162)”
The station is restarted and the IPv6 Address assigned by DHCP server beforehand will be assigned.
If a DHCP address cannot be assigned, it will default to "FDC2::7000."
6. Set the display language of the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to each station's Operation Manual.
7. Set the display language of the replaced station (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV).
Refer to each station's Operation Manual.
7. Complete 8. Complete
72
Startup and Configuration
Startup and Configuration
1. System requirements
PC requirements for using the IX Support Tool.
Operating System CPU Memory Resolution Windows 7 Professional, Windows 7 Enterprise, Windows 7 Ultimate Windows 8, Windows 8 pro, Windows 8 Enterprise Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1 pro, Windows 8.1 Enterprise Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 pro, Windows 10 Enterprise Windows 10 Education 32 bit (x86) processor or 64 bit (x64) processor of 1 GHz or higher 4 GB RAM or higher 1280x768 or greater 74
Startup and Configuration
2. Installing IX Support Tool
1.
Access our Web site at https://www.aiphone.net/product/support/ and download the IX Support Tool to your PC.
2.
Extract the downloaded file.
Double-click "setup.exe" in the extracted folder and install IX Support Tool.
• If .NET Framework4.5 is not installed yet, install .NET Framework4.5 first. Install this, following the instructions on the screen.
3.
Click
[Next]
.
4.
Choose the location to install the IX Support Tool and the user who will use the IX Supervision Tool, then click
[Next]
.
75
Startup and Configuration Important • If using a PC with user privileges, select "All Users."
5.
Click
[Next]
.
6.
Click
[Close]
.
• IX Support Tool is now installed.
76
Startup and Configuration
3. Login and registration of the station
1.
Double-click the "AIPHONE IX SupportTool" shortcut created on the desktop or "AIPHONE_IX_SupportTool.exe" in the folder specified during installation.
By default, it will be installed in "Computer > Local Disk(C) > Program Files > AIPHONE_IX_SupportTool."
2.
Enter "ID" and "Password" and click
[Login]
.
• The setting data configured during the previous login session will be shown.
• If logging into the IX Support Tool for the first time, proceed to Step 3.
• The default ID and Password are "admin."
3.
When first logging into IX Support Tool, the "New System" screen is displayed.
Refer to “Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)” and proceed with the setup.
77
Startup and Configuration System settings Number of Stations settings Wizard function selection Select the automatic door release setting
“Restore System Settings (→page 164)”
“Reading in data created by another IX Support Tool (→page 139)”
Once "New System" configuration is complete, setting data is automatically generated and the Settings (Table View) screen is displayed.
78
Startup and Configuration
4. How to configure
When logging into the IX Support Tool, the following setting window will be shown. Each station can be configured from this window.
• Depending on PC and OS being used, the window may be slightly different.
• After setup, refer to the Operation Manual for each station and confirm operation.
4.1
Settings window Settings screen sample
Configure all the stations in the system from the Settings window.
Setting switching:
Click to switch to Settings (Station View).
Update:
Click this button to update the station settings.
Menu bar:
Allows user to create new setting data, save the settings, etc.
Title bar:
Displays the system name and title when editing settings.
Notes:
Displays notes.
Setting menu:
Show all items that can be configured. Click the title to be configured to display the appropriate Settings screen.
Settings screen:
The Settings screen for the currently selected title is displayed.
79
Startup and Configuration
Station View
Station settings can be configured for each station in the system.
Displays station information while editing settings.
Setting switching:
Click to switch to Settings (Table View).
Menu bar:
Allows user to create new setting data, save the settings, etc.
Update:
Click this button to update the station settings.
Select Station to Edit:
Allows user to change the station to be edited.
Copy Settings:
Copies the settings currently being edited to another station.
Title bar:
Displays the system name and title when editing settings.
Setting menu:
Show all items that can be configured. Click the title to be configured to display the appropriate Settings screen.
Settings screen:
The Settings screen for the currently selected title is displayed.
Note • Settings which cannot be modified will be grayed out.
80
Startup and Configuration
4.2
How to configure
1.
Click the title to be configured.
• The Settings window for that particular title will be shown.
2.
Enter setting values for each entry.
• The selected field will turn orange. (Settings (Table View) only) • When changing the settings, the field will turn pink. (Settings (Table View) only) • Some titles allow copy and paste.
Important • Be sure to input the settings for entries in red. Upon use, leave the unnecessary items at their default values.
• Select an entry field and press the F1 key to display a Detailed Explanation (Settings (Table View) only).
Move to related item:
This allows you to move to the Settings screen for related entries.
3.
When you are done configuring on this screen, click
[Update]
to save the settings.
• To cancel all settings, click another title in the Setting menu.
• If there is an error when clicking
[Update]
, the error message will be shown and the settings will not be allowed to be saved.
The field will be shown in red if there is an error. (Settings (Table View) only) 81
Startup and Configuration • If another title is selected without clicking
[Save]
, the system will prompt whether to save the settings. Click
[Yes]
to save the settings; click
[No]
to continue without saving.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the original screen.
4.
Perform Steps 1 - 3 for other titles as well. 82
Startup and Configuration
4.3
Copy settings (Settings (Station View))
Copy the settings marked with "♠" in Settings (Station View). The copied settings can be applied either to all station types or to all stations of the same type.
2 4
How to copy the settings
1.
Click the title of the entry to copy and display the Settings screen.
2.
Select "Copy to all stations" or "Copy to stations by Type."
3.
Select the items to be copied from "Settings."
4.
Click
[Copy]
.
• The "♠" entries will be copied.
3 83
Startup and Configuration Important
.
– "Call Origination" -
“Ringback Tone (except IX-MV) ♠ (→page 423)”
– "Call Origination" -
“Busy Tone (except IX-MV)♠ (→page 429)”
– "Call Origination" -
“Error Tone (Call Failed) (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)♠ (→page 430)”
– "Incoming Call" -
– "Incoming Call" -
“Call Button (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 433)”
– "Incoming Call" -
“Option Input (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 434)”
– "Relay Output" -
– "Relay Output" -
“Relay Control (start) (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 445)”
– "Relay Output" -
“Relay Control (end) (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 446)”
– "Option Input Page" -
“Message File Name (→page 454)”
– "Network Camera Integration" -
“Event Tone (for IX-MV)♠ (→page 460)”
– "Paging Settings" -
– "Communication Audio Messages" - "Start Communication" - “Message (→page 489)”
– "Communication Audio Messages" - "Code Received" -
– "Chime" - "Weekly Schedule" -
– "Chime" - "Daily Schedule" - “Chime (→page 494)”
– "Speed Dials / Favorites" - "Group Message Page" -
– "Speed Dials / Favorites" - "All Message Page" - “Message (→page 523)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Communication End Pretone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♠ (→page 530)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Call Queue Notification (for IX-MV7-*)♠ (→page 530)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Paging Pretone (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♠ (→page 531)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Auto Answer Tone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♠ (→page 531)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“On Hold (for IX-MV7-*)♠ (→page 532)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Key Received (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♠ (→page 532)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Error (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♠ (→page 533)”
– "Communication" -
– "Monitor" - “Monitored Notification (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♠ (→page 537)”
84
Startup and Configuration
5. System settings list
The following items can be configured using IX Support Tool.
The symbols indicate the following: ♦: Be sure to input the settings. Upon use, leave the unnecessary items at their default values.
♠: The setting item information can be copied.
• The following list is the summary of IX Support Tool. The contents, how they are displayed, and the order of entries may vary from the actual ones.
• Download and back up the setting file (Table View:
) in case after-sales service is required, and store it in a safe place where it will not be lost.
If a backup has not been performed, it may not be possible to recover the data during after-sales service.
■ Table View
Setting items Reference pages
Station Information Identification ID and Password Add Station Remove Station Location Registry (except for IXW-MA) Number♦ Name Location (except for IXW MA)
Time Expanded System (not used) Time Zone Daylight Savings Time Manual Date / Time Setup Administrator ID♦ Administrator Password♦ User ID♦ User Password♦ ONVIF ID (IX-DV, IX-DVF( *), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♦ ONVIF Password (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) ♦ RTSP ID (IX-DV, IX-DVF( *), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-* only) ♦ RTSP Password (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX SS-2G, IX-RS-* only) ♦ Select time zone Enable automatic daylight savings time
85
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Network Settings IP Address DNS IPv4 Address IPv6 Address Batch IP Address Configuration Primary Server Secondary Server SIP (except for IXW MA) SIP Connections Miscellaneous SIP Server (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Primary Server Secondary Server Tertiary Server Hostname (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) IP Version Static / DHCP IP Address♦ Subnet Mask♦ Default Gateway IP Address♦ Default Gateway IPv4 IPv6 IPv4 IPv6 SIP Signaling Port♦ User Agent (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) ID
Reference pages
Password IPv4 Address IPv6 Address Port♦ ID Password IPv4 Address IPv6 Address Port♦ ID Password IPv4 Address IPv6 Address Port♦ Register Transmission Interval [sec] (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♦
86
Setting items
Startup and Configuration Multicast Address (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Video (IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF( *), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Batch Multicast Address Configuration Video Encoder 1 Video Encoder 2 DTMF digit interval timeout [sec] (except for IX-MV, IX DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX SS(-*)) ♦ Call health check timer [sec]♦ IPv4
Reference pages
IPv6 Video Codec (IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only)
Resolution (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Frame Rate [fps] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) Select Profile [H.264 / AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX DA, IX-DF(-*) only) I-picture interval [H.264/ AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♦ Bit rate [kbps] [H.264 / AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Select Quality [Motion JPEG] (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) RTP Start Port♦ RTP End Port♦ Second Video Encoder (IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Video Codec (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Resolution (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Frame Rate [fps] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) Select Profile [H.264 / AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX DA, IX-DF(-*) only)
87
Setting items
Audio (except for IXW-MA) Packet Priority Audio Buffer NTP Startup and Configuration Master Station Video Setting (IX-MV7-* only) Enable NTP Synchronization Interval [hour]♦ Primary Server Address Port♦ 88 I-picture interval [H.264/ AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♦ Bit rate [kbps] [H.264 / AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Select Quality [Motion JPEG] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) RTP Start Port♦ RTP End Port♦ Video Streaming
Reference pages
Frame Rate [fps] Select Profile I-picture interval♦ Bit rate [kbps] Audio Codec Audio RTP Transmission Interval [msec] RTP Idle Detection Time [sec]♦ Audio 1 RTP Start Port♦ Audio 1 RTP End Port♦ Audio 2 RTP Start Port♦ Audio 2 RTP End Port♦ Packets Buffered at Audio Start Maximum Packets Buffered TOS Value (Audio) (except for IXW-MA) ♦ TOS Value (Video) (IX MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) TOS Value (SIP) (except for IXW-MA) ♦ VLAN Setting VLAN ID♦ VLAN Priority IPv4 IPv6
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Secondary Server Address Port♦ System Information Location Registry Address Book (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Open Station List Open Network Camera List Open Network Camera Registry IPv4 IPv6 Camera Name♦ Hostname IP Address (IPv4) IP Address (IPv6) ID♦ Password♦ Group (for Master) (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Custom Sound Registry Call Settings Station Information (IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), or IX-SS-2G only) Called Stations (Master Stations) (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, or IXW-MA) Create Group Call Button Function Call Destination Settings are unnecessary, Master Station can call any station in Address Book.
Reference pages
-
89
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Call Origination (except for IXW-MA) Call Origination Advanced Settings Tone Settings Call Restart Function (except for IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Weekly Schedule (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS( *)) Call Method (except for IX MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Ringback Tone (except for IX-MV) Call Timeout (except for
[Call Button]
- IX-MV) ♦ Ringback Tone Count [time(s)] (except for IX-MV) Call Destination (
[Option Input 1 - 4]
- IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Standard Mode Settings (except for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Destination Dwell 1 - 8 (except for IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Destination Dwell Time (except for IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♦ Start Time Daily Schedule (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS( *)) End Time Call Destination Priority Start Time End Time Call Destination Priority Busy Tone (except for IX MV) Error Tone (Call Failed) (except for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Call Restart Function
Reference pages
90
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Incoming Call (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Call Answer Settings Ringtone Auto Answer Ringtone (except for IX MV7-*, IX-MV) Ringback Tone Count (except for IX-MV7-*) Call Button (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Option Input (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Call Button Ringtone Count [time(s)] (IX-MV7-* only) Option Input Ringtone Count [time(s)] (IX-MV7-* only) VoIP Phone Call Priority VoIP Phone (except for IX MV) Option Input/Relay Output Settings Option Input Option Input Advanced Settings Relay Output Relay Output Advanced Settings Name (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Function Type Detection Time API Detection Time Range Detection Time♦ API 1 API 2 Name (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Function Option Relay Control Output Time Range Door Release Authorization (except for IXW-MA) Output Time Range Output Time♦
Reference pages
91
Setting items
Paging Settings Paging Origination (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Authentication Key Startup and Configuration Sound Settings (except for IX-MV and IXW-MA) Door Release Weekly Schedule (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Relay Control (start) (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Relay Control (end) (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Start Time Daily Schedule (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) End Time Start Time End Time Option Relay Control Authentication Key (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Reference pages
Paging Timeout [sec]♦
All Page (IX-MV-* and IX-MV only) Option Input Page (IX-MV7-* only) Paging Wait Timer [sec] (IX-MV7-* only) ♦ Urgent Page Response (IX MV7-* only) Lock Paging (IX-MV7-* only) Destination Group Number Priority Message File Name Play Count [time(s)]
92
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Function Settings Door Release (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Door Release Assignment Network Camera Integration (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Profile Setting Event Registration Paging Settings (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, or IXW-MA) Bathroom Call (IXW MA only) (not used) Email Event Tone (IX-MV only) Play count of Event Tone Server Settings Authentication Settings Email Addresses Contact Assignment Authentication Key Profile
Reference pages
Event Function (IX-MV7-* only) Event Tone (IX-MV7-* only) ID (IX-MV7-* only) Password (IX-MV7-* only) Call Origination (IX-MV7-* only) Call Destination (IX-MV7-* only) Priority (IX-MV7-* only) Paging Pretone
SMTP Server SMTP Port♦ SMTP Encryption SMTP Authentication Mode ID Password Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Source Address
93
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Email Event Trigger Periodic Log Transmission Outgoing Normal Call (except for IXW-MA) Incoming Normal Call (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Outgoing Priority Call (except for IXW-MA) Incoming Priority Call (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Outgoing Urgent Call (except for IXW-MA) Incoming Urgent Call (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Door Release Activated (IX MV7-*, IX-MV, or IX-RS-* only) Call Failed (except for IXW MA) Latch Reset (IX-RS-*, IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G only) Error Station Restarted SD Card Error (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA( *) only) Recording Memory Full (IX MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Line Supervision (Passed) (IX-MV7-* only) Line Supervision (Failed) (IX-MV7-* only) Device Check (Passed) (IX MV7-* only) Device Check (Failed) (IX MV7-* only) Subject Periodic Log Transmission Periodic Log Transmit Time Periodic Log Transmit Interval Periodic Log Transmission Subject
Reference pages
94
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
CGI Integration SIF Integration Send Test Email (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Additional Settings (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF( *) only) SIF Functionality SIP URI Format (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) SIF Settings (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Transmission Trigger (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS( *)) Attach Image Image Filename CGI Functionality Program Type IPv4 IPv6 Destination Port SSL Connection Begin Outgoing Call (except for IXW-MA) Begin Communication (Source) (except for IXW MA) Door Release Indication (IX-MV7-* and IX-RS-* only) End Communication (except for IXW-MA) Change contact Unit error Begin broadcast (IX-MV7-* only) End broadcast (IX-MV7-* only) Begin Transfer (IX-MV7-* only) End Transfer (IX-MV7-* only) Periodical Transmission Initialization Notice End Outgoing Call (except for IXW-MA) Begin Incoming Call (except for IXW-MA)
Reference pages
95
Setting items
Startup and Configuration End Incoming Call (except for IXW-MA) Latch Reset (except for IX MV7-* and IXW-MA) Change Call Destination (except for IXW-MA) Call Failure (except for IXW-MA) Begin Incoming Transfer Call (IX-MV7-* only) Begin On Hold (IX-MV7-* only) End On Hold (IX-MV7-* only) Begin Incoming Page (except for IXW-MA) End Incoming Page (except for IXW-MA) Paging Failure (IX-MV7-* only) Begin Monitoring (IX-MV7-* only) End Monitoring (IX-MV7-* only) Monitoring Failure (IX-MV7 * only) Begin Monitored (except for IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) End Monitored (except for IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) Begin Communication (Destination) (except for IXW-MA) Begin Privacy (IX-MV7-* only) End Privacy (IX-MV7-* only) Keypad Input (IX-MV7-* only) Speed Dial Input (IX-MV7-* only) Begin Record (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA( *) only) End Record (IX-MV7-*, IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Recording Memory Full (IX MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only)
Reference pages
96
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Record (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Periodical Transmission (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS( *)) Periodical Transmission Interval Passed Line Supervision (IX-MV7-* only) Failed Line Supervision (IX MV7-* only) Passed Device Check (IX MV7-* only) Failed Device Check (IX MV7-* only) SD Card Error (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA( *) only) SIP Registration Failure (except for IXW-MA) Network Camera Event (IX MV7-* only) Range
Reference pages
Upload SIF File Download SIF File Record Mode (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Record Event Interval♦
Recorded Device (IX-MV7-* only) Prevent Overwrite Video Recording File Length Event Recording Timer (IX MV7-* only) Manual Recording (IX-MV7 * only) Incoming Call (IX-MV7-* only) Communication (Master) (IX-MV7-* only) Monitor (IX-MV7-* only) Outgoing Call (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Communication (Door) (IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Monitored (IX-DV, IX-DVF( *), IX-SSA(-*) only) Schedule (IX-DV, IX-DVF( *), IX-SSA(-*) only)
97
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Audio Recording (IX-MV7-*, or IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*) only) Weekly Schedule (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-SSA(-*) only) Communication Audio Messages (IX RS-*, IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), or IX-SS-2G only) Start Communication Code Received Chime (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Weekly Schedule CSR SSL Certificate IEEE 802.1X (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX SS(-*)) Daily Schedule Display Mode (IX MV7-* only) Master UI Mode Standard Mode Receptionist Mode Start Time End Time Message Code Message Start Time Chime Start Time Chime IEEE 802.1X
Color Scheme Screen Layout Company Information Greeting Information Images EAP EAP User Name EAP Password Home Screen Name Text Size♦ Bold Text Color Greeting Text Size♦ Bold Text Color Company Image Greeting Image Receptionist Image 98
Reference pages
Setting items
Bathroom Link (not used) Transfer Settings Absent Transfer (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Delay Transfer (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Schedule Transfer (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Weekly Schedule Lock Transfer (IX MV7-* only) Startup and Configuration Button Function Group Call Destination Reject Incoming Call Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button Name for Group Call Button Name for Select By Name Button Name for Select By List Button Name for Enter Number
Reference pages
Daily Schedule (IX-MV7-* only) Absent Transfer Transfer Destination List Re-Transfer Destination (IX-MV7-* only) Delay Transfer Delay Time [sec]♦ Transfer Destination List Re-Transfer Destination (IX-MV7-* only) Schedule Transfer Transfer Destination List Re-Transfer Destination (IX-MV7-* only) Start Time End Time Transfer Destination List Re-Transfer Destination Start Time End Time
99
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Station Settings Speed Dials / Favorites (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Advanced Speed Dial Button Settings Privacy (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Speed Dial Name (IX-MV7 * only) Function Individual Call Group Call Group Page Number Priority Group Number Priority Group Number Priority Priority Group Number All Page Group Message Page (IX MV7-* only) All Message Page (IX-MV7 * only) Message Priority Play Count [time(s)] Message Monitor (IX-MV7-* only) Network Camera Monitor (IX-MV7-* only) Option Relay Control (IX MV7-* only) Priority Play Count [time(s)] Number Network Camera Total Lock (IX-MV7-* only) Output Time Range Output Time♦ TLS Option Relay Control Key Privacy
Reference pages
100
Setting items
Volume / Tone (except for IXW-MA) Volume Tone Startup and Configuration Handset Transmit (IX-MV7 *, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV only) Handset Receive (IX-MV7 *, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV only) Hands-free Transmit (IX MV7-*, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV only) Hands-free Receive (IX MV7-*, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV only) Headset Jack Transmit (IX MV7-* only) Headset Jack Receive (IX MV7-* only) Transmit (except for IX MV7-*, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV) Receive (except for IX MV7-*, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV) External Input (not used) External Output (IX-RS-* only) VoIP Phone Volume Adjustment (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Ringtone Paging (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), and IX-SSA(-*) only) Button Feedback (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Communication Timeout Notification (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Communication End Pretone (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Call Queue Notification (IX MV7-* only) Paging Pretone (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Auto Answer Tone (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) On Hold (IX-MV7-* only) Key Received (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX BA, IX-SS(-*))
Reference pages
347 347 347 347 347 347 347 347
101
Setting items
Startup and Configuration Communication (except for IXW-MA) Mic Select (not used) Headset Specification (IX MV7-* only) Audio Output (for Master) (IX-MV7-* only) Audio Output (for Door) (except for IX-MV7-*, IX SS-2G, or IX-MV) Monitor (except for IXW-MA, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX SS(-*)) Monitor Timeout [sec] (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) ♦ Scan Monitor (IX-MV7-* only) Master Station Display (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Prevent Being Monitored (except for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Monitored Notification Tone (except for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Monitored LED Notification (except for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Error (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Reference pages
Talk Timeout [sec]♦ Communication Start Tone (except for IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Force Touch-to-Talk (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only)
Type Number Camera Settings Open Camera List Brightness Primary Video Source (IX MV7-* only) Aspect Ratio (IX-MV7-* only) Time Format (IX-MV only) Standby LED State Keypad (IX-MV7-* only)
102
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Camera (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) Adjustment Color Settings (IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) Door Release Assignment (IX-RS-* only) White LED Line Supervision (IX MV7-* only) Line Supervision Interval Maintenance Firmware Update Initialization Settings File Backup syslog (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Device Check Interval Backlight Compensation
Reference pages
Low Light Sensitivity Brightness♦ Contrast♦ Color♦ Call / Communication Monitored Contact Assignment
Authentication Key Door Release by IX-RS Test Interval Weekly Line Supervision Schedule Test Interval Weekly Device Check Schedule IPv4 Address IPv6 Address Port♦
103
■ Station View
Setting items
Station Information Identification ID and Password Startup and Configuration Time Expanded System (not used) Network Settings IP Address Time Zone Daylight Savings Time Date and Time DNS IPv4 Address IPv6 Address Primary Server♠ Secondary Server♠ Number♦ Name Location (except for IXW MA) Administrator ID♦♠ Administrator Password♦♠ User ID♦♠ User Password♦♠ ONVIF ID (IX-DV, IX-DVF( *), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♦♠ ONVIF Password (IX EA(U), IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), and IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♦♠ RTSP ID (IX-DV, IX-DVF( *), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-* only) ♦♠ RTSP Password (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX SS-2G, IX-RS-* only) ♦♠ Select time zone♠ Enable automatic daylight savings time♠
Reference pages
Hostname (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Static / DHCP♠ IP Address♦ Subnet Mask♦♠ Default Gateway♠ IP Address♦ Default Gateway♠ IPv4 IPv6 IPv4 IPv6
104
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
SIP (except for IXW MA) Multicast Address (IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Video (IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF( *), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) SIP Connections SIP Server (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Primary Server Miscellaneous Video Encoder 1 Secondary Server Tertiary Server SIP Signaling Port♦♠ User Agent (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) ID♠
Reference pages
Password♠ IPv4 Address♠ IPv6 Address♠ Port♦♠ ID♠ Password♠ IPv4 Address♠ IPv6 Address♠ Port♦♠ ID♠ Password♠ IPv4 Address♠ IPv6 Address♠ Port♦♠ Register Transmission Interval [sec] (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♦♠ DTMF digit interval timeout [sec] (except for IX-MV, IX DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX SS(-*)) ♦♠ Call health check timer♦♠ For Call / Paging (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only)
For Call (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) Video Codec (IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) ♠
Resolution (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♠ Frame Rate [fps] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) ♠
105
Setting items
Startup and Configuration Video Encoder 2 Master Station Video Setting (IX-MV7-* only) Select Profile [H.264 / AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX DA, IX-DF(-*) only) I-picture interval [H.264/ AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♦ Bit rate [kbps] [H.264 / AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♠ Select Quality [Motion JPEG] (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♠ RTP Start Port♦ RTP End Port♦ Second Video Encoder (IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♠ Video Codec (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♠ Resolution (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♠ Frame Rate [fps] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) ♠ Select Profile [H.264 / AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX DA, IX-DF(-*) only) I-picture interval [H.264/ AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♦ Bit rate [kbps] [H.264 / AVC] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♠ Select Quality [Motion JPEG] (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♠ RTP Start Port♦ RTP End Port♦ Video Streaming
Reference pages
Frame Rate [fps]♠ Select Profile I-picture interval♦ Bit Rate [kbps]♠
Using a 3rd party product to monitor video/audio from IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) 106
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Audio (except for IXW-MA) Packet Priority Audio Buffer NTP System Information Location (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Address Book (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Enable NTP♠ Synchronization Interval [hour]♦♠ Primary Server Address♠ Secondary Server Station List Network Camera List Port♦♠ Address♠ Port♦ ♠ VoIP Phone Registration Camera Name♦ Hostname IP Address (IPv4) IP Address (IPv6) ID♦ Password♦ 107 IPv4 IPv6 IPv4 IPv6 Audio Codec♠ Audio RTP Transmission Interval [msec]♠ RTP Idle Detection Time [sec]♦♠ Audio 1 RTP Start Port♦ Audio 1 RTP End Port♦ Audio 2 RTP Start Port♦ Audio 2 RTP End Port♦ Packets Buffered at Audio Start♠ Maximum Packets Buffered♠ TOS Value (Audio) (except for IXW-MA) ♦♠ TOS Value (Video) (IX MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) only) ♦♠ TOS Value (SIP) (except for IXW-MA) ♦♠ VLAN Setting♠ VLAN ID♦♠ VLAN Priority♠
Reference pages
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Group (for Master) (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Custom Sound Registry (except for IXW-MA) Call Settings Station Information (IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), or IX-SS-2G only) Called Stations (Master Stations) (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, or IXW-MA) Call Origination (except for IXW-MA) VoIP Phone Registration Call Origination Advanced Settings PTZ Operation Audio Monitoring
Reference pages
Call Button Function
Call Destination Settings are unnecessary, Master Station can call any station in Address Book.
Number
Protocol (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX SS(-*)) Call Method (except for IX MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Ringback Tone (except for IX-MV) ♠ Call Timeout (except for IX MV - "Call Button") ♦♠ Ringback Tone Count (except for IX-MV - "Call Button") ♠ Call Destination (IX-MV7-* or IX-MV - "Option Input 1 - 4" only) Standard Mode Settings (except for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Destination by Time Delay Settings (except for IX MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Destination Dwell Time[sec] (except for IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♦
108
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Tone Settings Call Restart Function Schedule Settings (Weekly Schedule) (except for IX MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Start Time Schedule Settings (Daily Schedule) (except for IX MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) End Time Call Destination Priority Start Time End Time Call Destination Priority Busy Tone (except for IX MV) ♠ Error Tone (Call Failed) (other than IX-MV7-* or IX MV) ♠ Call Restart Function (except for IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Auto Answer♠ Incoming Call (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Call Answer Settings Ringtone VoIP Phone (except for IX MV) Option Input/Relay Output Settings Option Input Option Input Advanced Settings Name (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Function Type Ringtone (other than IX MV7-*, IX-MV) ♠ Ringback Tone Count (other than IX-MV7-*) ♠ Call Button (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Option Input (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Call Button Ringtone Count [time(s)] (IX-MV7-* only) ♠ Option Input Ringtone Count [time(s)] (IX-MV7-* only) ♠ VoIP Phone Call Priority
Reference pages
109
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Relay Output Relay Output Advanced Settings Paging Settings Paging Origination (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Option Relay Control Authentication Key (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Detection Time Range API (except for IX-MV, IX DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX SS(-*)) Name (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Function Option Relay Control (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS( *)) Output Time Range API 2 Output Time Range Output Time [msec / sec]♦ Door Release Authorization (except for IXW-MA) Sound Settings (except for IX-MV and IXW-MA) Door Release Schedule Settings (Weekly Schedule) (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Detection Time Range Detection Time♦ API 1 Relay Control (start) (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Relay Control (end) (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Start Time Schedule Settings (Daily Schedule) (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) End Time Start Time End Time Paging Timeout [sec]♦ ♠ Paging Wait Timer [sec] (IX-MV7-* only) ♦ ♠ Urgent Page Response (IX MV7-* only) Lock Paging (IX-MV7-* only) 110
Reference pages
Setting items
All Page (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Option Input Page (IX-MV7-* only) Startup and Configuration Function Settings Door Release (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Door Release Assignment Network Camera Integration (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Profile Setting Event Registration Paging Settings (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, or IXW-MA) Bathroom Call (IXW MA only) (not used) Email Paging Pretone Setting Server Settings Authentication Settings Email Addresses Destination Group Number Priority Message File Name Play Count [time(s)] Contact Assignment Authentication Key Profile Event Function (IX-MV7-* only) Event Tone (IX-MV7-* only) ID (IX-MV7-* only) Password (IX-MV7-* only) Call Origination (IX-MV7-* only) Call Destination (IX-MV7-* only) Priority (IX-MV7-* only) Event Tone (IX-MV only) ♠ Play count of Event Tone♠ Paging Pretone
SMTP Server♠ SMTP Port♦♠ SMTP Encryption♠ SMTP Authentication♠ Mode♠ ID♠ Password♠ Destination 1♠ Destination 2♠ Destination 3♠ Source Address♠
Reference pages
111
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Email Event Trigger Periodic Log Transmission Send Test Email 112 Outgoing Normal Call (except for IXW-MA) Incoming Normal Call (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Outgoing Priority Call (except for IXW-MA) Incoming Priority Call (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Outgoing Urgent Call (except for IXW-MA) Incoming Urgent Call (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Door Release Activated (IX MV7-*, IX-MV, or IX-RS-* only) Call Failed (except for IXW MA) Latch Reset (IX-RS-*, IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G only) Error Station Restarted SD Card Error (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA( *) only) Recording Memory Full (IX MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Line Supervision (Passed) (IX-MV7-* only) Line Supervision (Failed) (IX-MV7-* only) Device Check (Passed) (IX MV7-* only) Device Check (Failed) (IX MV7-* only) Subject♠ Periodic Log Transmission Periodic Log Transmit Time Periodic Log Transmit Interval Periodic Log Transmission Subject
Reference pages
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
CGI Integration SIF Integration Additional Settings (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF( *) only) SIF Functionality SIP URI Format (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ SIF Settings (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Transmission Trigger (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS( *)) Attach Image♠ Image Filename♠ CGI Functionality Program Type♠ IPv4♠ IPv6♠ Destination Port♠ SSL♠ Connection♠ Begin Outgoing Call (except for IXW-MA) Begin Communication (Source) (except for IXW MA) Door Release Indication (IX-MV7-* and IX-RS-* only) End Communication (except for IXW-MA) Change contact Unit Error Begin broadcast (IX-MV7-* only) End broadcast (IX-MV7-* only) Begin Transfer (IX-MV7-* only) End Transfer (IX-MV7-* only) Periodical Transmission Initialization Notice End Outgoing Call (except for IXW-MA) Begin Incoming Call (except for IXW-MA) End Incoming Call (except for IXW-MA)
Reference pages
113
Setting items
Startup and Configuration Latch Reset (except for IX MV7-* and IXW-MA) Change Call Destination (except for IXW-MA) Call Failure (except for IXW-MA) Begin Incoming Transfer Call (IX-MV7-* only) Begin On Hold (IX-MV7-* only) End On Hold (IX-MV7-* only) Begin Incoming Page (except for IXW-MA) End Incoming Page (except for IXW-MA) Paging Failure (IX-MV7-* only) Begin Monitoring (IX-MV7-* only) End Monitoring (IX-MV7-* only) Monitoring Failure (IX-MV7 * only) Begin Monitored (except for IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) End Monitored (except for IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) Begin Communication (Destination) (except for IXW-MA) Begin Privacy (IX-MV7-* only) End Privacy (IX-MV7-* only) Keypad Input (IX-MV7-* only) Speed Dial Input (IX-MV7-* only) Begin Record (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA( *) only) End Record (IX-MV7-*, IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Recording Memory Full (IX MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only)
Reference pages
114
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Record (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) Periodical Transmission (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS( *)) SIF File Management Schedule Settings (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), or IX-SSA(-*) only) Weekly Schedule Communication Audio Messages (IX RS-*, IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), or IX-SS-2G only) Start Communication Code Received 115 Passed Line Supervision (IX-MV7-* only) Failed Line Supervision (IX MV7-* only) Passed Device Check (IX MV7-* only) Failed Device Check (IX MV7-* only) SD Card Error (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA( *) only) SIP Registration Failure (except for IXW-MA) Network Camera Event (IX MV7-* only) Periodical Transmission Interval♦
Reference pages
SIF Communication Settings (sif.ini) SIF Parameter Settings (sif_conf.ini) Record Mode (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) only) ♠ Record Event Recorded Device (IX-MV7-* only) Prevent Overwrite♠ Video Recording File Length♠ Event Recording Timer (IX MV7-* only) ♠ Manual Recording (IX-MV7 * only) ♠ Audio Recording (IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*) only) ♠ Start Time
End Time Message
Code Message
Setting items
Chime (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA) Weekly Schedule CSR Daily Schedule SSL Certificate IEEE 802.1X (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX SS(-*)) Display Mode (IX MV7-* only) Master UI Mode Standard Mode Receptionist Mode Startup and Configuration Start Time Chime Start Time Chime Country State/County/Region City/Locality Organization Organizational Unit Common Name IEEE 802.1X
Reference pages
Color Scheme Screen Layout Company Information Greeting Information EAP♠ EAP User Name♠ EAP Password♠ Home Screen Name Text Size♦ Bold Text Color Greeting Text Size♦ Bold Text Color
116
Setting items
Bathroom Link (not used) Transfer Settings Absent Transfer (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Delay Transfer (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) Schedule Transfer (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Weekly Schedule Startup and Configuration Images Button Function Group Call Destination Reject Incoming Call Company Image Greeting Image Receptionist Image Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button Name for Group Call Button Name for Select By Name Button Name for Select By List Button Name for Enter Number
Reference pages
Absent Transfer
Transfer Destination List (IX-MV7-* only) Transfer Destination (IX-MV only) Re-Transfer Destination (IX-MV7-* only) Delay Transfer
Delay Time [sec]♦ Transfer Destination List (IX-MV7-* only) Transfer Destination (IX-MV only) Re-Transfer Destination (IX-MV7-* only) Schedule Transfer
Transfer Destination Re-Transfer Destination (IX-MV7-* only) Start Time End Time
117
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Privacy (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Daily Schedule (IX-MV7-* only) Transfer Destination Re-Transfer Destination Start Time End Time Lock Lock Transfer (IX MV7-* only) Station Settings Speed Dials / Favorites (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Advanced Speed Dial Button Settings Speed Dial Name (IX-MV7 * only) Function Individual Call Group Call Group Page Number Priority Group Number Priority Group Number Priority Priority Group Number All Page Group Message Page (IX MV7-* only) All Message Page (IX-MV7 * only) Message Priority Play Count [time(s)] Message Monitor (IX-MV7-* only) Network Camera Monitor (IX-MV7-* only) Scan Monitor (IX-MV7-* only) Option Relay Control (IX MV7-* only) Priority Play Count [time(s)] Number Network Camera Open Lock (IX-MV7-* only) Output Time TLS Option Relay Control Key Privacy♠
Reference pages
118
Setting items
Volume / Tone (except for IXW-MA) Volume Tone Startup and Configuration Handset Transmit (IX-MV7 *, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV only) Handset Receive (IX-MV7 *, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV only) Hands-free Transmit (IX MV7-*, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV only) Hands-free Receive (IX MV7-*, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV only) Headset Jack Transmit (IX MV7-* only) Headset Jack Receive (IX MV7-* only) Transmit (except for IX MV7-*, IX-RS-*, or IX-MV) Receive (except for IX MV7-*, IX-RS-*, IX-MV, or IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) Receive (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*) only) External Input (not used) External Output (IX-RS-* only) VoIP Phone Volume Adjustment (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) Ringtone Paging (IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), and IX-SSA(-*) only) Button Feedback (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Communication Timeout Notification (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Communication End Pretone (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Call Queue Notification (IX MV7-* only) ♠ Paging Pretone (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) ♠ Auto Answer Tone (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ On Hold (IX-MV7-* only) ♠
Reference pages
528 528 528 528 528 528 528 528
119
Setting items
Communication (except for IXW-MA) Startup and Configuration Monitor (except for IXW-MA, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX SS(-*)) Monitor Timeout [sec] (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only) ♦♠ Scan Monitor (IX-MV7-* only) Prevent Being Monitored (except for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Monitored Notification Tone (other than IX-MV7-* or IX MV) ♠ Monitored LED Notification (except for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Key Received (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Error (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Mic Select (not used) Headset Specification (IX MV7-* only) Audio Output (for Master) (IX-MV7-* only) Audio Output (for Door) (except for IX-MV7-*, IX SS-2G, or IX-MV) Talk Timeout [sec]♦ ♠
Reference pages
Communication Start Tone (except for IX-MV7-*, IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Force Touch-to-Talk (IX MV7-* and IX-MV only)
Type Number Network Camera Number Dwell Time
120
Startup and Configuration
Setting items
Master Station Display (IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Camera (IX-DV, IX DVF(-*), or IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) Adjustment Color Settings (IX-DA, IX DF(-*) only) Brightness Low Light Sensitivity♠ Brightness♦ Contrast♦ Color♦ Call / Communication♠ Monitored♠ Contact Assignment
Reference pages
Primary Video Source (IX MV7-* only) Aspect Ratio Time Format (IX-MV only) ♠ Standby LED State♠ Keypad (IX-MV7-* only) Backlight Compensation♠
Door Release Assignment (IX-RS-* only) Line Supervision (IX MV7-* only) White LED Maintenance Firmware Update Initialization Settings File Backup Setting File Download syslog (except for IX MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Setting File Upload Door Release by IX-RS Authentication Key Line Supervision Interval Line Supervision Schedule Device Check Interval Device Check Schedule IPv4 Address IPv6 Address Port♦
121
Menu bar
Important • Depending on the language for the display on the station (IX-MV7-* or IX-MV), the content of the settings may appear incorrectly.
• The symbols indicate the following: ♦: Be sure to input the settings. Upon use, leave the unnecessary items at their default values.
1. File
Menu bar
1.1
Create new system/import setting data
Creates new system setting data.
The below three methods can be used to create a new system depending on your objective.
• Perform detailed setup for all functions. →
“Create new system settings data (without using the Wizard function) (→page 124)”
• Set call/door release/paging/monitoring functions only. →
“Use the Wizard function to easily set up the system and make it operational (→page 125)”
Select "File" > "Create New System" to display the "New System" screen.
1 2 IX Support Tool Settings 3 4
“Restore System Settings (→page 164)”
5
“Reading in data created by another IX Support Tool (→page 139)”
123
Menu bar
1.1.1
Create new system settings data (without using the Wizard function)
1.
Configure the system settings.
■ System Name♦ Description Settings Default values Enter the name of the system to be created.
1 - 64 alphanumeric characters ■ IP Version Description Settings Default values Choose the protocol for IX Support Tool.
• IPv4 • IPv6 IPv4 ■ Installer Information♦ Description Settings Default values Enter the installer information.
The set installer information is displayed in station information/notes in IX-MV7-* - "Station Information" - "CONTACT INFORMATION." 4 rows (1-64 alphanumeric characters per row) ■ Owner Information♦ Description Settings Default values Enter the owner information.
1-64 alphanumeric characters ■ Notes♦ Description Settings Default values Enter the notes.
1-64 alphanumeric characters
2.
Enter the number of stations in the "IX Support Tool Settings."
3.
Select "Wizard Programing" > "No." If using the Wizard function, refer to
“Use the Wizard function to easily set up the system and make it operational (→page 125)” .
4.
Select "Automatically configure door release for all stations?." • When Door Release Settings do not exist or when Door Release Settings for each door will be configured individually, set to "No."
5.
Click
[Apply]
.
• Setting data will be automatically generated and the Settings (Table View) screen will be displayed. Refer to
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)” when performing the settings.
• Click
[Cancel]
to terminate the process without creating a new system.
124
Menu bar
1.1.2
Use the Wizard function to easily set up the system and make it operational
Before configuring, connect the programming PC and all stations to the same network.
The Wizard allows setup for the call, door release, paging, and monitoring functions. If using other functions, refer to
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)” .
1.
Configure the system settings.
For entries, refer to Step 1 of
“Create new system settings data (without using the Wizard function) (→page 124)” .
2.
Enter the number of stations in the "IX Support Tool Settings."
3.
Select "Wizard Programing" > "Yes."
4.
Select "Automatically configure door release for all stations?." • When Door Release Settings do not exist or when Door Release Settings for each door will be configured individually, set to "No."
5.
Click
[Next]
• Click .
Auto-generation of the setting data and a station search will be performed and the "System Configuration" screen will be displayed. (The search may take several minutes.) • The stations without power and the stations in the process of initialization will not be subject to search.
• Search up to 9999 stations at a time.
[Station Search]
– IP Address – Subnet Mask to search again.
• You cannot search for terminals using a different IP version. Select the IP version of the terminal to search in "Station Search Protocol." (Set the PC to same communication type.) • You cannot search for stations on other segments. Refer to Step 9.
• The following setting items will be set automatically.
125
Menu bar 8 9
Station Setting List
A list of the generated setting files will be shown.
6
System Management
This allows for the addition or deletion of stations on the Station Settings List.
Station Search Protocol
Select the IP version of the station to search.
7
Advanced Settings Station List
The searched stations will be shown.
10 Search again for stations.
Setting files and stations are automatically associated.
Associated Station List
The settings that have been associated will be shown.
Perform association again.
Removes association.
6.
Edit "Station Settings List." Edit if stations are added or deleted.
“How to edit the Station Settings List (→page 129)”
7.
Set "Advanced Settings." Set these when you need to change the station name, IP address, and so on.
“How to configure Advanced Settings (→page 130)”
8.
Associate setting files and stations.
Select the setting file to associate from "Station Settings List." • A setting file that has already been associated cannot be selected.
• Click
[Associate Automatically]
to automatically associate all setting files with stations.
126
Menu bar
9.
Select the station with which the setting file selected at Step 8 will be associated from "Station List." • A station that has already been associated cannot be selected.
• Select "Enter station MAC address" to specify a station by entering the MAC address.
• To associate a station on another segment, select "Enter station MAC address" then "Different Networks," and then enter the MAC address to specify the station.
10.
Click
[Apply]
.
• The settings that have been associated will be shown in "Associated Stations List." • The station will be restarted and the IP Address and Name will be updated. If a station on another segment was associated in Step 9, it will not be updated. Update the IP Address and Name using a Web browser.
Important
• If “Static / DHCP (→page 181)”
was set to "DHCP," "Stateless," or "DHCPv6" at Step 5, the IP address set beforehand by the DHCP server will be assigned.
If the IP address assignment fails, the IP address will default to "192.168.1.160" if it is IPv4 and "FDC2::7000" if it is IPv6. If this happens, cycle power to the station to, and then the IP Address will be reassigned by the DHCP server. Afterwards, perform association again.
11.
Repeat steps 8 - 10 and associate all stations.
• To dissociate, select the content to remove from "Associated Stations List" (multiple selections allowed), and then click
[Remove Association]
.
12.
Click
[Next]
• Click .
The "Setting File Upload" screen is displayed.
[Cancel]
to terminate the process without creating a new system.
13 14 15 18
13.
Select the station from which to upload the setting file from "Station List." (Multiple selections allowed) • To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations for which there are no Association Settings cannot be selected.
14.
Set the date and time.
Enter the time for each station. Time is used for incoming calls, outgoing calls, and the system log.
“How to configure the date and time manually (→page 139)”
127
Menu bar
15.
Click
[Start Upload]
.
16.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Setting File Upload" screen without uploading.
17.
Click
[OK]
.
• The result is displayed in "Station List" > "Status." In Process: The setting file is in the process of uploading.
Success: Upload is completed.
Failed: Upload failed.
18.
Click
[Next]
• Click .
The "Export Settings" screen is displayed.
[Cancel]
to terminate the process without creating a new system.
19
19.
Output the system configuration file that was set.
Click
[Export]
.
20.
Specify the save directory and click
[OK]
.
• A folder with the name specified in "System Name" in Step 1 will be created in the specified directory, and the system configuration file will be saved inside.
21.
Click
[Apply]
.
• The Wizard function is complete.
128
Menu bar
1.1.2.1 How to edit the Station Settings List
.
How to add a station
On the "System Configuration" screen, click
[Add New Station]
to display the "Add New Station" screen.
2 1 3
1.
Enter the station type and the number of the stations to be added.
2.
Click
[Add]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to end the process for adding a new station.
129
Menu bar
How to remove a station
On the "System Configuration" screen, click
[Station Removal]
to display the "Station Removal" screen.
1 2
1.
Select the station to delete from "Station List." (Multiple selections allowed)
2.
Click
[Delete]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to cancel deletion.
3.
Click
[Yes]
.
• Click
[No]
to return to the "Station Removal" screen.
1.1.2.2 How to configure Advanced Settings
.
130
Menu bar
How to register a new address book
Click
[Address Book]
(IX-MV7-* and IX-MV only) Default value: All stations to be registered to Address Book to display the "Address Book" screen.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click [Display] to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move column
Up to 50 station number lines can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered column.
List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in setting data List of stations that can be registered to Address Book 2 1 3 4
1.
Search for the stations for which the Address Book will be set up from the "list of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in setting data."
2.
Search for stations to be registered from "List of stations that can be registered to Address Book."
3.
Click
[Select]
in the cell that corresponds to Steps 1 and 2.
• Register ✔ : Register the selected station to the Address Book.
SIP: Register the station with which to communicate over a SIP server.
By default, " ✔ (register)" is set for all stations.
4.
After configuration is complete, click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to complete Address Book registration.
131
Menu bar
How to configure Station Details
Click
[Station Details]
to display the "Station Details" screen.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
1 1 2
“How to register a location (→page 135)”
1.
Change setting of each item.
2.
After configuration is complete, click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to stop configuring station details.
■ Number♦ Description Settings Default values Remarks Set Number. Set it such that there is no overlap with other stations.
The set station number will be shown to the recipient when a call is made or when the station is paged. It is also used to search a station by station number for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV.
3-5 digits Set in order starting from 0001.
When configuration is complete, the stations are sorted by station number.
132
Menu bar ■ Name Description Settings Default values Remarks Enter the station name.
The set station name will be shown to the recipient when a call is originated.
1-24 alphanumeric characters IX-MV7-*, IX-MV: Master Station (number); IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): Video Door Station (number);IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): Audio Door Station (number); IX-RS-*: Handset Sub Station (number); IXW-MA: I/O Adaptor (number) When updated with no entry, the station numbers are automatically copied in this field.
■ Location (except for IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Select the station's Location.
The set Location will be shown to the recipient when a call is originated.
Select one from the Location registered in “How to register a location (→page 135)” .
■ Hostname (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 225)”
.
When setting the hostname, configure
Settings Default values 1-64 alphanumeric characters ■ IP Version Description Settings Default values Select the station's communication type.
• IPv4 • IPv6 IPv4 Important • IPv4 and IPv6 cannot be mixed in the same system.
■ Static / DHCP Description Settings Default values Select the addressing method for the IP version selected in "IP Version." When selecting IPv4: • Static • DHCP When selecting IPv6: • Static • Stateless • DHCPv6 IPv4 • Static 133
Menu bar Important • If "DHCP" is selected for iPv4, configure so that a static IP address is assigned to the stations by the DHCP server.
• If "Stateless" is selected for iPv6, do not change the prefix of the device that can transmit Router Advertisement (RA).
• If "DHCPv6" is selected for iPv6, configure so that a static IP address is assigned to the stations by the DHCP server. DUID of the station is "00030001 + the MAC address." • When setting up a product from another manufacturer, such as a DHCP server, refer to its manual.
• If "Static / DHCP" is set to "DHCP," settings will not be applied to the station even if the "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Default Gateway" are set.
■ IP Address (IPv4)♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IP address of the station.
Set a unique IP address for each station.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
A series of numbers proceeding in the manner of 192.168.1.10, 192.168.1.11... is set.
■ Subnet Mask (IPv4) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the subnet mask for the station.
128.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
255.255.255.0
■ Default Gateway (IPv4) Description Settings Default values Set the default gateway of the network to which the station belongs.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
Important • If "Static / DHCP" is set to "Stateless" or "DHCPv6," settings will not be applied to the station even if "IP Address" and "Default Gateway" are set.
■ IP Address (IPv6)♦ Description Settings Set the IP address of the station.
Set a unique IP address for each station.
2000::0 - 3FFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or FD00::0 - FDFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF Default values ■ Default Gateway (IPv6) Description Settings Default values Set the default gateway of the network to which the station belongs.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF 134
Menu bar
How to register a location
Click
[Location Registry]
to display the "Location Registry" screen.
Up to 100 locations can be registered. However, only locations set between 001 and 050 can be used with IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF( *), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*).
1 2
1.
Enter the location in "Location List." For IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), enter locations within the 001 - 050 range.
• Location: 1-24 alphanumeric characters
2.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to end the process without registration.
135
Menu bar
How to configure door release
Configure the door release authentication key.
To release the electrical lock connected with a destination station after performing a door release operation during communication or monitoring, it is necessary to authenticate the destination station's authentication key and door release key.
Click
[Door Release]
to display the "Door Release" screen.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move column
Up to 50 station number lines can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered column.
List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in setting data Destination station and authentication key 1
1.
Set "Authentication Key."
2.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to stop configuring electrical lock door release.
2 136
Menu bar ■ Authentication Key Description Settings Default values Set the door release key for releasing the door connected to the destination station when a door release operation is performed. Door release is possible when it matches the Door Release Authorization of the destination station.
• IX-MV7-*: 1-20 digits • IX-MV: 1-4 digits If it matches the destination station's Door Release Authorization, " ✔ " will be displayed for "Match Result." Configured with the same characters as the Door Release Authorization.
Note • The initial values for the Door Release Authorization and Authentication Key vary depending on the station type set in "File" > "Create New System" > "IX Support Tool Settings." – IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) not configured: 20 digits – IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) configured: 4 digits • If the destination station's Door Release Authorization is four characters or longer, the Authentication Key for IX-MV will release the door if the first four digits match.
How to perform Batch IP Address Configuration
Click
[Batch IP Address Configuration]
to display the "Batch IP Address Configuration" screen.
1 2 3 4
1.
In "IPv4 Address" or "IPv6 Address," enter the start IP address that is to be automatically assigned.
2.
For IPv4, enter "Subnet Mask." • With the subnet mask, set the range for assignment. The network addresses in the range and the broadcast addresses cannot be assigned.
137
Menu bar
3.
Select the station to automatically assign an IP address from "Station List." (Multiple selections allowed) • To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to end the automatic assignment.
5.
Click
[OK]
. The IP Addresses will be automatically assigned, and the subnet mask will be entered.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Batch IP Address Configuration" window.
138
Menu bar
1.1.2.3 How to configure the date and time manually
.
On the "Setting File Upload" screen, click
[Manual Date / Time Setup]
to display the "Manual Date / Time Setup" screen.
1 2
1.
Enter (select) "Year," "Month," "Day," "Hour," "Minute," and "Second." • Click
[Sync with PC]
to synchronize the time with the PC.
2.
Click
[Apply]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
4.
Click "
[Back]
" to return to the "Setting File Upload" screen.
1.1.3
Reading in data created by another IX Support Tool
On the "New System" screen, click
[Import System Configuration]
to display the "Import System Configuration" screen.
1 139
Menu bar
1.
Click
[Browse]
.
• If the other IX Support Tool is older than Ver. 4.0.0.0, place a check next to "Import system configuration from older IX Support Tool (Ver. 4.0.0.0)."
2.
Select the folder where the setting file is saved and click
[OK]
.
3.
Click
[Next]
.
140
Menu bar
1.2
Select Existing System
View or edit existing system setting data.
Click "File" > "Select Existing System." The "System Selection" screen will be shown.
1.
Select the system name of the setting data to be edited.
2.
Click
[OK]
• Click .
• In the Setting window, the selected setting data will be shown.
[Cancel]
to terminate the process without selecting a system.
1.3
Delete Existing System
Delete created setting data.
Select "File" > "Delete Existing System" to display the "Delete System" screen.
2
1.
Select the system name of the setting data to be deleted.
2.
Click
[OK]
• Click .
• Delete the selected setting data.
[Cancel]
to terminate the process without deleting a system.
1 141
Menu bar
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Delete System" screen.
1.4
Update Settings
The edited setting data overwrites the existing one. This feature is identical to
[Update]
at the top right in the Settings screen.
Select "File" > "Update Settings."
1.
Click
[OK]
• Click .
• The edited setting data overwrites the existing one.
[Cancel]
to quit without overwriting setting data.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
142
Menu bar
1.5
Download Settings From Station
Obtain (download) settings from a station.
If “Association Settings (→page 160)” is not performed in advance, downloading is not possible.
Important • When first configuring through a Web browser or after performing configuration using the IX Support Tool, when "Identification"
, "ID and Password"
,"IPv4 Address" “IP Address♦ (→page 182)”
, "IPv6 Address"
“IP Address♦ (→page 183)” , "Address Book"
“Station List (→page 209)” , or "Call Settings"
browser, the setting file cannot be obtained. In this case, obtain the setting file through a browser.
Click "File" > "Download Settings From Station." The "Setting File Download" screen will be shown.
1 2
How to download settings
1.
Select the station from which to download the setting file from "Station List." (Multiple selections allowed) • To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations for which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
2.
Download the file.
[Settings]
: Download only the setting file.
[Sounds]
: Download the setting file and audio file for a custom tone.
[Image]
(IX-MV7-* only): Download the setting file and image file for the image on the reception screen.
[Schedule]
(except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA): Download schedule setting files (for transfer, etc.). Schedules for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are downloaded from
[Settings]
.
143
Menu bar
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Setting File Download" screen without downloading.
4.
Click
[OK]
Step 2.
.
• The file download result is displayed in "Station List" - "Status." In Process: The file is in the process of downloading.
Success: Download is completed.
Failed: Download failed.
Unavailable: This is displayed when a file that cannot be uploaded to a station is selected to download in • Downloaded files are saved as follows in "AIPOHONE_IX_SupportTool" - "SystemData" within the folder specified during installation.
– Setting file: "NewIXSystem(Set System Name).db" – Sound file: Saved as a WAV file inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" – Image file: Saved as a PNG file inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" – Schedule file: Saved inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" as "SCHED_CHIME.txt," "SCHED_GROUP.txt," "SCHED_OUTPUT.txt," "SCHED_TRANSFER.txt," or "SCHED_REC.txt" (the saved content differs depending on the station).
144
Menu bar
1.6
Upload Settings To Station
Upload settings created using IX Support Tool onto the station.
If “Association Settings (→page 160)” is not performed in advance, uploading is not possible.
Click "File" > "Upload Settings To Station." The "Setting File Upload" screen will be shown.
Important If a custom sound/image was added, be sure to upload each file by selecting "Sounds" / "Image" when uploading.
The following will occur if only the setting file is uploaded.
• The default tone will play when the operation in which the custom tone was set is performed.
• The image will not be displayed in receptionist mode.
• "Download Settings From Station" will fail.
• "Upload Settings To Station" will fail.
1 2 145
Menu bar
How to upload settings
1.
Select the station from which to upload the setting file from "Station List." (Multiple selections allowed) • To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations for which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
2.
Upload the file.
[Settings]
: Upload only the setting file.
[Sounds]
: Upload the setting file and audio file for a custom tone.
[Image]
(IX-MV7-* only): Upload the setting file and image file for the image on the reception screen.
[Schedule]
(except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), or IXW-MA): Select and upload the schedule setting file (transfer, etc.). Refer to
“How to upload schedules (→page 147)” . Schedules for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-
DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are uploaded from
[Settings]
.
3.
If
[Settings]
,
[Sounds]
, or
[Image]
was clicked in Step 2, click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Setting File Upload" screen without uploading.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
• The file upload result is displayed in "Station List" - "Status." In Process: The file is in the process of uploading.
Success: Upload is completed.
Failed: Upload failed.
Unavailable: This is displayed when a file that cannot be uploaded was selected in Step 2.
146
Menu bar
How to upload schedules
In Step 2 of
“How to upload settings (→page 146)” , if
[Schedule]
is clicked, the following screen is displayed.
1 2 3
1.
Select the station from which to upload the schedule file, from the station list. (Multiple selections allowed) • To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
2.
Select the type of schedule file to upload. (Multiple selections allowed) • The schedule files that can be selected vary by station.
3.
Click
[Start Upload]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Upload Schedules" screen without uploading.
147
Menu bar
1.7
Upload SSL certificate
Apply the SSL certificate or IEEE802.1X certificate data to the station.
SSL Certificate" to display the "Certification Update/Delete" screen.
1 2 3
1.
Select the type of certificate to be uploaded.
• If "SSL Certificate" is selected, configure the file to upload in “SSL Certificate (→page 309)” .
• If "IEEE802.1X Certificate" is selected, select the file to be uploaded and click
[Open]
.
2.
Select the station for which to upload the file from "Station List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
3.
Click
[Upload]
.
• Click
[Delete]
to delete the uploaded file.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Certification Update/Delete" screen without uploading.
• The file upload result is displayed in "Station List" - "Status." In Process: The file is in the process of uploading.
Success: Upload is completed.
Failed: Upload failed.
Unavailable: This is displayed when a file that cannot be uploaded was selected in Step 1.
148
Menu bar
1.8
Import Setting File
A setting file can be modified using a text editor and imported into IX Support Tool.
Click "File" > "Import Setting File." The "Import Setting File" screen will be shown.
1 2 3
How to import a setting file
1.
Click
[Browse…]
, select the setting file data (txt file), and then click
[Open]
.
(file name: config-station number-output date and time.txt)
2.
Select the station from which to upload the setting file from "Station List."
3.
Click
[Apply]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Import Setting File" screen without importing.
• If the file to be imported is mismatched with the original file, the file will not be imported.
• The file should be uploaded or downloaded before importing.
• The result is displayed in "Station List" > "Status." In Process: The Setting File is in the process of importing.
Success: Import is completed.
Failed: Import failed. Try importing again.
149
Menu bar
1.9
Exporting the IX Support Tool System Configuration
Backup setting files created in IX Support Tool.
If the settings are lost, it may be impossible to restore them after maintenance or after-sales servicing.
Select "File" > "IX Support Tool Export System Configuration" to display the "Export Settings" screen.
1 3
1.
Click
[Export]
.
2.
Select the folder where the setting file is saved and click configuration file will be saved inside as a hidden file.
Copy each "System Name" and store the setting data.
• Click
[Cancel] [OK]
.
• A folder with the name specified in "System Name" will be created in the specified directory, and the system to return to the "Export Settings" screen without saving the setting file.
3.
Click
[Finish]
.
150
Menu bar
1.10 Export To Line Supervision Software
To use registered station information with the IX Supervision Tool, output the file in Address Book format.
Click "File" > "Export To Line Supervision Software." The following screen will be shown.
1 2
1.
Click
[Browse]
and select the folder where the setting file will be saved.
2.
Click
[Export]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• The setting file will be saved as "SettingAddressList.txt." • Information for stations without configured IP addresses will not be output.
1.11 Exit
Select "File" > "Exit" to close the IX Support Tool.
151
Menu bar
2. Edit
You can switch between "Table View" and "Station View" or create shortcuts to settings in "Table View" and can edit setting data.
2.1
Table View
All stations in the system can be configured using the table.
On the "Station View" window, selecting "Edit" > "Table View" will display the "Table View" window.
"Station View" window "Table View" window For each item in "Table View," refer to
“System Settings (Table View) (→page 169)” .
2.2
Station View
Configure each station in the system individually.
On the "Table View" window, selecting "Edit" > "Station View" will display the "Station View" window.
"Table View" window "Station View" window For each item in Station View, refer to
“System Settings (Station View) (→page 374)” .
152
Menu bar
2.3
Master Station Address Book
Click "Edit" > "Master Station Address Book." The following screen will be shown.
For "Master Station Address Book," refer to “Station List (→page 209)”
.
2.4
Creating VoIP Phone Address Books
Click "Edit" - "VoIP Phone List." The following screen will be shown.
For "VoIP Phone List," refer to “VoIP Phone Registration (→page 227)” .
2.5
Register Network Camera
Click "Edit" > "Register Network Camera." The following screen will be shown.
For "Register Network Camera," refer to
“Open Network Camera List (→page 212)” .
153
Menu bar
2.6
Network Camera Integration
Click "Edit" - "Network Camera Integration." The following screen will be shown.
For "Network Camera Integration," refer to
“Network Camera Integration (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 261)” .
2.7
Master Station Group Settings
Click "Edit" > "Master Station Group Settings." The following screen will be shown.
For "Master Station Group Settings," refer to
“Group (for Master) (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 217)” .
154
Menu bar
2.8
Door Station Group Settings
Click "Edit" > "Door Station Group Setting." The following screen will be shown.
For "Door Station Group Settings," refer to
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW MA) (→page 225)”
.
2.9
Location Registry
Select "Edit" > "Location Registry" to display the "Location Registry" window.
For "Location Registry," refer to
“Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” .
155
Menu bar
2.10 Manual Date / Time Setup
Select "Edit" > "Manual Date / Time Setup" to display the "Manual Date / Time Setup" window.
For "Manual Date / Time Setup," refer to
“Manual Date / Time Setup (→page 178)” .
2.11 IX Support Tool Settings
Select "Edit" > "IX Support Tool Settings" to display the "IX Support Tool Settings" window.
1
How to configure IX Support Tool
1.
Configure each item.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to quite without registering.
■ ID♦ Description Settings Default values Set an ID to log in IX Support Tool.
1-32 alphanumeric characters admin 156 2
Menu bar ■ Password♦ Description Settings Default values ■ System Name♦ Description Set a password to log in IX Support Tool.
1-32 alphanumeric characters admin Settings Default values Change the system name.
When changing the system name, the name of the folder where the setting data is stored will be changed as well.
1-64 alphanumeric characters The system name of the setting data being edited will be shown.
■ IP Version Description Settings Default values Choose the protocol for IX Support Tool.
• IPv4 • IPv6 IPv4 ■ Installer Information♦ Description Settings Default values Enter the installer information.
The set installer information is displayed in station information/notes in IX-MV7-* - "Station Information" - "CONTACT INFORMATION." 4 rows (1-64 alphanumeric characters per row) ■ Owner Information♦ Description Settings Default values Enter the owner information.
1-64 alphanumeric characters ■ Notes♦ Description Settings Default values Enter the notes.
1-64 alphanumeric characters 157
3. Language
Menu bar Set the language of following items.
• The display content of the IX Support Tool.
• The input text language of settings item. (Station Name, Address book, etc.) • The content of the email message and system log.
Important • Configure each station through a Web browser individually, to set a different language for each station.
• If the language (configured on the station main unit) displayed on the screen for IX-MV7-* or IX-MV is different from the language set in "Language," the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, enter information in the setting data using alphabetical characters only.
158
4. Tools
Menu bar
4.1
Station Search
Search the stations in IX System connected in the network to show the list.
1.
Connect the PC to a network on the same segment as the system.
• Set it to the same protocol as the system. For information on protocol settings, refer to
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)” .
2.
Click "Tools" > "Station Search" to display the searched stations in the "Station Search" screen. (Searching may take several minutes.) • The stations without power and the stations in the process of initialization will not be subject to search.
• Search up to 9999 stations at a time.
• You cannot search for stations on other segments.
• Click
[Search]
to restart the search.
159
Menu bar
4.2
Association Settings
The data created with IX Support Tool is to be assigned to each station.
Associate the settings when creating the setting data.
Some items cannot be configured without association.
3
Station Setting List
A list of the setting files that have been created will be shown.
4
Station List
The searched stations will be shown.
5 Search again for stations.
Associated Stations List
The settings that have been associated will be shown.
Perform association again.
Removes association.
1.
Connect the PC to a network on the same segment as the system.
• Set it to the same protocol as the system. For information on protocol settings, refer to
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)” .
2.
Select "Tools" > "Association Settings" to perform a station search, and the "Association Settings" window will be displayed. (The search may take several minutes) • The stations without power and the stations in the process of initialization will not be subject to search.
• Search up to 9999 stations at a time.
• Click
[Station Search]
to restart the search.
• You cannot search for stations on other segments. Refer to Step 9.
160
Menu bar
3.
Select the file to associate from "Station Settings List." • A setting file that has already been associated cannot be selected.
• A setting file without a configured IP address cannot be selected.
4.
Select the station with which the setting file selected at Step 3 will be associated from "Station List." • A station that has already been associated cannot be selected.
• Select "Enter station MAC address" to specify a station by entering the MAC address.
• To associate a station on another segment, select "Enter station MAC address" and "Different Networks," and then enter the MAC address to specify the station.
5.
Click
[Apply]
.
• Associated content is displayed on the "Associated Stations List." When setting a new IP address or changing an old address, the station will be restarted and the IP address and station name will be updated. If a station on another segment was associated in Step 4, it will not be updated. Update the IP address and station name through a Web browser.
6.
Repeat steps 3 - 5 and associate all stations.
• To dissociate, select the content to remove from "Associated Stations List" (multiple selections allowed), and then click
[Remove Association]
.
161
Menu bar
4.3
Station Replacement
Use this feature to replace a station. The station can only be replaced with one of the same station type.
Note • To replace a station on another segment, select "Tools" - "Association Settings" to remove the association with the malfunctioning station and then associate the newly installed station.
The MAC address for the associated stations will be displayed. If there are no associations, there will be no display.
4 5 6
1.
Connect the PC to a network on the same segment as the system.
• Set it to the same protocol as the system. For information on protocol settings, refer to
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)” .
2.
Replace the station.
3.
Select "Tools" > "Station Replacement" to perform a station search, and the "Station Replacement" window will be displayed. (The search may take several minutes) • The stations without power and the stations in the process of initialization will not be subject to search.
• Search up to 9999 stations at a time.
• Click
[Search]
to restart the search.
• Stations can not be found using search if stations are on different network segments.
4.
Select the station to replace from "Station List." • Stations that are not associated cannot be selected.
5.
Select the newly installed station from "Station List." 162
Menu bar
6.
Click
[Apply]
.
• The setting data will be uploaded to the newly installed station.
7.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to "Station Replacement" window without uploading.
8.
Click
[OK]
.
163
Menu bar
4.4
Restore System Settings
If the setting file is lost, the setting file can be restored.
Select "Tools" > "Restore System Settings" or "Create New System"
,
, and then click
[Restore Setting file]
" to display the "Restore System Settings" screen.
4 2 3 5 6 7
1.
Connect the PC to the network to which the station is connected.
2.
Enter the system name which the setting file to be restored.
• System name: 1-64 alphanumeric characters
3.
Choose the internet protocol version for the system.
• Set the PC to the same communication type.
4.
Click
[Station Search]
to perform a search and show stations in "Station List." (The search may take several minutes) • The stations without power and the stations in the process of initialization will not be subject to search.
• Search up to 9999 stations at a time.
• Cannot search for stations on other network.
5.
Select the station from which to restore the setting file. (Multiple selections allowed) • If the station number is duplicated or does not exist, the setting file will not be restored.
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
6.
Enter the "ID (Administrator)" and "Password (Administrator)" for the station selected in Step 5.
• If "ID (Administrator)" or "Password (Administrator)" are wrong, the setting file will not be restored.
• The default values of "ID (Administrator)" and "Password (Administrator)" are "admin."
7.
Click
[Apply]
.
164
Menu bar
8.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Restore System Settings" window.
9.
Click
[OK]
.
• The result is displayed in "Station List" > "Status." Restoring: The setting file is in the process of restoring.
Success: Restore successful.
Failed: Restore failed.
• Restored setting files are saved as follows in "AIPHONE_IX_SupportTool" - "SystemData" within the folder specified when installing IX Support Tool.
– Setting file: "NewIXSystem(Set System Name).db" – Sound file: Saved as a WAV file in "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" – Image file: Saved as a PNG file in "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" – Schedule file: Saved in "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" as "SCHED_CHIME.txt," "SCHED_GROUP.txt," "SCHED_OUTPUT.txt," "SCHED_TRANSFER.txt," or "SCHED_REC.txt" (the saved content differs depending on the station; included in the setting file for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)).
• The items that could not be restored are displayed as shown below.
165
Menu bar
4.5
System Configuration
The process from associating a newly created setting file to uploading the setting file can be configured here.
Select "Tools" - "System Configuration." The "System Configuration" screen will be shown.
The procedure for "System Configuration" is the same from step 5 in
“Use the Wizard function to easily set up the system and make it operational (→page 125)” .
166
Menu bar
5. Help
5.1
Update Firmware
Select "Help" > "Update Firmware" to display the "Update Firmware" window.
For "Update Firmware," refer to
“Firmware Update (→page 546)” .
167
Menu bar
5.2
About
Select "Help" > "About" to display the "Version Information" window.
The current version of the IX Support Tool.
The Installer Information, Owner Information, and Notes entered in
“IX Support Tool Settings (→page 156)” will be displayed.
Click
[Close]
to close the "Version Information" window.
168
System Settings (Table View)
Important • Depending on the language settings of the station (IX-MV7-* or IX-MV), the content of the settings may differ from this manual.
• The symbols indicate the following: ♦: Be sure to input the settings. Leave any of these unused settings at their default values.
System Settings (Table View)
1. Station Information
1.1
Identification
Configure the station number, station name, and location of the station to register in the system.
Up to 500 stations can be registered.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)”
Important • Always configure
before setting "Identification." • Enter the language configured in
, the characters on the station screen may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, enter information in the setting data using alphabetical characters only.
• Results when searching by station will be listed in order of station number.
■ Number♦ Description Settings Default values Set an unique number for each station. The station number will be displayed on the screen of the destination during call, page, etc.
This is also used to search stations by station number for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV.
3-5 digits Start from 0001.
170
System Settings (Table View) ■ Name Description Settings Default values Remarks Set the station name.
The station name will be displayed on the screen of the destination during call, page, etc.
This is also used to search stations by station name for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV.
1-24 alphanumeric characters IX-MV7-*, IX-MV: Master Station (number); IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): Video Door Station (number); IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): Audio Door Station (number); IX-RS *: Handset Sub Station (number);IXW-MA: I/O Adaptor (number) If left blank, station name will be the same as station number.
■ Location (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Select the Location of the station.
The location will be displayed on the screen of the destination during call, page, etc.
-
Select one from the Location registered in “Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” .
171
System Settings (Table View)
1.1.1
Add a Station
Add a Station to setting data.
Click
[Add New Station]
to display the "Add New Station" screen.
■ How to add a station
1.
Enter the station type and the number of the stations to be added.
2.
Click
[Add]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to end the process for adding a new station.
172
System Settings (Table View)
1.1.2
Remove Station
Delete a station from the settings.
Click
["Remove Station"]
, the "Station Removal" window will be shown.
1
How to delete a station
1.
Select the station(s) to be deleted.
2.
Click
[Delete]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to end the Station Removal.
3.
Click
[Yes]
to delete the station.
2 • Click
[No]
to cancel the deletion and return to the "Station Removal" window.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
173
System Settings (Table View)
1.1.3
Register location (except IXW-MA)
Click
[Location Registry]
, the "Location Registry" window will be shown.
Up to 100 locations can be registered. However, only locations set between 001 and 050 can be used with IX-MV, IX DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*).
1
How to register a location
1.
Enter the location in "Location List." For IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), enter locations within range of 001-050.
• Location: 1 - 24 alphanumeric characters
2.
Click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
174
System Settings (Table View)
1.2
ID and Password
Set the ID and password for logging in via a web browser, and the ID and password for ONVIF/RTSP authentication.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ Administrator ID♦ Description Settings Default values Set the ID of the administrator account for logging in to the Web System Setting Server.
For IX-MV7-*, configure the administrator ID used to access the station's Settings screen.
1-32 alphanumeric characters admin ■ Administrator Password♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Password of the administrator account for logging in to the Web System Setting Server.
For IX-MV7-*, configure the administrator password used to access the station's Settings screen.
1-32 alphanumeric characters admin ■ User ID♦ Description Settings Default values ■ User Password♦ Description Settings Default values Set the ID of the user account for logging in to the Web System Setting Server.
1-32 alphanumeric characters user Set the Password of the user account for logging in to the Web System Setting Server.
1-32 alphanumeric characters user 175
System Settings (Table View) ■ ONVIF ID (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the ID to access this station from 3rd party products using ONVIF.
The setting values for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) cannot be changed from their default values (they are not shown in the Settings screen).
1-32 alphanumeric characters aiphone ■ ONVIF Password (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Password to access this station from 3rd party products using ONVIF.
The setting values for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) cannot be changed from their default values (they are not shown in the Settings screen).
1-32 alphanumeric characters aiphone ■ RTSP ID (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the ID to access this station from 3rd party products using RTSP.
1-32 alphanumeric characters aiphone ■ RTSP Password (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Password to access this station from 3rd party products using RTSP.
1-32 alphanumeric characters aiphone Note • The "Administrator ID" and "User ID" cannot be identical.
• The ONVIF port number is "10080" and the RTSP port number is "554." • To view video from IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) using a 3rd party product, refer to
• The ONVIF ID and ONVIF password for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) can be changed on a 3rd party product. If changed on a 3rd party product, the Settings screen will not show the changes.
• The "Administrator Password," "User Password," "ONVIF Password," and "RTSP Password " are displayed as "*****" on the screen.
176
System Settings (Table View)
1.3
Time
Set the date and time for each station.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“Manual Date / Time Setup (→page 178)”
1.3.1
Time Zone
■ Select time zone Description Settings Default values Set the Time Zone.
Select from 99 regions When a new system is created, the following settings will be set to these defaults depending on the language selected.
Japanese: (GMT+09:00) Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo English: (GMT-08:00) Pacific Standard Time (US), Tijuana French: (GMT+01:00) Brussels, Madrid, Copenhagen, Paris Spanish: (GMT+01:00) Brussels, Madrid, Copenhagen, Paris Dutch: (GMT+01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm Traditional Chinese: (GMT+08:00) Taipei Simplified Chinese: (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi
1.3.2
Daylight Savings Time
■ Enable automatic daylight savings time Description Settings Default values The daylight saving time is set automatically according by region selected in "Select time zone." • Yes • No No 177
System Settings (Table View)
1.3.3
Manual Date / Time Setup
Enter the time for each station. Time is used for incoming calls, outgoing calls, and the system log.
Important
• The time cannot be set unless the “Association Settings (→page 160)”
is performed and the PC is connected to the same network as the station.
Click
[Manual Date / Time Setup]
, the "Manual Date / Time Setup" window will be shown.
1 2
How to configure the date and time
1.
Select "Year," "Month," "Day," "Hour," "Minute," and "Second." • Click
[Sync with PC]
to synchronize with PC.
2.
Click
[Apply]
.
• If "Association Settings" has not been configured, the following screen will be shown.
Click
[OK]
and use
“Association Settings (→page 160)” .
• If the PC cannot communicate with the system, the following screen will be shown.
Click
[OK]
, and then ensure the PC can communicate with the system.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
178
1.4
Expanded System
System Settings (Table View) ■ Expanded System Description Not used.
179
System Settings (Table View)
2. Network Settings
2.1
IP Address
Configure the hostname, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for each station.
Important • When a setting related to the IP address is updated on a station, it will restart. In some cases, it may take up to 10 minutes for the station to start up.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“Batch IP Address Configuration (→page 183)”
■ Hostname (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Set the Hostname for each station. Hostname can be used to access to the stations that is registered in
“Address Book (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 208)”
and “Called Stations (Door/ Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 225)” .
Go to
“DNS (→page 185)” to set Hostname.
Settings Default values 1-64 alphanumeric characters Note • Communication from IX Support Tool to the stations use the IP address.
■ IP Version Description Settings Default values Select the Protocol.
• IPv4 • IPv6 IPv4 180
System Settings (Table View) Important • IPv4 and IPv6 cannot be mixed in the same system.
■ Static / DHCP Description Settings Default values Select Static or DHCP for the selected IP version in "IP Version." For IPv4 • Static • DHCP For IPv6 • Static • Stateless • DHCPv6 • Static Important • When selecting "DHCP" for IPv4, configure the system so that the DHCP server assigns a Static IP Address to each station.
• When selecting "Stateless" for IPv6, do not change the prefix of the device so that it can transmit RA.
• When selecting "DHCPv6" for IPv6, configure the system so that the DHCP server assigns a Static IP Address to each station. DUID of the station is "00030001 + MAC address." • When setting up a product from another manufacturer, such as a DHCP server, refer to its manual.
181
System Settings (Table View)
2.1.1
IPv4 Address
Important
Mask," and "Default Gateway" are set.
■ IP Address♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IP Address.
The IP Address should be unique.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
■ Subnet Mask♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Default Gateway Description Settings Default values Set the Subnet Mask.
128.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
Set the Default Gateway.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
182
System Settings (Table View)
2.1.2
IPv6 Address
Important • If "Static / DHCP" is set to "Stateless" or "DHCPv6," settings will not be applied to the station even if "IP Address" and "Default Gateway" are set.
■ IP Address♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IP Address.
The IP Address should be unique.
2000::0 - 3FFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or FD00::0 - FDFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF ■ Default Gateway Description Settings Default values Set the Default Gateway.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF
2.1.3
Batch IP Address Configuration
Click
["Batch IP Address Configuration"]
, the "Batch IP Address Configuration" window will be shown.
2 1 3 4
How to perform Batch IP Address Configuration
1.
Enter the starting address that is to be automatically assigned to "IPv4 Address" or "IPv6 Address."
2.
For IPv4, enter "Subnet Mask." • With the subnet mask, set the range for assignment. The network addresses in the range and the broadcast addresses cannot be assigned.
3.
Select the station to which the IP address in "Station List" is to be automatically assigned.
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
183
System Settings (Table View)
4.
Click
[OK]
.
5.
Click
[OK]
. the Batch IP Addresses will be automatically assigned, and the subnet mask will be entered.
• Click
[Cancel]
, the screen will go back to "Batch IP Address Configuration" window.
184
System Settings (Table View)
2.2
DNS
for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*) a DNS server must be configured for name resolution.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
2.2.1
Primary Server
■ IPv4 Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for DNS Primary Server.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
Set the IPv6 address for DNS Primary Server.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF
2.2.2
Secondary Server
■ IPv4 Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for DNS Secondary Server.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
Set the IPv6 address for DNS Secondary Server.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF 185
System Settings (Table View)
2.3
SIP (except IXW-MA)
Configure SIP settings.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Jump to related item
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
2.3.1
SIP Connections
■ SIP Signaling Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Port Number for SIP.
Set the same port number for each station to communicate.
1 - 65535 5060 ■ User Agent (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the User Agent.
1-36 alphanumeric characters
2.3.2
SIP Server (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*))
Configure integration with 3rd party SIP based PBX systems. Please contact your local Aiphone distribution for more information.
2.3.2.1 Primary Server
■ ID Description Settings Default values Configure the user ID for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters 186
System Settings (Table View) ■ Password Description Settings Default values Configure the user password for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters Note • The "Password" is displayed as "*****" in the Settings screen.
■ IPv4 Address Description Settings Default values Configure the IPv4 address of the SIP server.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) ■ IPv6 Address Description Settings Configure the IPv6 address of the SIP server.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Default values ■ Port♦ Description Settings Default values Configure the Port Number to communicate with the SIP server.
1 - 65535 5060
2.3.2.2 Secondary Server
■ ID Description Settings Default values Configure the user ID for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Password Description Settings Default values Configure the user password for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters Note • The "Password" is displayed as "*****" in the Settings screen.
■ IPv4 Address Description Settings Default values Configure the IPv4 address of the SIP server.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) 187
System Settings (Table View) ■ IPv6 Address Description Settings Default values ■ Port♦ Description Settings Default values
2.3.2.3 Tertiary Server
■ ID Description Settings Default values ■ Password Description Settings Default values Set the IPv6 address of the SIP server.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Set the Port Number to communicate with the SIP server.
1-65535 5060 Configure the user ID for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters Configure the user password for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters Note • The "Password" is displayed as "*****" in the Settings screen.
■ IPv4 Address Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address of the SIP server.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) ■ IPv6 Address Description Settings Set the IPv6 address of the SIP server.
::FF:0-FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname(1-64 alphanumeric characters) Default values ■ Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Port Number to communicate with the SIP server.
1-65535 5060 188
System Settings (Table View)
2.3.3
Miscellaneous
■ Register Transmission Interval [sec] (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX SS(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Configure the Transmission Interval to send Register to the SIP server.
10-14400 sec 3600 sec ■ DTMF digit interval timeout [sec] (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Configure the time to timeout signal reception, when a DTMF signal is not received from the VoIP Phone for a continuous period of time.
1-10 sec 5 sec Important • Configure the IP-PBX and VoIP phone DTMF with outbound.
■ Call health check timer [sec]♦ Description Settings Default values Set the timer to transmit re-INVITE while calling and monitoring.
• Do not transmit re-INVITE: Do not detect communication errors.
• 80-3600 sec: Select to set between 80-3600 sec (by 1 sec).
90 sec 189
System Settings (Table View)
2.4
Multicast Address (For IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
“All Page (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 256)” , and
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 225)”
.
Note • A multicast address must be configured to utilize All Page.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“Batch Multicast Address Configuration (→page 191)”
■ IPv4 Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 Multicast Address. The Multicast Address should be unique.
224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255
Set the IPv6 Multicast Address. The Multicast Address should be unique.
FF10::0 - FF1F:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF 190
System Settings (Table View)
2.4.1
Batch Multicast Address Configuration
Click
[Batch Multicast Address Configuration]
, the "Batch Multicast Address Configuration" window will be shown.
2 1 3
How to perform Batch Multicast Address Configuration
1.
Enter the starting multicast address that is to be automatically assigned to "IPv4" or "IPv6."
2.
Select the station(s) to which the multicast address in "Station List" is to be automatically assigned.
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
, the multicast addresses will be automatically assigned.
• Click
[Cancel]
, the screen goes back to "Batch Multicast Address Configuration" window.
191
System Settings (Table View)
2.5
Video (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
Configure video settings.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
2.5.1
Video Encoder 1
Configure video settings when placing a call between stations, during communication, or when calling a VoIP phone.
Configure video settings for IX-MV7-* in “Master Station Video Setting (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 197)” .
■ Video Codec (for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select Video Codec.
• H.264 / AVC • Motion-JPEG H.264 / AVC Note • For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), "Video Codec" is set to "H.264 / AVC" and cannot be changed.
■ Resolution (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the video resolution of Video Encoder 1.
• 320×240 (QVGA) • 640×480 (VGA) IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 640×480 (VGA) IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 320×240 (QVGA) 192
System Settings (Table View) ■ Frame Rate [fps] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the Frame Rate [fps] of Video Encoder 1.
1, 2 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)), 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps For IX-DA and IX-DF(-*), when the frame rate is set to 7.5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 fps, the frame Rate will be 5 fps after approx. 10 min of an outgoing call.
IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 10fps IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 15 fps Note • The frame rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
■ Select Profile [H.264 / AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the H.264/AVC Profile of Video Encoder 1.
• Baseline • Main • High Main ■ I-picture interval [H.264/AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the interval to send H.264/AVC I-picture of Video Encoder 1.
1 - 100 IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 10 IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 15 ■ Bit rate [kbps] [H.264 / AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the H.264/AVC Bit Rate of Video Encoder 1.
32 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)), 64, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, 2048 kbps 1024 kbps Note • The bit rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
193
System Settings (Table View) ■ Select Quality [Motion-JPEG] (for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the Quality of Motion-JPEG of Video Encoder 1.
1 (low) - 10 (high) 6 ■ RTP Start Port♦ Description Settings Default values ■ RTP End Port♦ Description Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive RTP for Video Encoder 1.
Set the difference to 90 or greater in the range of (RTP Start Port) - (RTP End Port).
1 - 65534 30000 Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive RTP for Video Encoder 1.
Set the difference to 90 or greater in the range of (RTP Start Port) - (RTP End Port).
1 - 65535 31000 194
System Settings (Table View)
2.5.2
Video Encoder 2
Set when transmitting video using ONVIF.
Important • These settings may be changed by ONVIF-compliant 3rd party products, if utilized. Refer to the manual of the 3rd party product to be used.
■ Second Video Encoder (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Second Video Encoder.
Set to "Enable" to send the video using ONVIF.
• Enable • Disable Enable ■ Video Codec (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the Video Codec of Video Encoder 2.
• H.264 / AVC • Motion-JPEG H.264 / AVC ■ Resolution (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the video resolution of Video Encoder 2.
• 320x240(QVGA) • 640x480(VGA) • 800x480(WVGA) (For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) • 1280x720(HD) (For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) • 1280x960(SXVGA) (For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 1280x720(HD) IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 320x240(QVGA) ■ Frame Rate [fps] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the Frame Rate [fps] of Video Encoder 2.
1, 2 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)), 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps For IX-DA and IX-DF(-*), when the frame rate is set to 7.5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 fps, the frame Rate will be 5 fps after approx. 10 min of an outgoing call.
IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 10 fps IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 15 fps Note • The frame rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
195
System Settings (Table View) ■ Select Profile [H.264 / AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the H.264/AVC Profile of Video Encoder 2.
• Baseline • Main • High Main ■ I-picture interval [H.264/AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the interval to send H.264/AVC I-picture of Video Encoder 2.
1 - 100 IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 10 IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 15 ■ Bit rate [kbps] [H.264 / AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the H.264/AVC Bit Rate of Video Encoder 2.
32 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)), 64, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, 2048, 4096 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF( *)), 8192 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) kbps IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 2048 kbps IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 1024 kbps Note • The bit rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
■ Select Quality [Motion-JPEG] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the Quality of Motion-JPEG of Video Encoder 2.
1 (low) - 10 (high) 6 ■ RTP Start Port♦ Description Settings Default values ■ RTP End Port♦ Description Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive RTP for Video Encoder 2.
Set the difference to 10 or greater in the range of (RTP Start Port) - (RTP End Port).
1 - 65534 32000 Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive RTP for Video Encoder 2.
Set the difference to 10 or greater in the range of (RTP Start Port) - (RTP End Port).
1 - 65535 33000 196
System Settings (Table View)
2.5.3
Master Station Video Setting (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure video settings for the IX-MV7-* camera.
Important • When sending video to an VoIP Phone, configure to the same video settings as the VoIP Phone.
• Video is not sent when making an outgoing call to a VoIP Phone.
■ Video Streaming Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Video Streaming of IX-MV7-*. Video cannot be distributed to 3rd party products not compatible with ONVIF or to IX-MV. The Video Codec is H.264 / AVC.
• Enable • Disable Enable ■ Frame Rate [fps] Description Settings Default values Set the Frame Rate [fps].
0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps 15 fps Note • The frame rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
■ Select Profile Description Settings Default values Set the profile for Video Streaming.
• Baseline • Main • High Main ■ I-picture interval♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Bit rate [kbps] Description Settings Default values Select the interval to send I-picture for Video Streaming.
1 - 100 15 Select the bit rate [kbps].
32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, 2048 kbps 1024 kbps 197
System Settings (Table View) Note • The bit rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
198
System Settings (Table View)
2.5.4
Using a 3rd party product to monitor video/audio from IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)
IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) support ONVIF Profile S and RTSP.
Video and audio of IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) can be monitored from a 3rd party product.
Important • Video from IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) camera cannot be viewed simultaneously by more than two 3rd party products.
• Audio will not be distributed if
is set to "G.722."
Configuring IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), and IX-DA so that video can be viewed on a 3rd party product.
1.
Select "Enable" for
“Second Video Encoder (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) (→page 195)”
.
2.
Configure video and audio settings.
• Configure video in “Video Encoder 2 (→page 195)”
, and audio in “Audio 2 RTP Start Port♦ (→page 202)”
and
“Audio 2 RTP End Port♦ (→page 202)” .
Important
• Configure “Video Encoder 2 (→page 195)” according to the specification of the product.
3.
Register IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) with a third party product. Enter the following as necessary.
• For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*) – ONVIF ID: Configure in
“ONVIF ID (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ (→page 176)” .
– ONVIF Password: Configure in
“ONVIF Password (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ (→page 176)” .
– ONVIF Port: 10080 – RTSP ID: Configure in
“RTSP ID (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*)♦ (→page 176)” .
– RTSP Port: 554 • For IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) – ONVIF ID: aiphone – ONVIF Password: aiphone – ONVIF Port: 10080 – RTSP ID: aiphone – RTSP Password : aiphone – RTSP Port: 554 • For how to register, refer to the instruction manual of the third party product to be registered.
Important • "ONVIF ID" and "ONVIF Password" can be changed on the 3rd party product.
• If changed on a third party product, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) will not show the changes on IX Support Tool.
199
System Settings (Table View)
2.6
Audio (except IXW-MA)
Configure the settings for audio.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ Audio Codec Description Settings Default values Select the Audio Codec.
• G.711 (μ-Law) • G.711 (A-Law) • G.722 (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) G.711 (μ-Law) 200
System Settings (Table View) Important • When changing from "G.711" to "G.722" or from "G.722" to "G.711," the station will restart when the change is applied. In some cases, it may take around 10 minutes to restart the station.
• Stations with different audio codecs (G.711 and G.722) selected cannot ring, call, monitor, or page each other.
• When changing "G.711" to "G.722" and "G.722" to "G.711," change the custom tones used for the following subcategories to audio files with appropriate audio sample rates.
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)”
– "Call Origination" -
“Ringback Tone (except IX-MV) (→page 229)”
– "Call Origination" -
“Busy Tone (except IX-MV) (→page 235)”
– "Call Origination" -
“Error Tone (Call Failed) (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 236)”
– "Incoming Call" -
– "Incoming Call" -
“Call Button (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 239)”
– "Incoming Call" -
“Option Input (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 239)”
– "Relay Output" -
– "Relay Output" -
“Relay Control (start) (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 249)”
– "Relay Output" -
“Relay Control (end) (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 250)”
– "Option Input Page" -
“Message File Name (→page 258)”
– "Network Camera Integration" -
“Event Tone (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 263)”
– "Network Camera Integration" -
“Event Tone (for IX-MV) (→page 264)”
– "Paging Settings" -
– "Communication Audio Messages" - "Start Communication" - “Message (→page 302)”
– "Communication Audio Messages" - "Code Received" -
– "Chime" - "Weekly Schedule" -
– "Chime" - "Daily Schedule" - “Chime (→page 307)”
– "Speed Dials / Favorites" - "Group Message Page" -
“How to configure Group Message Page (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 340)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Communication End Pretone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 350)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Call Queue Notification (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 350)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Paging Pretone (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 351)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Auto Answer Tone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 351)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“On Hold (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 352)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Key Received (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 352)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Error (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 353)”
– "Communication" -
– "Monitor" - “Monitored Notification (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 359)”
■ Audio RTP Transmission Interval [msec] Description Settings Default values Set the Audio RTP Transmission Interval.
20, 40, 60, 80, 100 msec 20 msec 201
System Settings (Table View) ■ RTP Idle Detection Time [sec]♦ Description Settings Default values Set the time to detect RTP idle state for Audio.
When Audio RTP is not received during communication, monitoring, or receiving a page, connection will be disconnected after the set time.
10 - 180 sec (by 1 sec) 10 sec ■ Audio 1 RTP Start Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive Audio RTP, such as communication between IX systems.
Set the difference to 210 or greater in the range of (Audio 1 RTP Start Port) - (Audio 1 RTP End Port).
1 - 65534 20000 ■ Audio 1 RTP End Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive Audio RTP, such as communication between IX systems.
Set the difference to 210 or greater in the range of (Audio 1 RTP Start Port) - (Audio 1 RTP End Port).
1 - 65535 21000 ■ Audio 2 RTP Start Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive Audio RTP using ONVIF.
Set the difference to 10 or greater in the range of (Audio 2 RTP Start Port) - (Audio 2 RTP End Port).
1 - 65534 22000 ■ Audio 2 RTP End Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive Audio RTP using ONVIF.
Set the difference to 10 or greater in the range of (Audio 2 RTP Start Port) - (Audio 2 RTP End Port).
1 - 65535 23000
2.6.1
Audio Buffer
■ Packets Buffered at Audio Start Description Settings Default values Set the number of packets to accumulate before playing audio.
0 - 4 1 202
System Settings (Table View) ■ Maximum Packets Buffered Description Settings Default values Set the maximum number of packets that can be accumulated.
If a packet is received beyond the set value, it is removed from the oldest packet.
It should be greater than the number of
“Packets Buffered at Audio Start (→page 202)”
.
2 - 10 3 203
System Settings (Table View)
2.7
Packet Priority
Configure the Packet Priority and VLAN for audio, video, and SIP packets.
Important • When a setting related to VLAN is updated at a station, it will restart. In some cases, it may take around 10 minutes for the station to start up.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ TOS Value (Audio) (except IXW-MA) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Packet Priority (TOS Value) for Audio.
0x00 - 0xFF 0x00 ■ TOS Value (Video) (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Packet Priority (TOS Value) for Video.
0x00 - 0xFF 0x00 ■ TOS Value (SIP) (except IXW-MA) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Packet Priority (TOS Value) for SIP.
0x00 - 0xFF 0x00 ■ VLAN Setting Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for tagged VLAN.
• Enable • Disable Disable 204
System Settings (Table View) Important • When "VLAN Setting" is set to "Enable" and uploaded to the station, ensure that the switches, PCs, and stations are all configured for VLAN operation.
■ VLAN ID♦ Description Settings Default values Set the VLAN ID.
1 - 4094 1 ■ VLAN Priority Description Settings Default values Set the VLAN priority.
0 (low) - 7 (high) 0 205
System Settings (Table View)
2.8
NTP
Configure NTP settings.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
2.8.1
Enable NTP
Description Settings Default values Select Yes / No Use to synchronize the time with an NTP server.
If this is set to "Yes," be sure to configure the other subcategories in
• Yes • No Use No Use
2.8.2
Synchronization Interval [hour]♦
Description Settings Default values Set the interval to synchronize with the NTP server.
1-255 hours (by 1 hour) 24 hour
2.8.3
Primary Server
■ Address IPv4 Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for NTP Primary Server.
Go to
“DNS (→page 185)” to set hostname.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) 206
System Settings (Table View) ■ Address IPv6 Description Default values ■ Port♦ Settings Description Settings Default values Set the IPv6 address for NTP Primary Server.
Go to
“DNS (→page 185)” to set hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Set the port number for NTP. 1 - 65535 123
2.8.4
Secondary Server
■ Address IPv4 Description Settings Default values ■ Address IPv6 Description Set the IPv4 address for NTP Secondary Server.
Go to
“DNS (→page 185)” to set hostname.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Settings Default values ■ Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IPv6 address for NTP Secondary Server.
Go to
“DNS (→page 185)” to set hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Set the port number for NTP. 1 - 65535 123 207
System Settings (Table View)
3. System Information
3.1
Location Registry (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Register a location.
For how to register a location, refer to
“Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” .
3.2
Address Book (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the IX-MV7-* and IX-MV Address Book.
Calling, paging, monitoring, line monitoring, and malfunction monitoring can be performed for any station registered in the Address Book. Network cameras can be monitored and outgoing calls can be made to VoIP phones.
“Open Network Camera List (→page 212)”
Important • Always configure
before setting "Address Book." • Enter the language configured in
. However, if the language (configured on the station main unit)
displayed on the screen for IX-MV7-* or IX-MV is different from that set in “Language (→page 158)”
, the characters on the station screen may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, enter information in the setting data using alphabetical characters only.
208
System Settings (Table View)
3.2.1
Station List
Register the stations in the Address Book.
Click
[Open Station List]
. The following window will be shown.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move column
Up to 50 station number lines can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered column.
VoIP Phone Registration (→page 211)
Register the VoIP phone in the Address Book.
1 3 2 List of IX-MV7-*, IX-MV in the Settings data If a network camera has not been registered in
“Open Network Camera List (→page 212)” , this will not be shown.
List of stations that can be registered to the Address Book Important • Stations where
“IP Address (→page 180)” is not configured cannot be registered to the Address Book.
• Results when searching by station will be listed in order of station number.
209
System Settings (Table View)
How to create Station List
1.
VoIP phones are registered in
“VoIP Phone Registration (→page 227)” .
2.
Identify the station to be configured using "List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in the Settings data."
3.
Identify the station to be registered in the Address Book using "List of stations that can be registered to the Address Book."
4.
Click cells ("Select" and "Network Camera") that correspond to Steps 1 and 2.
• Select: Register stations in which " By default, " ✔ ✔ (register)" is set for all.
" has been selected to the Address Book. For IX stations, stations for which "SIP" was selected will be registered to the Address Book as VoIP phones.
• Network Camera (for IX-MV7-*): Click
[Network camera selection]
and then select the network camera to
associate. Network cameras configured in “Open Network Camera List (→page 212)” can be selected. The
number of the selected network camera will be displayed.
If a network camera is associated with a station, the video from the network camera will be displayed when placing a call, during a communication, or when monitoring.
5.
When done, click
[Update]
.
6.
Click
[OK]
.
210
System Settings (Table View)
3.2.1.1 VoIP Phone Registration
On the "Address Book" screen, click
[VoIP Phone Registration]
. The following window will be shown.
“Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)”
1 2
How to perform VoIP Phone Registration
1.
In the "Station List," enter the "Number♦," "Name," and "Location." • Number: 3-32 digits • Name: 1-24 alphanumeric characters
• Location: Select a location registered in “Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” .
2.
Click
[Update]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to close the "Address Book" screen without registering a VoIP phone.
• The registered VoIP phone will be displayed at the end of the Address Book.
211
System Settings (Table View)
3.2.2
Open Network Camera List
IX-MV7-* and IX-MV support the ONVIF interface standard "ONVIF profile S." Video and audio of 3rd party network camera can be monitored on the IX-MV7-*, IX-MV screen.
Register the network camera in the Address Book. Up to 500 network cameras can be registered.
Configure
“Network Camera Integration (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 261)” to configure event notification-
related settings for the network camera.
Click
[Open Network Camera List]
. The following window will be shown.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“Network Camera Registry (→page 213)”
List of network cameras that can be registered to the Address Book List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in Settings data 1 3 2 If no network camera is registered, this will not be shown.
212
System Settings (Table View)
How to create Network Camera List
1.
Register the network camera in
“Network Camera Registry (→page 213)” .
2.
Identify the station to be configured using "List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in Settings data."
3.
Identify the network camera to be registered in the Address Book using "List of network cameras that can be registered to the Address Book."
4.
Click the cells ("Select," "PTZ Operation," and "Audio Monitoring") that correspond to Steps 2 and 3.
• Select: Register network cameras with " All items are set to "Yes" by default.
station.
All items are set to "Enable" by default.
✔ " selected to the Address Book.
All items are "blank (unregistered)" by default.
• PTZ Operation (for IX-MV7-*): Configure whether to allow network camera PTZ operation from the station.
• Audio Monitoring (for IX-MV7-*): Configure whether to allow monitoring of network camera audio from the Note • "PTZ Operation" and "Audio Monitoring" are set to "Enable" for IX-MV and cannot be changed.
5.
When done, click
[Update]
.
6.
Click
[OK]
.
3.2.2.1 Network Camera Registry
Click
[Open Network Camera Registry]
. The following screen will be shown.
“How to register a new network camera (→page 215)”
Select the network camera(s) to be deleted (multiple selections allowed), and click to delete.
If no network camera is registered, this will not be shown.
Important • Network camera registration is configured via
“Association Settings (→page 160)” on at least one IX-MV7-* or IX-MV station,
and cannot be configured if the PC cannot communicate with the system (this is because, when registering a network camera, the network camera is searched through IX-MV7-* or IX-MV).
213
System Settings (Table View) Note • When searching on the station, the numbers will be displayed in the order they were registered.
■ Camera Name♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Network Camera Name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Hostname Description Settings Default values ■ IP Address (IPv4) Description Settings Default values Set the hostname.
Go to
“DNS (→page 185)” to set Hostname.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the IPv4 address for Network camera.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
■ IP Address (IPv6) Description Settings Default values ■ ID♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Password♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IPv6 address for Network camera.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF Enter ID of the network camera.
1-32 alphanumeric characters Enter Password of the network camera.
1-32 alphanumeric characters Note • "Password" is displayed as "*****" in the Settings screen.
214
System Settings (Table View)
How to register a new network camera
Registration cannot be performed if the PC is not connected to the same network as the network camera.
Click
[Add Camera]
to search for a network camera (searching may take several minutes).
When searching is done, the "Network Camera Selection" screen will be shown, and the network cameras connected in the network will be shown in the "Network Camera Search List." 1 2 3 4 5 If the video profile cannot be obtained, nothing will be shown.
1.
To search by specifying an IP address, select "Manual Network Camera Configuration," and enter the "IP Address♦," "ID♦," and "Password ♦" of the network camera.
2.
To select from the Network Camera Search List, select "Select from Network Camera Search List." Select the network camera(s) to register from the "Network Camera Search List" (multiple selections allowed), and then enter the "Hostname," "ID♦," and "Password♦." When entering the Hostname, configure
.
To search again, click
[Search]
. It is also possible change the search time.
3.
Click
[Get Network Camera Information]
.
(Obtaining the video profile may take several minutes.) When video profiles are successfully obtained, they will be shown in "Network Camera Information."
4.
Choose the video profile(s) to be registered from the list (multiple selections allowed).
215
System Settings (Table View)
5.
Click
[Register]
to register a network camera.
6.
When done, click
[Update]
.
7.
Click
[OK]
.
216
System Settings (Table View)
3.3
Group (for Master) (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the group for groups calls, group pages, and contact input calls.
Up to 50 groups per station (50 stations per group) can be registered.
Stations other than IXW-MA can be registered to groups.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move column
Up to 50 station number lines can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered column.
Important • Always configure
before setting "Group (for Master)." • Enter the language configured in
. However, if the language (configured on the station main unit)
displayed on the screen for IX-MV7-* or IX-MV is different from that set in “Language (→page 158)”
, the characters on the station screen may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, enter information in the setting data using alphabetical characters only.
• Only a single VoIP Phone can be registered to each group.
• All pages, groups pages, message pages, and external input pages cannot be sent to VoIP Phones.
• Stations
“IP Address (→page 180)” has not been configured and that have not been registered in
“Address Book (for IX-MV7 * and IX-MV) (→page 208)”
cannot be registered to groups.
• Groups calls and calls by Option Input cannot be made to IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*).
• Groups calls and calls by Option Input cannot be made from IX-MV to IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*.
• Results when searching by station will be listed in order of group number.
217
System Settings (Table View)
3.3.1
Configuring a Group How to configure individual settings
Configure the group to register in each station.
“How to Create Group from Location(s) (→page 219)”
1 4 5 3 List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in Settings data 2 Group Information List of stations that can be registered to group
1.
Select the group to be configured from "Display Settings." The Settings screen for the selected group will be shown on the screen.
2.
Enter the following information in "Group Information." • Group Number: 01 - 99 Group numbers must be unique.
• Group Name: 1 - 24 alphanumeric characters
3.
Identify the station to be configured using "List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in Settings data."
4.
Identify the station to be registered from the "list of stations that can be registered to group."
5.
Click the cells that correspond to Steps 3 and 4. Select an audio protocol and video protocol setting value for each, and register to a group.
The number of registered stations will be shown in "Total."
Audio Protocol
• Blank: Select to not register to a group.
• U: Belongs to group. Paging audio is transmitted in unicast.
• M: Belongs to group. Paging audio is transmitted in multicast.
Video Protocol (only when IX-MV7-* is both the station to configure and register)
• Blank: Video will be transmitted as multicast.
• U: Video will be transmitted as unicast during group calls. Unicast can be used to send video to up to 20 stations.
• M: Video will be transmitted as multicast during group calls.
218
System Settings (Table View) The Video Protocol pull-down menu is shown when the Audio Protocol setting is selected.
All items are blank by default.
6.
When done, click
[Update]
.
7.
Click
[OK]
.
Important • If "M" is selected or "blank" is selected for the Video Protocol, be sure to configure
“Multicast Address (For IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) (→page 190)” .
• For VoIP phones or stations in which "SIP" was selected in
or
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 225)”
, "M" cannot be selected.
Note • When making a group call, the Audio Protocol will be set to "U" and cannot be changed.
How to Create Group from Location(s)
Groups are automatically created for each location.
Click
[Create Group from Location(s)]
. The following window will be shown.
1 2 3
The locations registered in “Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” will be
shown.
1.
Select the location(s) for which a group is to be created.
2.
Select "Group Number♦." • 01 - 99 Select a unique value.
219
System Settings (Table View)
3.
Click
[OK]
• Click .
A group will be registered for all configured Location in the selected location and group number. The location is shown in the group name.
[Cancel]
to return to the "Group" screen without creating a group.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
Important • Registration cannot be performed by selecting only a single station.
• Video Protocol and Audio Protocol settings are all set to "U" by default. To change them to "M," they must be changed individually.
• Performing Steps 1 and 4 again will overwrite with new settings.
• A group cannot be created from a location with 50 or more stations registered.
220
System Settings (Table View)
3.4
Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA)
Register audio files to be used for ringback tones, ringtones, message paging, etc.
The numbers of audio files that can be registered to each station are as follows.
Station Type
IX-MV7-* IX-MV IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*) IX-SSA(-*) IX-SS-2G IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) IX-RS-*
Information that can be saved to the station
Max. 100 files (with 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes per file) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Supported file format • File Type: .wav
• Sample Size: 16 bits
• Channel: 1 (monaural) • File Name: 1-82 alphanumeric characters (without file extensions) For IX-MV7-*, enter either a letter or number as the first character. Audio files for message paging will be searched by a letter or number when paging. Note • If using a file for a ringback tone, ringtone, or network camera event tone, add a period of silence in the .wav file if the tone is to be intermittent.
• Sample files of custom tones are provided on our website ( https://www.aiphone.net/product/ ) for download and use as audio sources.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“How to register multiple custom tones at once (→page 223)”
221
System Settings (Table View)
How to register an audio file
1.
Click
[Browse]
at the end of the row for the station in which the file is to be registered.
2.
Select the audio file to register, and click
[Open]
.
3.
Information on the selected audio file will be shown.
• Name: Shows the file name of the audio file. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters will be shown.
The name will be shown as the setting value when configuring the ringback tone etc.
If the file name of the audio file exceeds the character limit above, it will only partially be shown.
• File attachment: The audio file reference destination is shown.
4.
When done, click
[Update]
.
5.
Click
[OK]
.
How to delete a custom tone
1.
Check the
[Delete]
box of the audio file to delete.
2.
Click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
Note • "Name" can be deleted from the Settings screen by selecting
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)” - "Sounds" to upload
the setting file, and then deleting the audio file from the station.
222
System Settings (Table View)
How to register multiple custom tones at once
Audio files can be registered to multiple stations at once.
Click "Custom Sound Registration." The following screen will be shown.
1 2 3 4
1.
Click
[Browse]
, select the audio file to register, and then click
[Open]
.
2.
Enter the number of the custom tone to register the audio file.
• 1 - 100
3.
Select the station(s) to register the audio file from "Station List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
4.
Click
[Add]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to quit without registering multiple files.
5.
Information on the added audio file will be shown.
• Name: Shows the file name of the audio file. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters will be shown.
The Name will be shown when configuring the ringback tone etc.
If the file name of the audio file exceeds the character limit above, it will only partially be shown.
• Browse for .wav file: The audio file reference destination is shown.
6.
When done, click
[Update]
.
7.
Click
[OK]
.
223
4. Call Settings
System Settings (Table View)
4.1
Station Information (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G)
Configure the call button function.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ Call Button Function Description Settings Default values Select the Call Button Function when call button is pressed (for IX-RS-*: Call/Talk button).
• Call: Outgoing call • Call, Cancel Call, End Communication: Out going call, Cancel outgoing call, End Communication • Call, Answer Call, End Communication: Outgoing call, Answer call or page, End communication Call Note • Contact input calls and communication switched from a contact input call cannot be ended by pressing the call button (IX-RS *: Call button).
4.2
Called Stations (Master Stations) (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
A call destination does not have to be set up. Any intercom station registered in
“Address Book (for IX-MV7-* and IX MV) (→page 208)”
can be called.
224
System Settings (Table View)
4.3
Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA)
Configure the group to call when a call is made using the call button or via contact input.
• Stations other than IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*): Up to 20 stations can be configured in a single group, and up to 10 groups can be configured.
• IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) (for placing a Call Button call): Up to 20 stations can be configured in a single group, and only a single group can be configured.
• IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) (for placing a Option Input call): Up to 20 stations can be configured in a single group, and up to nine groups can be configured.
Any station other than IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), IXW-MA can be registered as a call recipient.
Important • An IX-RS, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) must be registered under Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) to use Door Release while in communication with IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*). An IX-RS cannot place a call to IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) even IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) is under Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations.)
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move column
Up to 50 station number lines can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered column.
VoIP Phone
Register the VoIP phone as a call recipient.
1 3 4 List of stations that can be registered to group 2 List of IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) in setting data 225
System Settings (Table View) Important • Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 180)” is not configured cannot be registered as destinations.
• If the station registered to the call destination is anything other than IX-MV7-* or IX-MV, one of the following must be configured to receive incoming calls.
– Set to "Call, Answer Call, End Communication" in
“Call Button Function (→page 224)” .
– Set to "Answer Call / Page" in "Option Input" - “Function (→page 242)” .
• Do not register the same station multiple times within a group.
• Only one VoIP phone can be registered to each group.
How to configure destinations (Door/Sub Stations)
1.
Select the group to configure from "Display Settings." • The Settings screen for the selected group will be displayed.
• Use the following groups when configuring IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*) destinations.
– Groups used to place a call by operating the call button: "Group number 10" – Groups used to place a call by Option Input: "Group number 01 - 09"
2.
Search for a station to configure from the "list of IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-DA, IX DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) in setting data."
3.
Search for the station to be registered from the "list of stations that can be registered to group."
4.
Click the cells that correspond to Steps 2 and 3. Select the settings and register the station to the group.
• The number of registered stations will be shown in "Total." – Blank: The selected station will not be registered.
– U: The station will be registered in the call destination. An outgoing call is transmitted as unicast.
– M: Station will be registered in the call destination. Video is transmitted as multicast for an outgoing call.
Station must be IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, or IX-DF(-*), and the call destination must be IX-MV7-* or IX MV.
– SIP: Select this to call an IX station as a VoIP phone.
• For group number 01 for stations other than IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA or IX-SS(-*) and group number 10 for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*), all IX-MV7-* or IX-MV stations in the "list of stations that can be registered to group" with station numbers in order from 1 to 20 will be set to "U".
5.
When done, click
[Update]
.
6.
Click
[OK]
.
Important
.
226
System Settings (Table View)
4.3.1
VoIP Phone Registration
Register the VoIP phone in Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations). When registering a VoIP phone, be sure to configure
“SIP (except IXW-MA) (→page 186)” .
On the "Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations)" screen, click
[VoIP Phone Registration]
. The following window will be shown.
“Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)”
1 2
How to perform VoIP Phone Registration
1.
In the "Station List," enter the "Number♦," "Name," and "Location." • Number: 3-32 digits • Name: 1-24 alphanumeric characters
• Location: Select a location registered in “Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” .
2.
Click
[Update]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to close the "VoIP Phone Registration" screen without registering a VoIP phone.
• The registered VoIP phone will be displayed at the end of the Address Book.
227
System Settings (Table View)
4.4
Call Origination (except IXW-MA)
Configure outgoing call settings.
Select the call method to configure in
[Display Settings]
.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Display Settings
Displays settings for the selected outgoing call method.
[Call Button]
(except IX-MV): Displays settings related to outgoing calls linked that placed by the call button or the bathroom link.
[Option Input 1 - 6]
: Displays settings related to outgoing calls when "Call" is selected for
"Option Input" - “Function (→page 242)” .
“Weekly Schedule (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 232)”
“Daily Schedule (except IX MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF( *), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 234)”
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
4.4.1
Call Origination Advanced Settings
■ Call Method (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the Call Method to change call destinations automatically by time delay or schedule.
• Standard Destination: Do not change call destination automatically.
IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are fixed to "Standard Destination" and cannot be changed.
(→page 231)” . Up to 8 groups can be used.
• Change Destination by Schedule: Change destination group by
MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 232)” and
“Destination Dwell Time (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♦
“Daily Schedule (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 234)” .
Standard Destination 228
System Settings (Table View) ■ Ringback Tone (except IX-MV) Description Settings Select the sound to be played by the station when placing a call.
For IX-MV7-*, this will also sound when monitoring.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Call Button • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • Except IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 1 Option Input 1 • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • Except IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 2 Option Input 2 • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Call Pattern 3 Option Input 3 • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Call Pattern 4 Option Input 4 • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Call Pattern 5 Option Input 5 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Call Pattern 6 Option Input 6 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Tremolo Sound ■ Call Timeout (except
[Call Button]
- IX-MV) ♦ Description Settings Default values Configure the Call Timeout for outgoing call.
• Infinite: Keep calling until call is answered • 10-600sec: Select to set between 10-600 sec (by 1 sec) 60sec Note • For
[Call Button]
, the outgoing call time for IX-MV is set on the station.
229
System Settings (Table View) ■ Ringback Tone Count [time(s)] (except
[Call Button]
IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the play count of ringback tone for outgoing call.
• Infinite: The ring back tone continues to play for the amount of time set in
“Call Timeout (except [Call Button] - IX-MV)♦ (→page 229)” .
• 1 - 20 times Infinite Note • For
[Call Button]
, the ringtone count for IX-MV is set on the station.
■ Call Destination (
[Option Input 1-4]
- for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Configure the call destination group and call priority.
Enter the group number directly, or click
[Open]
to select a group.
Settings Default values • Group Number: 01 - 99. Select from groups registered in
“Group (for Master) (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 217)” .
• Priority: Normal/Priority/Urgent • Group Number: • Priority: Normal ■ Standard Mode Settings (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Select the destination group when "Standard Destination" is selected in
“Call Method (except IX MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 228)”
.
Settings Default values
The call group number for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*) is fixed to "10" and cannot be changed for
[Call Button]
, or can be selected from "01 - 09" for
[Option Input 1]
.
• Priority: Normal/Priority/Urgent Call Button • Call Destination: 01 (10 for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Priority: Normal Contact input 1 - 5 call • Call Destination: - (01 for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Priority: Normal Option Input 6 • Call Destination: 01 • Priority: Urgent ■ Destination Dwell 1 - 8 (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*)) Description
configured in "Destination Dwell Time." is set to "Change Destination by Time Delay." Up to 8 groups can be configured, and it will switch between groups in order by the time Settings Default values
• Priority: Normal/Priority/Urgent • Call Destination: • Priority: Normal 230
System Settings (Table View) ■ Destination Dwell Time (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Configure the delay time to change the call destination when "Change Destination by Time
10-600sec / 1 sec step 30 sec 231
System Settings (Table View)
4.4.1.1 Weekly Schedule (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
to "Change Destination by Schedule." Configure the switch time for the call destination, the call destination group, and the call priority each day from Sunday to Saturday. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Weekly Schedule
Select the day and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen is shown.
“How to configure schedule display (→page 233)”
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ End Time Description Settings Default values ■ Call Destination Description Settings Default values Configure the time to start changing the call destination.
00:00 - 23:59 Configure the time to stop changing the call destination. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59 Configure the call destination to change within the schedule.
01 - 10. Select from groups registered in
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 225)” .
232
System Settings (Table View) ■ Priority Description Settings Configure the priority of calls.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent Default values
How to configure schedule display
Configure the day and schedule range shown on the Settings screen for the weekly schedule.
The display can be filtered to show only the day and schedule to configure.
Click Schedule View Adjustment. The following screen will be shown.
1 2 3
1.
Select the day(s) to display from "Day" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect all days at once, click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• By default, all days are shown.
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (1 - 12) that can be configured for each day of the week.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is shown.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the previous menu..
233
System Settings (Table View)
4.4.1.2 Daily Schedule (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
to "Change Destination by Schedule." Configure the switch time for the destination, the call group, and the call priority in units of one day. A schedule one year from the set day can be configured. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Daily Schedule
Select the date and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen will be shown.
1.
Select the date from the drop down menu.
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (1 - 12) that can be configured for each day.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is shown.
3.
Click [Change to Daily Schedule Display].
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ End Time Description Settings Default values ■ Call Destination Description Settings Default values Configure the time to start changing the call destination.
00:00 - 23:59 Set the time to stop changing the call destination. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59 Set the call destination to change within the schedule.
01 - 10. Select from groups registered in
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 225)” .
234
System Settings (Table View) ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of calls.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent
4.4.2
Tone Settings
Configure the busy tone and error tone when making an outgoing call.
■ Busy Tone (except IX-MV) Description Settings Select the sound to be played when call destination station is busy.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) 235
System Settings (Table View) ■ Error Tone (Call Failed) (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Select the sound to be played when outgoing call has failed.
• None (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are Busy Tone) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are Error Tone) • Pre Tone 1 (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3 (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Error (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are Error Tone)
4.4.3
Call Restart Function (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
■ Call Restart Function Description Settings Default values Select Enable/Disable for Call Restart Function.
Call Restart Function: When the station is reset during an outgoing call, the outgoing call will be resumed automatically up to 2 times.
• Enable • Disable Disable 236
System Settings (Table View)
4.5
Incoming Call (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA)
Configure incoming call settings.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move column
Up to 50 station number lines can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered column.
4.5.1
Call Answer Settings
■ Auto Answer Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF to automatically answer the individual call.
Auto Answer: when receiving an individual call, answer automatically. When transferring a call, it must be answered manually.
• OFF: No Auto Answer.
• ON: Auto Answer.
• IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-RS-*: OFF • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G: ON Important • For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, if Auto Answer is set to "OFF," be sure to configure one of the following. If not configured, calls will not be received.
– Set to "Call, Answer Call, End Communication" in
“Call Button Function (→page 224)” .
– Set to "Answer Call / Page" in "Option Input" - “Function (→page 242)” .
Note • For IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), Auto Answer is set to "ON and cannot be changed." 237
System Settings (Table View)
4.5.2
Ringtone
■ Ringtone (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV) Description Settings Select the ringtone to be played for incoming call.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Call Pattern 3 ■ Ringback Tone Count [time(s)] (except IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set the paly count of ringtone for incoming call.
• Infinite: Keep ringing until the call is answered or canceled.
• 1 - 20 times Infinite 238
System Settings (Table View) ■ Call Button (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Select the ringtone for incoming call. Ringtone can be set per each source station.
IX-MV7-*: Ringtone can be set per priority.
IX-MV: Same for all priority. Set ringtone to "Normal" priority.
• None (IX-MV7-* only) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (IX-MV: Busy Tone) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (IX-MV: Error Tone) • Pre Tone 1 (IX-MV7-* only) • Pre Tone 2 (IX-MV7-* only) • Pre Tone 3 (IX-MV7-* only) • Communication End Pretone (IX-MV7-* only) • Call Queue Notification (IX-MV7-* only) • Waiting Reply Tone (IX-MV7-* only) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Call Pattern 1 ■ Option Input (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Select the ringtone for incoming call by Option Input. The ringtone can be set per each source station.
IX-MV7-*: The ringtone can be set per priority.
IX-MV: Same for all priorities. Set the ringtone to "Normal" priority.
• None (IX-MV7-* only) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (IX-MV: Busy Tone) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (IX-MV: Error Tone) • Pre Tone 1 (IX-MV7-* only) • Pre Tone 2 (IX-MV7-* only) • Pre Tone 3 (IX-MV7-* only) • Communication End Pretone (IX-MV7-* only) • Call Queue Notification (IX-MV7-* only) • Waiting Reply Tone (IX-MV7-* only) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Call Pattern 2 239
System Settings (Table View) ■ Call Button Ringtone Count [time(s)] (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set the play count of ringback tone for incoming call from call button.
• Infinite: Keep ringing until the call is answered or canceled.
• 1 - 20 times Infinite ■ Option Input Ringtone Count [time(s)] (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set the play count of ringback tone for incoming call from the option input.
• Infinite: Keep ringing until the call is answered or canceled.
• 1 - 20 times Infinite
4.5.3
VoIP Phone (except IX-MV)
■ VoIP Phone Call Priority Description Settings Default values Select the call priority from VoIP phones.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent Normal 240
System Settings (Table View)
5. Option Input/Relay Output Settings
5.1
Option Input
Configure the input terminal settings for each station. The number of input terminals varies by station.
Select the contact input number to configure in
[Display Settings]
.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Display Settings
Displays setting content for the selected contact input number.
5.1.1
Option Input Advanced Settings 5.1.1.1 Name (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA)
Description Settings Default values Set the Name of the Option Input.
1-24 alphanumeric characters 241
System Settings (Table View)
5.1.1.2 Function
Description Settings Configure the contact input functions. The functions that can be selected differ depending on the station.
• No Function
• Answer Call / Page (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), IXW-MA): Answer incoming call or page.
• Paging (for IX-MV7-*): Page to destination. Be sure to also configure
“Option Input Page (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 257)” .
• External Input Page (for IX-MV7-*): Page using an external sound source. Only one input terminal may be configured. Be sure to also configure
“Option Input Page (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 257)” .
• Turn LCD On (for IX-MV7-*): Turn LCD backlight of IX-MV7-* on.
• Relay Latch Reset (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SS-2G): Reset latch relay output using the option input.
Be sure to select "Latch Output" in "Relay Output" - “Function (→page 245)”
.
• Bathroom Indicator Reset (for IXW-MA): Not used.
No Function Default values
5.1.1.3 Type
Description Settings Default values Set the detection method of the contact input.
• Make • Break Make
5.1.1.4 Detection Time
■ Detection Time Range Description Settings Default values Select the Detection Time Range for Option Input.
• 0 (Immediate): Detect at input less than 200 msec.
• 200 - 2000 [msec] • 3 - 600 [sec] 0 (Immediate) Note • The Detection Time Range for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*) is "200 - 2000 [msec]" and cannot be changed.
■ Detection Time♦ Description Settings Default values Configure the contact input search time within the range set in "Detection Time Range." The settings will be configured as follows according to the information set in "Detection Time Range." • If set to 0 (Immediate): Configuration unnecessary.
• If set to 200 - 2000 [msec]: Configure from 200 - 2000 msec (by 100 msec).
• If set to 3 - 600 [sec]: Configure from 3 - 600 sec (by 1 sec).
242
System Settings (Table View)
5.1.1.5 API (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
■ API 1 Description Settings Default values -
Enter the CGI command sent when "API" is selected in “Function (→page 242)” .
1-128 alphanumeric characters ■ API 2 Description Settings Default values -
Enter the CGI command sent when "API" is selected in “Function (→page 242)” .
1-128 alphanumeric characters 243
System Settings (Table View)
5.2
Relay Output
Configure the output terminal settings for each station. The number of output terminals varies by station.
Select the relay output number to configure in
[Display Settings]
.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Display Settings
Displays setting content for the selected contact output number.
“Weekly Schedule (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 250)”
“Daily Schedule (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 252)”
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
Important • The four relay output methods are shown below. Redundant configuration is possible for each output terminal. If multiple commands occur during a single relay output, the last command will take priority.
– Function selected in “Function (→page 245)”
–
“Option Relay Control (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) (→page 246)”
–
“Weekly Schedule (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 250)” ,
“Daily Schedule (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 252)”
–
5.2.1
Relay Output Advanced Settings 5.2.1.1 Name (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA)
Description Settings Default values Set the name of the Relay Output.
1-24 alphanumeric characters 244
System Settings (Table View)
5.2.1.2 Function
Description Settings Default values Select the function of the Relay Output. Different function can be selected depending on the station type.
• No Function • Status Output (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), IXW-MA): Relay Output during the status. The details setting can be set in
“How to configure Status Output (→page 245)” .
• External Audio Output (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)): Contact is output to control the paging amplifier while audio is output from the paging amplifier
other than "Built-in Speaker for Communication and Paging." • Door Release (except IXW-MA): Relay output when door release is activated or, entering the authentication key using keypad of the station or the VoIP Phone. Configure the output time in
• Latch Output (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-FA, IX-SS-2G): Latch relay output by event trigger. Continue to output until latch reset trigger input. Ignore set
“Output Time♦ (→page 248)” . Configuration can be set in "How to configure Latch Output".
• Contact Input Call / Communication State (for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)): Relay output during the contact input call and communication until reset.
• Bathroom Indicator (for IXW-MA): Not used.
• Contact Change SIF Event (for IXW-MA): Relay output when Contact Change SIF Event is received from another station. Output Time is the same as Option Input Detection Time or Relay Output Time of the SIF command originating station. Set in "SIF" - "Transmission Trigger" -
“Change contact (→page 282)” .
Relay Output 1 • Except IXW-MA: Door Release • IXW-MA: No Function Relay Output 2 - 10 • No Function Note • If "Automatically configure door release for all stations?" is set to "No" in
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
, the default value for "Relay Output 1 (except IXW-MA)" will be "No Function."
How to configure Status Output
is set to "Status Output," select the operating state for when the relay output occurs. This can be selected for each operation priority (multiple selections allowed).
The operating states that can be selected vary by station type.
Note • For "Outgoing Page" and "Incoming Page," relay output is performed even during message paging and external input paging.
• For "Monitored," relay output is performed even during scan monitoring.
245
System Settings (Table View)
How to configure Latch Output
is set to "Latch Output," select the operating state for when the relay output occurs. This can be selected for each operation priority (multiple selections allowed).
Choose from two restoration methods for relay output.
• Option Input (default value): Reset Latch Output by the Option Input.
• End Communication: Reset Latch Output by ending communication or the option input.
All items are set to "Option Input" by default.
.
How to configure Contact Change SIF Event
is set to "Contact Change SIF Event", select the station for interlocking with Contact Change SIF Event of Relay Output 1.
■ Number Description Settings Default values Set SIF Origination Station Number. Enter the station number or select station from the list.
3-32 digits
5.2.1.3 Option Relay Control (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*))
Description Settings Default values Select Enable/Disable for Option Relay Control when using the speed dial of IX-MV7-* to control the output.
If set to "Enable," contact will be output according to the "Speed Dials / Favorites" -
“How to configure Option Relay Control (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 343)”
setting.
If "How to configure optional relay" -
was set to "Enable" for the station that
For IXW-MA, this can be controlled as an optional relay if set to "Enable," only when
“Function (→page 245)” is set to "No Function."
• Enable • Disable Disable 246
System Settings (Table View)
5.2.1.4 Output Time Range
■ Output Time Range Description
Select the Output Time Range for relay output if “Function (→page 245)” is set to "Door
Release" or if the output terminal is controlled via
Settings Default values • 0 (Momentary) (for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)): Outputs while an output command is received. However, this is set to 10 sec and cannot be changed if a relay output command is received via CGI.
• 200-2000 [msec] • 3 - 600 [sec] (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • 3-300 [sec] (for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) 200-2000 [msec] 247
System Settings (Table View) Important • If set to "0 (Momentary)," the operation when the door on the other station is released will be as follows.
IX-MV7-* or IX-RS-*: When the Door Release button is pressed or the Authentication Key is input by the keypad, a relay output command is sent and the output command ends immediately. The output command will not continue even if the Door Release button is held.
IX-MV: The relay output command continues while the Door Release button is pressed, and ends once it is released.
■ Output Time♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Output Time within the range selected in
“Output Time Range (→page 247)” .
Select the Output Time Range for relay output.
• If set to 0 (Momentary): Configuration unnecessary.
• If set to 200-2000 [msec]: Configure from 200 - 2000 msec (by 200 msec).
• If set to 3 - 600 [sec]: Configure from 3 - 600 sec (by 1 sec).
• If set to 3-300 [sec]: Configure from 3 - 300 sec (by 1 sec).
400 [msec]
5.2.1.5 Door Release Authorization (except IXW-MA)
Description Settings Default values
Set the Authentication Key when "Door Release" is selected in “Function (→page 245)”
the relay output will be activated. Configure "Door Release Settings" -
releasing the door that is connected to the station. When the "Authentication Key" is confirmed,
numerical keypad on IX-MV7-* or VoIP Phone.
• Except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): 1-20 digits • IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): 1-4 digits
– IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) not configured: 20 random digits – IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) configured: 4 random digits Important • Configure the Authentication Key using 1 to 4 digits to release when using the IX-MV.
• Configure a different Authentication Key for each output terminal. (The same key cannot be used.) • Configure an Authentication Key that is different from the Authentication Key configured in "Communication Audio Messages"
- “Door Release Authorization (except IXW-MA) (→page 248)”
• To release the door using the numerical keypad, enter "**Door Release Authorization*" on the IX-MV7-* or VoIP Phone numerical keypad (if the Authentication Key is "0000" enter "**0000*").
248
System Settings (Table View)
5.2.1.6 Sound Settings (except IX-MV and IXW-MA)
■ Door Release Description Settings Default values Select the Door Release sounds to be played.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Operation Sound ■ Relay Control (start) (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the sound to be played when Option Relay is activated.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values None 249
System Settings (Table View) ■ Relay Control (end) (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the sound to be played when Option Relay is deactivated.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values None
5.2.1.7 Weekly Schedule (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure the time to perform relay output for each day of the week, from Sunday to Saturday. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Weekly Schedule
Select the day and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen will be shown.
“How to configure schedule display (→page 233)”
250
System Settings (Table View) Important • Regardless of the configuration in
“Function (→page 245)” , the relay will continue to output during the time period set in the
schedule. However, if a door release operation or other command occurs during the relay output, the last command will be given priority, and the relay output will stop even if it is still within the time set in the schedule.
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to start the relay output.
00:00 - 23:59 ■ End Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to end the relay output.
If set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be the time the following day.
00:00 - 23:59
How to configure schedule display
Configure the day and schedule range shown on the Settings screen for the weekly schedule.
The display can be filtered to show only the day and schedule to configure.
Click Schedule View Adjustment. The following screen will be shown.
1 2 3
1.
Select the day(s) to display from "Day" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect all days at once, click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• By default, all days are shown.
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (1 - 12) that can be configured for each day of the week.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is shown.
251
System Settings (Table View)
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the schedule display.
5.2.1.8 Daily Schedule (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure the time at which relay output will be performed, in units of one day. A schedule one year from the set day can be configured. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Daily Schedule
Select the date and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen will be shown.
1.
Select the date from the drop down menu.
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (1 - 12) that can be configured for each day.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is shown.
3.
Click
[Change to Daily Schedule Display]
.
Important
schedule. However, if a door release operation or other command occurs during relay output, the latest command will be given priority, and relay output will stop even if it is still within the time set in the schedule.
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to start the relay output.
00:00 - 23:59 252
System Settings (Table View) ■ End Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to end the relay output.
If set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be the time the following day.
00:00 - 23:59
5.2.2
Authentication Key
■ Option Relay Control Authentication Key (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA and IX SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values
If “Option Relay Control (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) (→page 246)”
is
set to "Enable" and "Speed Dials / Favorites" -
Output can be controlled.
“TLS (→page 344)” is set to "Enable" on the
requesting station, configure the key used to decrypt encrypted communication.
If this matches the "Option Relay Control Key" of the station performing the operation, the Relay To use this, be sure to configure "Speed Dials / Favorites" -
“Option Relay Control Key (→page 344)” .
1-20 digits Note • Only one Option Relay Control Authentication Key can be set for each station. It will be shared with multiple Relay Output.
253
System Settings (Table View)
6. Paging Settings
Important • All pages, groups pages, message pages, and external input pages cannot be sent to VoIP Phone.
6.1
Paging Origination (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure settings related to outgoing paging.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ Paging Timeout [sec]♦ Description Settings Default values Set the time for outgoing paging duration.
10-600sec / 1 sec step 30 sec ■ Paging Wait Timer [sec] (for IX-MV7-*) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the time to wait for a response from all destination stations when outgoing paging is activated. Paging starts after this time without a response form all destination.
1-20sec (by 1 sec) 10 sec Important • A page may not be sent to a station if a response is received after "Paging Wait Timer [sec]" elapses. If multiple stations receive pages, configure a longer paging wait timer.
Note • The paging wait time for IX-MV is set to "10 sec" and cannot be changed.
254
System Settings (Table View) ■ Urgent Page Response (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for the paging destination station can answer the urgent page.
• Enable • Disable Disable Important • If the station being called is IX-MV, end operations can be performed even if urgent paging rejecting is set to "Enable." ■ Lock Paging (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable to lock paging function.
• Enable: Page button will be hidden • Disable Disable Note
255
System Settings (Table View)
6.2
All Page (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
When paging all stations, the default setting is set to multicast. When unicast is required, configure the following settings.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move column
Up to 50 station number lines can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered column.
Address Book Station List 2 3 1 List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in the Settings data Important • Unicast can reach up to 50 stations. If you need to page more than 50 stations are to be paged at once, use multicast.
• When paging stations in multicast, configure
“Multicast Address (For IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) (→page 190)”
.
How to configure All Page
1.
Identify the station to be configured using "List of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV in the setting data."
2.
Search for stations to transmit via unicast from the "List of stations in Address Book."
3.
Place a check in the cells corresponding to Steps 1 and 2.
• Unchecked: Multicast transmission • Checked: Unicast transmission • By default, all are set to "Unchecked" (multicast transmission).
4.
When done, click
[Update]
.
5.
Click
[OK]
.
256
System Settings (Table View)
6.3
Option Input Page (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure contact input paging.
.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Display Settings
Displays setting content for the selected Option Input number.
■ Destination Description Settings Default values ■ Group Number Description Settings Default values ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the destination group for paging.
• All Page: Page all stations that are registered in the address book.
• Group: Page the group that is set in "Group Number." All Page Set the destination group for paging.
Enter the group number, or click
[Open]
to select group.
-
Set the priority for paging.
• Normal • Urgent Normal 257
System Settings (Table View) ■ Message File Name Description Settings Select the message to be sent for message paging. Available when "Message Page" is selected
in "Option Input" - “Function (→page 242)” .
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values None ■ Play Count [time(s)] Description Settings Default values Set the play count for message paging.
1 - 20 times 1 time 258
System Settings (Table View)
7. Function Settings
7.1
Door Release (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) 7.1.1
Door Release Assignment
Configure the connected station and the authentication key to release the door during a call.
For IX-RS-* settings, refer to
“Door Release Assignment (for IX-RS-*) (→page 365)”
.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move column
Up to 50 station number lines can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered column.
Destination station list (# / Number / Name / Station Type) ■ Contact Assignment Description Settings Default values Select which relay output will be used for door release during call or monitoring.
• Origination Station: Use origination station relay output for door release.
• Destination Station: Use destination station relay output for door release.
Destination Station 259
System Settings (Table View) ■ Authentication Key Description Settings Default values When "Destination Station" is selected in "Contact Assignment", set the Authentication Key for door release.
Authentication key must match with the destination station's authentication key, which is set in
"Relay Output" - “Door Release Authorization (except IXW-MA) (→page 248)”
to allow door release.
• IX-MV7-*: 1-20 digits • IX-MV: 1-4 digits Random characters (compatible with default value of "Relay Output" - "Door Release Authorization") Note
"No," a default value for "Authentication Key" will not be set.
• The default values for the Door Release Authorization and Authentication Key vary depending on the station type set in
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)” - "IX Support Tool Settings."
– System with IX-MV, IX-DA, or IX-BA: 20 digits – System without IX-MV, IX-DA, or IX-BA: 4 digits • If the destination station's Authentication Key is four characters or longer, the Door Release Key for IX-MV will release the door if the first four digits match.
260
System Settings (Table View)
7.2
Network Camera Integration (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure network camera profile (video profile) and event related settings.
To configure the settings, register a network camera in the Address Book of the IX-MV7-* or IX-MV which will receive
the event in "Address Book" - “Open Network Camera List (→page 212)” .
Important • For network camera event registration,
“Association Settings (→page 160)” must be configured for the IX-MV7-* or IX-MV. If
the programming PC is not connected to the same network or cannot communicate with multicast transmission, it is not be possible to configure. (this is because network camera events are obtained over multicast via IX-MV7-* or IX-MV when registering network camera events).
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Jump to related item
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
Profile Setting [<<]
: Displays the first column for profile setting.
[>>]
: Displays the last column for profile setting.
[Go]
: Enter a network camera number and click
[Go]
to display the column for the entered network camera number.
Event Registration [<<]
: Displays the first column for event registration.
[>>]
: Displays the last column for event registration.
[Go]
: Enter an event number and click
[Go]
to display the column for the entered event number.
“How to configure network camera event setup
Network Camera Number If no network camera is registered, this will not be shown.
Event Number If no event is registered, this will not be shown.
261
System Settings (Table View)
7.2.1
Profile Setting
Configure when changing the profile selected when a network camera is registered in "Address Book" -
“Open Network Camera List (→page 212)” .
■ Profile Description Select the profile of the network camera.
On the first screen, the Profile that was selected when registering the network camera will be displayed. Refer to the manual of the network camera for the details.
Settings Default values
7.2.2
Event Registration
Configure the network camera event to register in IX-MV7-* or IX-MV.
When the registered event is received, network camera monitoring will be performed and the notification tone will be played, or the outgoing call command will be sent to the destination station (for IX-MV7-*).
■ Event Description Displays Event registered in
“How to configure network camera event setup (→page 265)” .
To delete the registered event, click
[Update]
with "Event" set as blank. For details on topics, refer to the manual of the network camera.
Settings Default values ■ Function (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Select the function when receive the topic from the network camera.
• Monitor: Play the notification tone and begin network camera monitoring.
• Call: An outgoing call is placed from the station set in
“Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 264)” . Configure
“ID (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 263)”
,
“Password (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 263)” ,
Default values 262
System Settings (Table View) ■ Event Tone (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Select the tone to be played when receiving event from the network camera.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Call Pattern 3 ■ ID (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values
If "Call" is set in “Function (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 262)” , configure the administrator ID of the
station set in “Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 264)” .
1-32 alphanumeric characters ■ Password (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values
If "Call" is set in “Function (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 262)”
, configure the administrator password of the station set in
“Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 264)” .
1-32 alphanumeric characters Note • "Password" will be displayed as "****" in the Settings screen.
263
System Settings (Table View) ■ Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) Description
If “Function (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 262)”
is set to "Call," configure from which station to make the outgoing call.
Enter the station number or click
[Open]
to select a station.
The selected station must be set "Enable" in
“CGI Functionality (→page 279)” .
Settings Select from the stations registered in
“Address Book (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 208)” .
IXW-MA cannot be selected.
Default values ■ Call Destination (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Configure the destination station number or group number when the station configured in
“Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 264)” makes an outgoing call.
Station number: 3-32 digits Group number: 01 - 99 Default values ■ Priority (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Select the call priority when the station configured in
“Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 264)” makes an outgoing call.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent Default values ■ Event Tone (for IX-MV) Description Settings Select the tone to be played when receiving event from the network camera. The tone will be the same for all network cameras and events registered in the station.
• Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Call Pattern 3 ■ Play count of Event Tone Description Settings Default values
Set the play count for Network Camera Event Tone when “Function (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 262)”
is set to "Monitor." The ringtone count will be the same for all network cameras and events registered to the station. If "Call" is set, the ringtone count for the event notification tone will be 1 only.
• Infinite: Continues to sound while the event generated by the network camera is received.
• 1 - 20 times 1 time 264
System Settings (Table View)
How to configure network camera event setup
The network camera event must be registered.
Click
[Open Network Camera Event Registry]
. The "Open Network Camera Event Registry" screen will be shown.
1 2 3 4 5 If no event is obtained, this will not be shown.
1.
Select the station to register the network camera event from "Station List."
2.
Select the network camera(s) to monitor events from "Network Camera List" (multiple selections allowed).
• Network cameras registered in the Address Book in "Address Book" -
“Open Network Camera List (→page 212)” will be shown.
3.
Click
[Get Network Camera Events]
.
(Obtaining the events may take several minutes.) • Once events are successfully obtained, they will be shown in "Event List." 265
System Settings (Table View)
4.
Select the events to monitor from "Event List." (Multiple selections allowed) • For details on events, refer to the manual of the network camera.
5.
Click
[Register]
• Click
[Cancel]
to register the event.
• The network cameras and events registered in event registry will be shown.
to back to the "Network Camera Integration" screen without registering the event.
266
System Settings (Table View)
7.3
Paging Settings (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA)
Configure incoming page settings.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
7.3.1
Paging Pretone Setting
■ Paging Pretone Description Settings Default values Select the Paging Pretone.
• None • Call Pattern 1 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 2 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 3 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 4 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 5 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 6 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Tremolo Sound (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Busy Response Tone (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Operation Sound (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Error (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)”
(except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)).
Pre Tone 2 Important • Configure a tone with a shorter duration than the paging pretone on the paging origination station. Configuring a longer tone might prevent the station from receiving audio when paging begins.
267
System Settings (Table View)
7.4
Bathroom Call (for IXW-MA)
This function cannot be used outside Japan.
268
System Settings (Table View)
7.5
Configure this section when email notification of station operation is required.
Be sure to configure
“DNS (→page 185)” for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*).
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Select the event (sending trigger) to configure. The Settings screen is displayed.
“How to select event display (→page 275)”
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
7.5.1
Server Settings
■ SMTP Server Description Set the SMTP server.
When choosing an IPv4 address, enter the IP address or the hostname.
When choosing an IPv6 address, configure the IP address (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX BA, and IX-SS(-*)) or the hostname. If a hostname is used, configure
1 - 255 alphanumeric characters Settings Default values ■ SMTP Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the port number for SMTP.
1 - 65535 25 269
System Settings (Table View) ■ SMTP Encryption Description Settings Default values Select the encryption type for SMTP.
• OFF • TLS • STARTTLS OFF 270
System Settings (Table View)
7.5.2
Authentication Settings
■ SMTP Authentication Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for SMTP Authentication.
• ON • OFF OFF ■ Mode Description Settings Default values Select the SMTP Authentication Mode.
• LOGIN • CRAM-MD5 LOGIN ■ ID Description Settings Default values ■ Password Description Settings Default values Set the ID for SMTP authentication.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the Password for SMTP authentication.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Note • "Password" will be displayed as "*****" on the screen.
7.5.3
Email Addresses
■ Destination 1 Description Settings Default values ■ Destination 2 Description Settings Default values Set the destination email address.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the destination email address.
1-64 alphanumeric characters 271
System Settings (Table View) ■ Destination 3 Description Settings Default values ■ Source Address Description Settings Default values Set the destination email address.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the source email address.
1-64 alphanumeric characters
7.5.4
Email Event Trigger
Set the email event trigger which initiates the message sending process. Configure the email event trigger for each destination address.
■ Outgoing Normal Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an outgoing call is placed at "Normal" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Incoming Normal Call (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an incoming call is received at "Normal" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Outgoing Priority Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an outgoing call is placed at "Priority" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Incoming Priority Call (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an incoming call is received at "Priority" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Outgoing Urgent Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an outgoing call is placed at "Urgent" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 272
System Settings (Table View) ■ Incoming Urgent Call (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an incoming call is received at "Urgent" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Door Release Activated (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IX-RS-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Door Release is activated.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Call Failed (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when outgoing call has failed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Latch Reset (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G) Description Settings Default values Send email when reset latch relay output. ("Latch Output" is selected in "Relay Output" -
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Error Description Settings Default values Send email when a communication error has occurred.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Station Restarted Description Settings Default values Send email when the station has reset.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ SD Card Error (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send email when a microSD access error is detected. If the error is detected continuously, mail will not be sent an additional time.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 273
System Settings (Table View) ■ Recording Memory Full (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send email when a microSD card meets following criteria. If the error is detected continuously, mail will not be sent an additional time.
• When “Prevent Overwrite (→page 298)” is set to "Enable"
– Recorded recordings exceeds 950 – Storage capacity remaining 5%
• When “Prevent Overwrite (→page 298)” is set to "Disable"
– Recorded recordings exceeds 999 – Storage capacity remaining 0% • Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Line Supervision (Passed) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Line Supervision is "Passed".
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Line Supervision (Failed) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Line Supervision is "Failed".
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Device Check (Passed) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Device Check is "Passed".
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Device Check (Failed) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Device Check is "Failed".
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Subject Description Settings Default values Set the Subject of email per Event Trigger. This will be used for all recipient addresses.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Important • "UTF-8" encoding is used for "Subject." Depending on the email client, the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, set the encoding method to "UTF-8." 274
System Settings (Table View)
How to select event display
Select an event (Email Event Trigger) to display on the Settings screen. The selected sending trigger will be the only one displayed.
This will be used for all recipient addresses.
Click Event View Selection. The following screen will be shown.
1 2
1.
Select the event(s) (Email Event Trigger) from "Event List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect all events at once, click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• By default, all events are displayed.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to exit the event display selection.
7.5.5
Periodic Log Transmission
Configure settings related to sending periodic logs. These can be configured for each recipient email address.
■ Periodic Log Transmission Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for send station log periodically.
• Enable • Disable Disable ■ Periodic Log Transmit Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to send the periodic log.
00:00 - 23:59 00:00 ■ Periodic Log Transmit Interval Description Settings Default values Select the interval to send the periodic log.
1 Day - 7 Day 1 Day 275
System Settings (Table View) ■ Periodic Log Transmission Subject Description Settings Default values Set the email subject for Periodic Log Transmission. This is used for all destination addresses.
1 - 64 alphanumeric characters Important • "UTF-8" encoding is used for "Periodic Log Transmission Subject." Depending on the email client, the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, set the encoding method to "UTF-8." 276
System Settings (Table View)
7.5.6
Send Test Email (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Send a test email to the address specified in
.
Click
[Send]
of the station to send the test email to. The following email will be sent to the configured address.
Important
to communicate with the system.
Example of sending an email message: When sending a test email from the station (Station Number: 001, Station Name: Intercom Station 1, Location: Office).
From Date and time To CC Subject Text △△△△@△△△△△ .com
11/20/2018 15:22 [email protected]
001 Intercom Station 1 Test Email Test Email sent at "20181120 15:22:46." Station Number: "001" Station Name: [Intercom Station 1] Station location: [Office] Important • "UTF-8" encoding is used for "Subject," "Periodic Log Transmission Subject," and "Image Filename." Depending on the email client, the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, set the encoding method to "UTF-8." 277
System Settings (Table View)
7.5.7
Additional Settings (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
■ Attach Image Description Settings Default values ■ Image Filename Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable to send an image with the email when "Outgoing Normal Call", "Outgoing Priority Call" and "Outgoing Urgent Call" is selected in
“Email Event Trigger (→page 272)” .
• Enable • Disable Disable Set the filename of a image file when "Attach Image" is enabled.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Important • "UTF-8" encoding is used for "Image Filename." Depending on the email client, the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, set the encoding method to "UTF-8." 278
System Settings (Table View)
7.6
CGI
For the details of CGI functionality, contact the local Aiphone representative.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ CGI Functionality Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for CGI functionality.
• Enable • Disable Disable Important • CGI controls may fail when multiple CGI commands are received.
279
System Settings (Table View)
7.7
SIF
For the details of SIF functionality, contact the local Aiphone representative.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Display Settings
Displays setting content for the selected number or periodic transmission.
Select the event (SIF sending trigger) to configure. The Settings screen is displayed.
“How to select event display (→page 289)”
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
“Download SIF File (→page 293)”
7.7.1
SIF Functionality
Description Settings Default values
7.7.2
SIP URI Format (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for SIF functionality.
• Enable • Disable Disable Select Enable / Disable when SIP URI Format is used for station destination. If set to "Enable," TERMID cannot be used.
• Enable • Disable Disable 280
System Settings (Table View)
7.7.3
SIF Settings (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure SIF recipient and communication settings. 16 SIF settings can be set for each station.
Select the number to configure from No.1 - No.16 in
[Display Settings]
.
Note • There are two ways to configure SIF communication: manually configuring settings or uploading a "SIF Communication
Settings (sif.ini)" file in “Upload SIF File (→page 291)”
. The latest setting will take priority.
■ Program Type Description Settings Default values Set the Program Type for SIF.
0000-1111
setting will be disabled.
■ IPv4 Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Description Set the SIF IPv4 destination address.
Go to
“DNS (→page 185)” to set Hostname.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Settings Set the SIF IPv6 destination address.
Go to
“DNS (→page 185)” to set Hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Default values ■ Destination Port Description Settings Default values Set the Port Number for destination.
1 - 65535 ■ SSL Description Settings Select Enable / Disable for SSL.
• Disable • Enable Default values ■ Connection Description Settings Default values Select Socket / HTTP for connection.
• Socket • HTTP 281
System Settings (Table View)
7.7.4
Transmission Trigger (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure the SIF sending trigger when “Program Type (→page 281)” is set to "0010" or "0100-1111."
This can be configured for each recipient. Select the number to configure from No.1 - No.16 in
[Display Settings]
.
■ Begin Outgoing Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when outgoing call is placed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Communication (Source) (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning communication.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Door Release Indication (for IX-MV7-* and IX-RS-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when door release request is sent.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Communication (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending communication.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Change contact Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when Option Input contact or Relay Output contact is changed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 282
System Settings (Table View) ■ Unit error Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when communication error has occurred.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin broadcast (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when page, message page, or external input page is started.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End broadcast (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when page, message page, or external input page has ended.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Transfer (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when communication begins after transferring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Transfer (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when communication ends after transferring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Periodical Transmission Description Settings Default values Periodically send the station status using SIF command. The interval is set in
“Periodical Transmission (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 290)” .
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Initialization Notice Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the station is booted.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 283
System Settings (Table View) ■ End Outgoing Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending a outgoing call.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Incoming Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning a incoming call.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Incoming Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending a incoming call.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Latch Reset (except IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command by reset latch relay output. ("Latch Output" is selected in "Relay Output" -
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Change Call Destination (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when changing call destination by delay time or schedule, or making an absent transfer, delay transfer or schedule transfer by the destination station.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Call Failure (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when failed to place a call.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Incoming Transfer Call (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning Absent Transfer, Delay Transfer or Schedule Transfer.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 284
System Settings (Table View) ■ Begin On Hold (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning a call on hold.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End On Hold (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending a call on hold.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Incoming Page (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning a incoming page, message page, or external input page.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Incoming Page (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending a incoming page, message page, or external input page.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Paging Failure (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when failed to send a page, message page, or external input page.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Monitoring (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning monitoring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Monitoring (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending monitoring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 285
System Settings (Table View) ■ Monitoring Failure (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when failed monitoring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Monitored (except IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the monitoring of this station begins.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Monitored (except IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the monitoring of this station ends.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Communication (Destination) (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when communication begins.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Privacy (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when privacy mode begins.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Privacy (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when privacy mode ends.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Keypad Input (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when entering number using a keypad.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 286
System Settings (Table View) ■ Speed Dial Input (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when pressing a speed dial button.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Record (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning recording.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Record (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when recording ends.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Recording Memory Full (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when a microSD card meets following criteria. If the error is detected continuously, SIF command will not be sent an additional time.
• When “Prevent Overwrite (→page 298)” is set to "Enable"
– Recorded recordings exceeds 950 – Storage capacity remaining 5%
• When “Prevent Overwrite (→page 298)” is set to "Disable"
– Recorded recordings exceeds 999 – Storage capacity remaining 0% • Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Passed Line Supervision (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the result of Line Supervision is "Passed".
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Failed Line Supervision (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the result of Line Supervision is "Failed".
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 287
System Settings (Table View) ■ Passed Device Check (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the result of Device Check is "Passed".
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Failed Device Check (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the result of Device Check is "Failed".
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ SD Card Error (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when a microSD access error is detected.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ SIP Registration Failure (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when REGISTER request for SIP server has a failure.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Network Camera Event (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when receiving event from the network camera.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 288
System Settings (Table View)
How to select event display
Select an event (SIF sending trigger) to display on the Settings screen. Only the selected SIF sending trigger will be displayed.
This will be used for No.01 - No.16.
Click Event View Selection. The following screen will be shown.
1 2
1.
Select the event(s) (SIF sending trigger) from "Event List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect all events at once, click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• By default, all events are displayed.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to exit the event display selection.
289
System Settings (Table View)
7.7.5
Periodical Transmission (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Select periodic transmission in
[Display Settings]
.
7.7.5.1 Periodical Transmission Interval
■ Range Description Settings Default values
• 1[sec]-59[sec] • 0[min]-1440[min] 0[min]-1440[min] ■ Interval♦ Description Settings Default values Set the interval to send Periodical Transmission from selected "Range." This will be used for No.1 - No.16.
The setting value as follows depends on "Range." • If set to 1[sec]-59[sec]: Configure from 1 - 59 sec (by 1 sec).
• If set to 0[min]-1440[min]: Set from 0 (do not send) - 1440 min (by 1 min).
0 min (do not send) 290
System Settings (Table View)
7.7.6
Upload SIF File
Upload the information in
“SIF Settings (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 475)” using
the file extension of "sif.ini," and upload the SIF parameter settings when
“Program Type (→page 281)” is set to
"0000," "0001," or "0011" using the file extension of "sif_conf.ini." If
[Upload SIF File]
is clicked, the following window will be shown.
1 2 3 4 Important • To upload a SIF setting file,
“Association Settings (→page 160)” must be preformed in the uploading station. And the
programming PC and the station must be connected to the same network.
How to upload SIF setting files
1.
Select the type of SIF file being uploaded.
2.
Click
[Browse]
and select the file to be uploaded.
3.
Select the station to upload the SIF setting file from "Station List." • To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations in which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
4.
Click
[Start Upload]
.
291
System Settings (Table View)
5.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to back to "Upload SIF File" window without uploading the file.
6.
Click
[OK]
.
• The results are displayed in "Status" in "Station List." Success: Upload is completed.
Failed: Upload failed.
292
System Settings (Table View)
7.7.7
Download SIF File
Download the content in
“SIF Settings (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 281)”
with "sif.ini" and download the uploaded "sif_conf.ini." If
[Download SIF File]
is clicked, the following window will be shown.
1 2 3 4 Important
• To download a SIF setting file, “Association Settings (→page 160)”
must be preformed in the downloading station. The programming PC and the station must be connected to the same network.
How to download SIF setting files
1.
Select the type of SIF file being downloaded.
2.
Click
[Browse]
and select the folder to download.
3.
Select the station to download the SIF setting file from "Station List." • To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations in which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
4.
Click
[Start Download]
.
293
System Settings (Table View)
5.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to back to "Download SIF File" window without downloading.
6.
Click
[OK]
.
• The results are displayed in "Status" in "Station List." Success: Download is completed.
Failed: Download failed.
294
System Settings (Table View)
7.8
Record (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*))
Configure settings related to video and audio recording. If there is no video, configure only audio recording. When recording audio during a call, audio will be recorded from both sides.
The following SD standards are required to record video and audio.
Standard
microSDHC microSDXC (for IX-MV7-*)
Storage Capacity
Max. 32 GB Max. 128 GB FAT32
Format
exFAT
Speed class
SD speed class 10 SD speed class 10 UHS speed class 1 Important • A microSD card is not included with this station.
• The device may not operate correctly depending on the microSD card.
• If the card contains data other than video/audio files, it may not have enough space to record video/audio.
• The network camera may not be able to record video, depending on the size of the video.
Note • A maximum of 999 video/audio files can be saved. However, this may vary depending on the size of the video/audio files and the capacity of the microSD card.
• Line Supervision and Device Check results are also saved to the microSD card.
• Aiphone assumes no responsibility for microSD cards. Please be aware of this in advance.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“Weekly Schedule (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) (→page 300)”
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
295
System Settings (Table View)
7.8.1
Record Mode (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*))
Description Settings Default values Select the Record Mode.
• No Recording • Event Recording: Automatically record when the trigger set in "Record Event" has occurred.
• 24/7 Recording: Continuous recording while the station is operating normally.
No Recording 296
System Settings (Table View)
7.8.2
Record Event
Configure the trigger in use to start recording video/audio automatically.
For stations other than IX-MV7-*, this is only the case when "Record Mode" is set to "Event Recording." ■ Incoming Call (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Video Recording starts when station receives an incoming call. If a call is automatically answered, recording will start when communication starts.
• Yes • No No ■ Communication (Master) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Recording starts when communication begins.
• Yes • No No ■ Monitor (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Recording starts when monitoring begins. Recording is not possible during Scan Monitor.
• Yes • No No ■ Outgoing Call (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): Video recording will start when a call is placed. Audio recording will start once the outgoing call is answered.
IX-SSA(-*): Audio recording will start once the outgoing call is answered.
• Yes • No No ■ Communication (Door) (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Recording starts when communication begins.
• Yes • No No ■ Monitored (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Recording starts when station is Monitored.
Recording is not possible during Scan Monitor.
• Yes • No No 297
System Settings (Table View) ■ Schedule (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Record during schedule set in
“Weekly Schedule (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) (→page 300)” .
• Yes • No No Important • Video/audio recording will continue for the time set in
“Weekly Schedule (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) (→page 300)” ,
regardless of what is configured for other triggers.
7.8.3
Recorded Device (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Set the Recorded Device when IX-MV7-* is displaying video from an IX Station and a Network Camera simultaneously.
• IX Station: Record IX station video • Network Camera: Record network camera video IX Station
7.8.4
Prevent Overwrite
Description Settings Default values Set prevent overwriting the old recorded file, when the number of saved video/audio files, the entire storage space of the microSD card, or the video/audio recording storage space of the microSD card is full.
• Enable • Disable Disable
7.8.5
Video Recording File Length
Description Settings Default values Select the recording file length to split recording. Once recording has reached this time, a new recording file will be created automatically.
• 5 min • 10 min • 20 min • 40 min • 60 min 10 min Note • If the Video Recording File Length is changed during recording video/audio, the setting will not be applied until the recording is completed.
298
System Settings (Table View)
7.8.6
Event Recording Timer (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Set the recording duration when the event trigger has occurred.
• Disable: Does not stop until the operating status ends or the record button is tapped.
• 5 sec • 10 sec • 30 sec Disable
7.8.7
Manual Recording (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for manual recording.
• Enable • Disable Enable
7.8.8
Audio Recording (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*))
Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for audio recording with video.
• Enable • Disable Enable 299
System Settings (Table View)
7.8.9
Weekly Schedule (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*))
Configure this when "Record Event" -
for each day.
“Schedule (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) (→page 298)” is set to "Yes."
Configure the video and audio recording time for each day from Sunday to Saturday. Up to 12 schedules can be set
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Weekly Schedule
Select the day and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen is displayed.
“How to configure schedule display (→page 301)”
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ End Time Description Settings Default values Set the Start Time to begin recording.
00:00 - 23:59 Set the End Time to stop recording. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59 300
System Settings (Table View)
How to configure schedule display
Configure the day and schedule range shown on the Settings screen for the weekly schedule.
The display can be filtered to show only the day and schedule to configure.
Click Schedule View Adjustment. The following screen will be shown.
1 2 3
1.
Select the day to display(s) from "Day" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect all days at once, click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• By default, all days are shown.
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (1 - 12) that can be configured for each day of the week.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is shown.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to set the schedule display.
301
System Settings (Table View)
7.9
Communication Audio Messages (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G)
Configure the communication audio message.
Communication Audio Messages: Send messages to destination station when beginning communication or by keypad input from the other station (IX-MV7-*).
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
7.9.1
Start Communication
■ Message Description Settings Default values Select the message to be sent to destination station when beginning communication.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
None 302
System Settings (Table View)
7.9.2
Code Received
Configure the message to be sent when the code is received. Four patterns can be set for the received code and message.
■ Code Description Settings Default values Set the code to play message by keypad input from IX-MV7-*.
1-20 digits Note • Enter " Door Release Authorization " using the keypad (if the Door Release Authorization is "0000" enter " ■ Message Description Settings Default values 0000 ").
Set the code to play message by keypad input from IX-MV7-*.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
None 303
System Settings (Table View)
7.10 Chime (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA)
Configure the chime tone to be played from this station linked with the set schedule.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Weekly Schedule
Select the day and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen will be shown.
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
7.10.1 Weekly Schedule
Configure the start time and the chime tone for every day from Sunday through Saturday.
50 schedules can be set for each day.
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values Set the Time to ring Chime.
00:00 - 23:59 304
System Settings (Table View) ■ Chime Description Settings Set the sound for chime.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
None Default values
How to configure schedule display
Configure the day and schedule range shown on the Settings screen for the weekly schedule.
The display can be filtered to show only the day and schedule to configure.
Click Schedule View Adjustment. The following screen will be shown.
1 2 3
1.
Select the day(s) to display from "Day" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect all days at once, click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• By default, all days are shown.
305
System Settings (Table View)
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (from 1 to 50) that can be configured for each day of the week.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is shown.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to set the schedule display.
7.10.2 Daily Schedule
Configure the start time and the chime tone in units of one day.
A schedule one year from the set day can be configured. 50 schedules can be set for each day.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Daily Schedule
Select the date and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen will be shown.
1.
Select the date from the drop down menu.
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (from 1 to 50) that can be configured for each day.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is shown.
3.
Click
[Change to Daily Schedule Display]
.
306
System Settings (Table View) ■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ Chime Description Settings Default values Set the Time to ring Chime.
00:00 - 23:59 Set the sound for chime.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
None 307
System Settings (Table View)
7.11 CSR
Generate the signature request (CSR) submitted when a request is made to the Server Certificate Authority (CA)
Generate the signature request according to each station’s settings. “CSR (→page 495)”
308
System Settings (Table View)
7.12 SSL Certificate
Upload the Server Certificate received from the Certificate Authority (CA) as well as the CA certificate.
Important
be able to communicate with the system.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“How to upload the SSL certificate to each station (→page 311)”
How to register SSL certificates
1.
Click
[Browse]
of the station to upload the server certificate and then select a file.
2.
If required, click
[Browse]
of the station to upload the CA certificate and then select a file.
3.
The reference destination of the file selected in "File" is displayed.
4.
Click
[Update]
.
• The name of the file registered in "Name" is displayed.
• Server certificate and CA certificate files are saved in "aiphone" - "AIPHONE_IX_SupportTool" - "SystemData" within the folder specified during installation for each station.
5.
Click
[OK]
.
6.
Click
[Upload SSL Certificate]
to upload certificates to each station. Refer to
“How to upload the SSL certificate to each station (→page 311)”
.
Important • The server certificate must be uploaded when uploading a CA certificate.
309
System Settings (Table View)
How to delete a registered SSL certificate
1.
Check the
[Delete]
box of the server certificate or CA certificate to delete.
2.
Click
[Update]
.
• The server certificate or CA certificate file will be deleted from the PC folder in which the file was saved in step 4 of "How to register SSL certificates."
3.
Click
[OK]
.
310
System Settings (Table View)
7.12.1 How to upload the SSL certificate to each station
Click
[Upload SSL Certificate]
. The following window will be shown.
1 2 Important • When uploading the SSL certificate, restart the station. Restart may take up to 10 minutes in total. The station will not operate until restart is complete.
How to upload an SSL certificate
1.
Select the station(s) to upload a certificate from "Station List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations in which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
2.
Click
[Upload]
.
311
System Settings (Table View)
3.
Click
[OK]
• Click .
• The server certificate or CA certificate file is uploaded to the station, and the station is restarted.
[Cancel]
to return to the "Certification Update/Delete" screen without uploading.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
• The results are displayed in "Status" in "Station List." In Process: Uploading the certificate.
Success: Upload is completed.
Failed: Upload failed.
312
System Settings (Table View)
7.13 IEEE 802.1X
(except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure the settings for IEEE802.1X Authentication.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
“How to upload/delete the IEEE802.1X Certificate to each station (→page 315)”
Important • Authentication may be impossible if there is a time difference between the authentication server and station.
• Upload the certificate prior to configuration.
• To Update/Delete an IEEE802.1X Certificate,
“Association Settings (→page 160)” must have been performed on the station to
upload/delete, and the PC must be able to communicate with the system.
• When changes to IEEE802.1X settings are updated on the station, or after uploading a certificate, restart the station. Restart may take up to 10 minutes in total. The station will not operate until restart is complete.
■ IEEE 802.1X
Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for IEEE802.1X function.
• Enable • Disable Disable ■ EAP Description Settings Default values Select the EAP method for IEEE802.1X authentication when
is set to "Enable".
• TLS • PEAP TLS 313
System Settings (Table View) ■ EAP User Name Description Settings Default values ■ EAP Password Description Settings Default values Set the EAP User Name.
1 - 32 alphanumeric characters Set the EAP Password when "EAP" is set to "PEAP".
1 - 32 alphanumeric characters Note • "EAP Password" is shown as "*****" in the Settings screen.
314
System Settings (Table View)
7.13.1 How to upload/delete the IEEE802.1X Certificate to each station
Click
[IEEE802.1X Certificate Update/Delete]
. The following window will be shown.
4 1 2 3 5
How to upload/delete IEEE802.1X certificates
To delete, start from Step 4.
1.
Click
[Browse]
next to the Certificate Authority File to select a file.
2.
If
“EAP (→page 313)” was set to "TLS," click
[Browse]
next to the Client Certificate File to select a file.
3.
If "EAP" was set to "TLS," click
[Browse]
next to the Client Private Key File to select a file.
4.
Select the station(s) to upload/delete the file from "Station List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations in which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
5.
Click
[Upload]
or
[Delete]
.
315
System Settings (Table View)
6.
Click
[OK]
• Click .
• The file will be uploaded/deleted and the station will restart.
[Cancel]
to back to the "Certification Update/Delete" screen without uploading/deleting.
7.
Click
[OK]
.
• The results are displayed in "Status" in "Station List." In Process: The file is being uploaded/deleted.
Success: Upload/delete is completed.
Failed: Upload/delete failed. Try uploading/deleting again.
316
System Settings (Table View)
7.14 Display Mode (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure IX-MV7-* Master UI Mode, for both Standard and Receptionist modes.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Jump to related item
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
7.14.1 Master UI Mode
Description Settings Default values Set the User Interface Mode.
• Standard: All functions can be used.
• Receptionist: Only outgoing call can be used. Refer to
“Receptionist Mode (→page 319)” for
detail settings.
Standard Important • When the "Master UI Mode" setting is applied to the station it will restart. This may take up to 10 minutes and the station cannot be used until it has finished restarting.
317
System Settings (Table View)
7.14.2 Standard Mode
■ Home Screen Description Settings
Select the layout of top image when “Master UI Mode (→page 317)” is set to "Standard."
• Option 1: • Option 2: Default values Option 1 318
System Settings (Table View)
7.14.3 Receptionist Mode
Configure Receptionist Mode screen if "Receptionist" was set in “Master UI Mode (→page 317)” .
Important • During receptionist mode, operations are limited to the following.
– The outgoing call method is limited to the method configured in “Button Function (→page 325)”
.
– Calls will be automatically answered even if
“Auto Answer (→page 237)” is set to "OFF." However, the call will not be
received if
“Reject Incoming Call (→page 326)” is set to "Enable."
– For "Option Input" -
“Function (→page 242)” , only "Call" and "Turn LCD On" are valid.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
319
System Settings (Table View)
7.14.3.1 Color Scheme
Description Settings Select the Color Scheme of Receptionist Mode.
Example where "Layout 1" was set in
• Light: • Dark: Default values Light 320
System Settings (Table View)
7.14.3.2 Screen Layout
Description Settings Select the Screen Layout of top image for Receptionist Mode.
Example where "Light" was set in
• Layout 1: • Layout 2: • Layout 3: Default values Layout 1 321
System Settings (Table View)
Customizing each screen layout
The layout of each screen's characters, images, and button displays can be customized.
The following spaces are customized by configuring “Company Information (→page 323)”
,
“Greeting Information (→page 323)” ,
, and
“Button Function (→page 325)” .
Layout 1
“Receptionist Image (→page 325)”
Recommended resolution (W×H): 800×340
“Company Information (→page 323)” “Greeting Information (→page 323)”
Recommended resolution (W×H): 800×100
Recommended resolution (W×H): 400×240
“Button 1 (→page 325)” “Button 2 (→page 325)” “Button 3 (→page 325)”
Layout 2
Recommended resolution (W×H): 460×80
“Receptionist Image (→page 325)”
Recommended resolution (W×H): 460×480
“Company Information (→page 323)” “Greeting Information (→page 323)”
Recommended resolution (W×H): 400×240
“Button 2 (→page 325)” “Button 3 (→page 325)”
Layout 3
“Receptionist Image (→page 325)”
Recommended resolution (W×H): 800×120
“Greeting Information (→page 323)”
Recommended resolution (W×H): 400×120
“Company Information (→page 323)”
“Button 1 (→page 325)” “Button 2 (→page 325)” “Button 3 (→page 325)”
322
System Settings (Table View)
7.14.3.3 Company Information
■ Name Description Settings Default values Enter the Company Information.
0-40 alphanumeric characters ■ Text Size♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Bold Description Settings Set the text size of Company Information.
12 - 24 pt (by 1pt) 12pt Select ON / OFF for Bold text.
• OFF • ON OFF Default values ■ Text Color Description Settings Default values Set the text color of Company Information.
• Option 1 "Black" if "Light" was set in
“Color Scheme (→page 320)” . "White" if "Dark" was set.
• Option 2
"Blue" if “Color Scheme (→page 320)”
was set to "Light." "Orange" if "Dark" was set.
Option 1
7.14.3.4 Greeting Information
■ Greeting Description Settings Default values Enter Greeting text.
0-100 alphanumeric characters (Up to 10 line breaks can be inserted. Insert a line break by pressing "Alt" + "Enter.") ■ Text Size♦ Description Settings Default values Set the text size of Greeting.
12 - 70 pt (by 1 pt) 12pt ■ Bold Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for Bold text.
• OFF • ON OFF 323
System Settings (Table View) ■ Text Color Description Settings Default values Configure the character color displayed in Greeting Information.
• Option 1 "Black" if "Light" was set in
“Color Scheme (→page 320)” . "White" if "Dark" was set.
• Option 2
"Blue" if “Color Scheme (→page 320)”
was set to "Light." "Orange" if "Dark" was set.
Option 1
7.14.3.5 Images
Upload the image file to display on the reception screen. Upload an image file that suits the layout configured in
“Screen Layout (→page 321)” . Refer to
“Customizing each screen layout (→page 322)”
for recommended image file resolutions for each screen layout.
■ Company Image Description Settings Default values Update Company Image.
Supported file format • File name: within 20 characters (excluding extension) • File format: png • Resolution Width: 400 - 800 pixels Height: 80 - 480 pixels Register: Click
[Browse]
to select a file.
Delete: Place a check in
[Delete]
.
■ Greeting Image Description Settings Default values Update Greeting Image.
Supported file format • File name: within 20 characters (excluding extension) • File format: png • Resolution Width: 400 - 800 pixels Height: 80 - 480 pixels Register: Click
[Browse]
to select a file.
Delete: Place a check in
[Delete]
.
324
System Settings (Table View) ■ Receptionist Image Description Settings Default values Update Receptionist Image.
Supported file format • File name: within 20 characters (excluding extension) • File format: png • Resolution Width: 400 - 800 pixels Height: 80 - 480 pixels Register: Click
[Browse]
to select a file.
Delete: Place a check in
[Delete]
.
Note • Image file names can be deleted from the Settings screen by selecting
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)”
- "Image" to upload the setting file, and then deleting the image file from the statoin.
7.14.3.6 Button Function
■ Button 1 Description Settings Default values Set the function of Button 1.
• Group Call: Call group number set by
“Group Call Destination (→page 326)” .
• Select By Name: Select destination station by name.
• Select By List: Select destination station by list.
• Enter Number: Enter destination station number by keypad.
• Hide: Button is not displayed.
Hide ■ Button 2 Description Settings Set the function of Button 2.
• Group Call: Call group number set by
“Group Call Destination (→page 326)” .
• Select By Name: Select destination station by name.
• Select By List: Select destination station by list.
• Enter Number: Enter destination station number by keypad.
• Hide: Button is not displayed.
Hide Default values ■ Button 3 Description Settings Default values Set the function of Button 3.
• Group Call: Call group number set by
“Group Call Destination (→page 326)” .
• Select By Name: Select destination station by name.
• Select By List: Select destination station by list.
• Enter Number: Enter destination station number by keypad.
• Hide: Button is not displayed.
Hide 325
System Settings (Table View) ■ Button 4 Description Settings Default values Set the function of Button 4.
• Group Call: Call group number set by
“Group Call Destination (→page 326)” .
• Select By Name: Select destination station by name.
• Select By List: Select destination station by list.
• Enter Number: Enter destination station number by keypad.
• Hide: Button is not displayed.
Hide ■ Button Name for Group Call Description Settings Default values Set the Button Name when Button 1 - 4 is assigned to "Group Call". If "Group Call" is set to multiple buttons, they will all share the same name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Button Name for Select By Name Description Settings Default values Set the Button Name when Button 1 - 4 is assigned to "Select By Name". If "Select By Name" is set to multiple buttons, they will all share the same name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Button Name for Select By List Description Settings Default values Set the Button Name when Button 1 - 4 is assigned to "Select By List". If "Select By List" is set to multiple buttons, they will all share the same name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Button Name for Enter Number Description Settings Default values Set the Button Name when Button 1 - 4 is assigned to "Enter Number". If "Enter Number" is set to multiple buttons, they will all share the same name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters
7.14.3.7 Group Call Destination
Description Settings Default values Set the destination group when Button 1 - 4 is assigned to "Group Call". If "Group Call" is set for multiple buttons, they will all share the same call destination group.
Enter the group number directly, or click
[Open]
to select group.
01 - 99
7.14.3.8 Reject Incoming Call
Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for incoming calls in Receptionist Mode.
• Enable: Do not receive incoming calls.
• Disable: Receive incoming calls.
Disable 326
7.15 Bathroom Link
This function cannot be used outside Japan.
System Settings (Table View) 327
System Settings (Table View)
8. Transfer Settings
8.1
Absent Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the settings for absent transfer.
Absent Transfer: If an incoming call is received during absent transfer, the incoming call will be automatically transferred to a transfer destination.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Important • When an incoming call is received from a VoIP Phone, the call will be received without transferring even when transfer is set. To transfer the call, configure transferring on the IP-PBX.
• Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 180)” has not been configured cannot be configured as transfer destinations.
■ Absent Transfer Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Absent Transfer. The setting can also be changed on the station.
If "Transfer Destination List" is not configured, this cannot be set to "Enable." • Enable: Set absent transfer • Disable: Do not set absent transfer Disable ■ Transfer Destination List Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) for absent transfer. Up to 10 transfer destination stations (IX-MV: one station only) can be configured. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), the transfer will be made only to the station entered in "No.01." Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
For IX-MV, a VoIP phone cannot be set as the transfer destination.
IX-MV7-*: 3-32 digits IX-MV: 3-5 digits 328
System Settings (Table View) Important • Do not configure multiple VoIP Phone. If multiple VoIP Phone are configured, calls will be transferred to only one VoIP Phone.
■ Re-Transfer Destination (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (number) for absent re-transfer for a transferred call. Only a single station can be configured as the transfer destination. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*) the call will be received without transferring it again.
Enter the station number or click
[Open]
to choose one.
3-32 digits 329
System Settings (Table View)
8.2
Delay Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the settings for delay transfer.
Delay Transfer: A call can be automatically transferred to another station after a certain period of time (delay time) elapses.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Important • When an incoming call is received from a VoIP Phone, the call will be received without transferring even when transfer is set. To transfer the call, configure transferring on the IP-PBX.
• Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 180)” has not been configured cannot be configured as transfer destinations.
■ Delay Transfer Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Delay Transfer.
To enable Delay Transfer, set transfer or re-transfer destination.
• Enable: Delay transfer enabled • Disable: Delay transfer disabled Disable ■ Delay Time [sec]♦ Description Settings Default values Set the delay time between receiving and transferring a call.
1-300 sec (by 1 sec) 30 sec ■ Transfer Destination List Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) for delay transfer. Up to 10 transfer destination stations (IX-MV: one station only) can be configured. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*), the transfer will be made only to the station entered in "No.01." Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
For IX-MV, a VoIP phone cannot be set as the transfer destination.
IX-MV7-*: 3-32 digits IX-MV: 3-5 digits 330
System Settings (Table View) Important • Do not configure multiple VoIP Phone. If multiple VoIP Phone are configured, calls will be transferred to only one VoIP Phone.
■ Re-Transfer Destination (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (number) for delay re-transfer for a transferred call. Only a single station can be configured as the transfer destination. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*), the call will be received without transferring it again.
Enter the station number or click
[Open]
to choose one.
3-32 digits 331
System Settings (Table View)
8.3
Schedule Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the settings for Schedule Transfer.
Schedule Transfer: A call can be automatically transferred to another station when a call comes in during the time period set up in
“Weekly Schedule (→page 333)” and
“Daily Schedule (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 335)” .
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Weekly Schedule Select the day and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen is displayed.
“Daily Schedule (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 335)”
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
Important • When an incoming call is received from a VoIP Phone, the call will be received without transferring even when transfer is set. To transfer the call, configure transferring on the IP-PBX.
• Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 180)” has not been configured cannot be configured as transfer destinations.
• Incoming calls will be transferred during the time period set in "Schedule Transfer," regardless of what was set in
“Absent Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 328)” and
“Delay Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 330)”
.
■ Schedule Transfer Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Schedule Transfer.
To enable Schedule Transfer, configure “Weekly Schedule (→page 333)”
or “Daily Schedule (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 335)” .
• Enable: Schedule transfer enabled • Disable: Schedule transfer disabled Disable 332
System Settings (Table View)
8.3.1
Weekly Schedule
Configure the transfer destination and transfer time for every day from Sunday through Saturday.
For IX-MV7-*, up to 12 schedules can be set for each day, and for the IX-MV, one schedule can be set for each day.
■ Transfer Destination List Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) for scheduled transfer.
• IX-MV7-*: Up to 10 transfer destination stations can be configured for each of the 12 schedules , and for each day of the week. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*), the transfer will only be made to the station entered in "No.01." • IX-MV: Only a single transfer destination station can be set for each day of the week. Enter this in "No.01" for "Sun 01." A VoIP phone cannot be set as the transfer destination.
Enter Number manually, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
IX-MV7-*: 3-32 digits IX-MV: 3-5 digits Important • Do not configure multiple VoIP Phone. If multiple VoIP Phone are configured, calls will be transferred to only one VoIP Phone.
■ Re-Transfer Destination (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) when performing a scheduled transfer again for a transferred call. Only a single station can be configured as the transfer destination for each of the 12 schedules on each day of the week. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*), the call will be received without transferring it again.
Enter the station number or click
[Open]
to choose one.
3-32 digits ■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ End Time Description Set the Start Time to enable schedule transfer.
For IX-MV, configure this as the first schedule of each day of the week. For example, configure Sunday in "Sun 01." 00:00 - 23:59 Settings Default values Set the End Time to disable schedule transfer. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
For IX-MV, configure this as the first schedule of each day of the week. For example, configure Sunday in "Sun 01." 00:00 - 23:59 333
System Settings (Table View)
How to configure schedule display
Configure the day and schedule range shown on the Settings screen for the weekly schedule.
The display can be filtered to show only the day and schedule to configure.
Click Schedule View Adjustment. The following screen will be shown.
1 2 3
1.
Select the day(s) to display from "Day" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect all days at once, click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• By default, all days are shown.
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (1 - 12) that can be configured for each day of the week.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is shown.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the schedule display.
334
System Settings (Table View)
8.3.2
Daily Schedule (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure the transfer destination and time for each individual day.
A schedule one year from the set day can be configured. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Daily Schedule
Select the date and schedule range to configure. The Settings screen is displayed.
1.
Select the date from the drop down menu.
2.
Select the range of schedules to display (1 - 12) that can be configured for each day.
• By default, the range of 1 - 3 is displayed.
3.
Click
[Change to Daily Schedule Display]
.
■ Transfer Destination List Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) for scheduled transfer. Up to 10 transfer destination stations can be configured for each of the 12 schedules for each day of the week. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*), the transfer will be made only to the station entered in "No.01." Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
3-32 digits Important • Do not configure multiple VoIP Phone. If multiple VoIP Phone are configured, calls will be transferred to only one VoIP Phone.
335
System Settings (Table View) ■ Re-Transfer Destination Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) when performing scheduled re-transfer for a transferred call. Only a single station can be configured as the transfer destination for each of the 12 schedules on each day. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX DF(-*), IX-BA, or IX-SS(-*), the call will be received without transferring it again.
Enter the station number or click
[Open]
to choose one.
3-32 digits ■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ End Time Description Set the Start Time to enable schedule transfer.
00:00 - 23:59 Settings Default values Set the End Time to disable schedule transfer. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59 336
System Settings (Table View)
8.4
Lock Transfer (for IX-MV7-*) Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[ON]
: Enter the station number and click [Display] to move the cursor to the row of the entered station number.
Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF to Lock Transfer function. When set to "ON", transfer function cannot be changed by user account.
• ON: Cannot be configured with user privileges.
• OFF: Can be configured with user privileges.
OFF 337
System Settings (Table View)
9. Station Settings
9.1
Speed Dials / Favorites (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the settings for Speed Dial buttons of IX-MV7-* and IX-MV.
Select the Speed Dial button number to configure in
[Display Settings]
.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Display Settings
Settings for the selected Speed Dial button number are displayed.
9.1.1
Advanced Speed Dial Button Settings
Select the functions to assign to each Speed Dial button.
Up to eight Speed Dial buttons can be set for IX-MV7-*, and six for IX-MV.
9.1.1.1 Speed Dial Name (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Set the Speed Dial Name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters The entire name may not be shown on the station screen, depending on the number of characters.
338
System Settings (Table View) Important
main unit) displayed on the screen for IX-MV7-* differs from that set in "Language," the characters on the station screen may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, enter information in the setting data using alphabetical characters only.
9.1.1.2 Function
Description Settings Default values Set the Speed Dial Function. The functions that can be selected differ between stations. Refer to
“How to configure Individual Call (→page 339)”
for how to configure detailed functions.
• No Function • Individual Call: Call individual station set in "Individual Call".
• Group Call: Call group set in "Group Call".
• Group Page: Page group set in "Group Page".
• All Page: Page all stations.
• Group Message Page (For IX-MV7-*): Page message to group set in "Group Message Page".
• All Message Page (For IX-MV7-*): Page message to all stations..
• Monitor (For IX-MV7-*): Monitor station set in "Monitor".
• Network Camera Monitor (For IX-MV7-*): Monitor network camera set in "Network Camera Monitor".
• Scan Monitor (For IX-MV7-*): Start scan monitor sequence set in "Station Settings - Monitor".
• Option Relay Control (For IX-MV7-*): Relay Control set in "Option Relay Control". Relay output will not be controlled for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*).
No Function
How to configure Individual Call
Configure this if "Individual Call" is set in
■ Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination station (Station Number).
Enter the Station Number or click
[Open]
to choose one. This cannot be configured for IXW-MA.
3-32 digits Important • Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 180)” has not been configured cannot be configured as destinations.
■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the Priority for the individual calls.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent
How to configure Group Call
Configure if "Group Call" is set in
.
■ Group Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination group (group number).
Enter the group number or click
[Open]
to choose one.
01 - 99 339
System Settings (Table View) ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of Individual call.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent
How to configure Group Page
Configure if "Group Page" is set in “Function (→page 339)”
.
■ Group Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination group (Group Number).
Enter the Group Number or click
[Open]
to choose one.
01 - 99 ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of group page.
• Normal • Urgent
How to configure All Page
Configure if "All Page" is set in “Function (→page 339)” .
■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of all page.
• Normal • Urgent
How to configure Group Message Page (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "Group Message Page" is set in “Function (→page 339)” .
■ Group Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination group (Group Number).
Enter the Group Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose one.
01 - 99 340
System Settings (Table View) ■ Message Description Settings Select the message (audio file) to be send during group message paging.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
None Default values ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of group message page.
• Normal • Urgent ■ Play Count [time(s)] Description Settings Default values Set the message play count of group message page.
1 - 20 times 341
System Settings (Table View)
How to configure All Message Page (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "All Message Page" is set in
■ Message Description Settings Default values Select the message (audio file) to send during all message paging.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
None ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of all message page.
• Normal • Urgent ■ Play Count [time(s)] Description Settings Default values Set the message play count of all message page.
1 - 20 times
How to configure Monitor (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "Monitor" is set in “Function (→page 339)” .
■ Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination station (Station Number).
Enter the Station Number or click
[Open]
to choose one. This cannot be configured for IX-MV7 *, IX-MV, IXW-MA, or VoIP phones.
3-32 digits Important • Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 180)” has not been configured cannot be configured to be monitored.
342
System Settings (Table View)
How to configure Network Camera Monitor (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "Network Camera Monitor" is set in
.
■ Network Camera Description Settings Default values Set the destination Network Camera (#).
Enter the number of the network camera set in
“Open Network Camera List (→page 212)”
or click
[Network camera selection]
to choose one.
001 - 050
How to configure Option Relay Control (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "Option Relay Control" is set in
Note • When controlling relay output for multiple stations, processing may take some time and control may be delayed.
■ Total Description Settings Default values Configure the station to control relay output. This cannot be configured for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF( *), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*).
Click
[Open]
to choose a station. Multiple stations (infinite) can be selected.
The number of selected stations is displayed.
0 Important • Stations that the "IP Address" has not been configured cannot be configured as stations to perform control.
■ Output Time Range Description Settings Default values Select the Output Time Range for relay output.
• 0 (Momentary): Start Relay Output by pressing a Speed Dial button.
Stop Relay Output by pressing again the Speed Dial button.
• 200-2000 [msec] • 3 - 600 [sec] 0 (Momentary) 343
System Settings (Table View) ■ Output Time♦ Description Settings Set the Output Time within the range selected in "Output Time Range." The setting value is as follows depends on "Output Time Range." • If set to 0 (Momentary): Configuration unnecessary.
• If set to 200-2000 [msec]: Configure from 200 - 2000 msec (by 200 msec).
• If set to 3 - 600 [sec]: Configure from 3 - 600 sec (by 1 sec).
0 Default values ■ TLS Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for TLS. When "Enable" is selected, set "Option Relay Control Key" and
.
• Enable • Disable Disable Important • If "TLS" is set to "Enable," this may take some time if there are multiple stations to control.
■ Option Relay Control Key Description Settings Default values Set the Option Relay Control Key when"TLS" is set to "Enable." When matched with the Option
activate.
1-20 digits
9.1.1.3 Lock (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF to Lock Speed Dial setting. Once set to "ON", Speed Dial function cannot be changed by user account.
• ON • OFF OFF 344
System Settings (Table View)
9.2
Privacy (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
is set to "ON."
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ Privacy Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Privacy function. The setting can also be changed on the station.
• Enable • Disable Disable 345
System Settings (Table View)
9.3
Volume / Tone (except IXW-MA)
Configure the sound settings, such as volume and ringtone.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
9.3.1
Volume
■ Handset Transmit (for IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the transmit volume using handset while communicating and paging.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 ■ Handset Receive (for IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the receive volume using handset while communicating. Also sets ringback tone volume.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ Hands-free Transmit (for IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the hands-free transmit volume while communicating and paging.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 346
System Settings (Table View) ■ Hands-free Receive (for IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the hands-free receive volume while communicating and paging. Also sets ringback tone volume.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) • IX-MV7-*, IX-MV: 6 • IX-RS-*: 10 ■ Headset Jack Transmit (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set the transmit volume using headset jack.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 ■ Headset Jack Receive (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set the receive volume using headset jack.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ Transmit (except IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the transmit volume while communicating and being monitored.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 ■ Receive (except IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the receive volume while communicating and paging (except IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)). Also sets ringback tone. The receive volume for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*) during page is configured in
“Paging (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) (→page 348)” .
1 (Low) - 10 (High) IX-SS-2G, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): 10 IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): 6 ■ External Input Description Not used.
■ External Output (for IX-RS-*) Description Settings Default values Set the transmit volume using external output.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ VoIP Phone Volume Adjustment (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the volume adjustment between VoIP Phone and IX stations.
• -12dB from VoIP, +12dB to VoIP • -6dB from VoIP, +6dB to VoIP • No Adjustment • +6dB from VoIP, -6dB to VoIP • +12dB from VoIP, -12dB to VoIP No Adjustment 347
System Settings (Table View) ■ Ringtone Description Settings Default values Select the volume for Ringtone and Paging Pretone.
0 (Off), 1 (Low) - 10 (High) • IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): 6 • IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): 10 ■ Paging (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the volume while receiving page.
0 (Off), 1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ Button Feedback (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Button Feedback tone.
• Enable • Disable • IX-MV7-*: Enable • IX-MV: Disable 348
System Settings (Table View)
9.3.2
Tone
■ Communication Timeout Notification (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the tone to be played when an outgoing call times out.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Error 349
System Settings (Table View) ■ Communication End Pretone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the tone to be played 10 sec before communication, paging or monitoring ends.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Communication End Pretone ■ Call Queue Notification (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Select the tone to be played when receiving a call while communicating.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Call Queue Notification 350
System Settings (Table View) ■ Paging Pretone (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Select the sound to be played when placing or receiving a page.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Pre Tone 2 Important • Configure the paging pretone with a longer duration than the paging pretone of the station receiving the page. Configuring a shorter tone might prevent audio from playing on the other station when paging starts. Configure the same tone as that of other IX-MV7-* andIX-MV stations in the system.
■ Auto Answer Tone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the tone to be played.
• Ringtone when receiving an individual call. “Auto Answer (→page 237)”
must be set to "ON".
• Ringback tone when placing an individual call. “Auto Answer (→page 237)”
must be set to "ON" at the destination station. (for IX-MV7-*) • None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Pre Tone 1 351
System Settings (Table View) ■ On Hold (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Select the tone to be played while On-Hold.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values On Hold ■ Key Received (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Configure the tone to send to the destination station when the door release key entered using a keypad on the destination station (station performing a door release operation) matches the authentication key of this station (station connected to the electrical lock). The tone will be heard on the destination station.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values None 352
System Settings (Table View) ■ Error (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the tone to be played when error has occurred.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values Error
9.3.3
Mic Select
Description Not used.
9.3.4
Headset Specification (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Set the device to be connected to the headset jack.
• Mic Device • Headset Device Mic Device
9.3.5
Audio Output (for Master) (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Set using External speaker for Ringtone, Paging Pretone and Paging.
• External speaker output for Ringtone, Built-in Speaker for Communication • External speaker output for Paging Pretone, Built-in Speaker for Paging • External speaker output for Ringtone, Paging Pretone and Paging, Built-in Speaker for Communication External speaker output for Ringtone, Built-in Speaker for Communication Note • The tone will play from the speaker of the station even if audio is heard from the external speaker.
353
System Settings (Table View)
9.3.6
Audio Output (for Door) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-SS-2G, and IX-MV)
Description Settings Default values Set using Line Audio / External Speaker or Built-in Speaker while communicating and paging.
• Built-in Speaker for Communication and Paging • Line Audio Output for Communication and Paging (External speaker output for Communication and Paging for IX-RS-*) • Built-in Speaker for Communication, Line Audio Output for Paging (External speaker output for Communication and Paging for IX-RS-*) Built-in Speaker for Communication and Paging 354
System Settings (Table View)
9.4
Communication (except IXW-MA)
Configure the settings for a call.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ Talk Timeout [sec]♦ Description Settings Default values Set the communication timer when placing a call or answering a page. Communication timer when receiving a call is set at the destination station.
• Infinite (Except IX-MV): No timeout.
• 30-600 sec: Configure between 30 to 600 sec (by 1 sec).
60 sec Important • During a communication with a VoIP Phone, this will be the shorter time of the time set for "Talk Timeout [sec]" and the call duration set on the VoIP Phone.
355
System Settings (Table View) ■ Communication Start Tone (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the tone to be played when communication starts.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
Default values None ■ Force Touch-to-Talk (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Force Touch-to-Talk (Or Press-to-Talk) when starting communication in hands-free mode.
• Enable • Disable Disable 356
System Settings (Table View)
9.5
Monitor (except IXW-MA, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure monitoring-related settings.
Important • Monitoring cannot be performed for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, or VoIP Phone.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Scan Monitor
Up to 50 monitoring number lines can be shown at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 columns.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 columns.
[Display]
: Enter the monitoring number and click
[Go]
to display the column for the monitoring number.
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
Monitoring number
9.5.1
Monitor Timeout [sec] (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♦
Description Settings Default values Set the monitoring timer by station. Scan Monitor must be end manually.
• Infinite (For IX-MV7-*): No timeout.
• 10-600sec: Set 10-600 sec by 1 sec.
60 sec 357
System Settings (Table View)
9.5.2
Scan Monitor (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure monitoring by automatically switching between several stations (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) and network cameras at set intervals. The scan will be performed in registration order.
■ Type Description Settings Default values Select the Station Type.
• IX Station • Network Camera ■ Number Description Settings Default values Set the Station Number.
Enter the Number or click
[Open]
to choose one. This cannot be selected for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IXW-MA or VoIP Phone.
3-5 digits Important • Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 180)” has not been configured cannot be configured to be monitored.
■ Camera Settings Description Settings Default values Set the Network Camera Number.
Enter the number of the network camera set in
“Open Network Camera List (→page 212)”
or click
[Network camera selection]
to choose one.
Select from the network cameras registered in
“Open Network Camera List (→page 212)” .
■ Dwell Time Description Settings Default values Set the dwell time to change destination for scan monitor.
• 5 sec • 10 sec • 30 sec 5 sec
9.5.3
Prevent Being Monitored (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF to prevent being monitored.
• ON • OFF OFF 358
System Settings (Table View)
9.5.4
Monitored Notification (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Description Settings Default values Select the tone to be played when monitored by another station.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 221)” .
None 359
System Settings (Table View)
9.5.5
Monitored LED Notification (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for status LED notification (Blue flashing) while being monitored by another station.
• ON • OFF OFF 360
System Settings (Table View)
9.6
Master Station Display (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure screen display-related settings.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ Brightness Description Settings Default values Set the Brightness of Master station display.
1 (Dark) - 10 (Bright) 6 ■ Primary Video Source (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select the primary video source when showing 2 video stream simultaneously.
• IX Station • Network Camera IX Station ■ Aspect Ratio (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select the video aspect for primary video source.
• 16:9 • 4:3 16:9 ■ Time Format: (for IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Select the Time format.
• mm/dd/yyyy (12h) • mm/dd/yyyy (24h) • dd/mm/yyyy (12h) • dd/mm/yyyy (24h) • yyyy/mm/dd (12h) • yyyy/mm/dd (24h) mm/dd/yyyy (12h) 361
System Settings (Table View) ■ Standby LED State Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for stand by status LED.
• ON • OFF ON ■ Keypad (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for whether to display the keypad used for door release and playing location messages.
• ON • OFF ON 362
System Settings (Table View)
9.7
Camera (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
Configure camera settings.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
9.7.1
Adjustment
■ Backlight Compensation Description Settings Default values During an outgoing call or monitoring, video with backlight compensation adjustment will be sent to the destination station.
The adjustment can be removed through operation by the destination station.
• Enable • Disable Disable ■ Low Light Sensitivity Description Settings Default values Send an image that low light sensitivity compensation was performed to the other station, when an outgoing call is made or the station is being monitored and the surrounding area is dark (such as at night). The compensation can be removed on the other station.
• Enable • Disable Disable 363
System Settings (Table View)
9.7.2
Color Settings (for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
Important • If these settings are changed while video is displayed, the changes will not be reflected until the video is accessed again.
■ Brightness♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Brightness for camera setting.
1 (Dark) to 100 (Bright) 50 ■ Contrast♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Color♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Contrast for camera setting.
1 (Weak) - 100 (Strong) 15 Set the Contrast for camera setting.
1 (Weak) to 100 (Strong) 50
9.7.3
White LED
■ Call / Communication Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for white LED while calling or communicating in low light situation.
• Enable • Disable Enable ■ Monitored Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for white LED while being monitored in low light situation.
• Enable • Disable Disable 364
System Settings (Table View)
9.8
Door Release Assignment (for IX-RS-*)
Configure the connected station and door release key for door release during a call.
Configure each station for each group configured in
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 225)”
.
Select the group number to configure in
[Display Settings]
.
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
Display Settings
Displays the selected group number setting information.
Move to Related Settings
Moves to the selected item within the same Settings screen.
■ Contact Assignment Description Settings Default values Select which relay output will be used for door release during call.
• Originating Station: Use origination station relay output for door release.
• Destination Station: Use destination station relay output for door release.
Destination Station ■ Authentication Key Description Settings Default values When "Destination Station" is selected in "Contact Assignment," set the Authentication Key for door release.
Authentication key must match with the destination station's authentication key, which is set in
"Relay Output" - “Door Release Authorization (except IXW-MA) (→page 248)”
to allow door release.
1-20 digits Random characters (compatible with default value of "Relay Output" - "Door Release Authorization") 365
System Settings (Table View) Note
"No," the default value for "Authentication Key" will not be set.
• The default values for the Door Release Authorization and Authentication Key vary depending on the station type set in
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)” - "IX Support Tool Settings."
– IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) not configured: 20 digits – IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) configured: 4 digits ■ Door Release by IX-RS Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for door release.
• Enable • Disable Disable 366
System Settings (Table View)
9.9
Line Supervision (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure settings related to Line Supervision and Device Check performed by IX-MV7-*.
Monitor a station other than a VoIP Phone registered in “Station List (→page 209)” .
Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
9.9.1
Line Supervision Interval
■ Test Interval Description Settings Default values Set the Line Supervision test interval.
• OFF • 15 sec • 20 min • 30 min • 60 min • Daily • Weekly OFF ■ Weekly Description Settings Default values Set the day of the week when "Weekly" is selected in "Test Interval." Sun - Sat Sun ■ Line Supervision Schedule Description Settings Default values Set the time when automatic Line Supervision starts.
Set the time when "Daily" or "Weekly" is selected in "Test Interval." 00:00 - 23:59 00:00 367
System Settings (Table View)
9.9.2
Device Check Interval
■ Test Interval Description Settings Default values Set the Line Supervision test interval.
• OFF • 10 min • 20 min • 30 min • 60 min • Daily • Weekly OFF ■ Weekly Description Settings Default values Set the day of the week when "Weekly" is selected in "Test Interval." Sun - Sat Sun ■ Device Check Schedule Description Settings Default values Set the time when Device Check starts.
Set the time when "Daily" or "Weekly" is selected in "Test Interval." 00:00 - 23:59 00:00 368
10. Maintenance
System Settings (Table View)
10.1 Firmware Update
Access our website at " https://www.aiphone.net/ " to download the latest version of the firmware.
Important
• To update the firmware, “Association Settings (→page 160)”
must have been performed on the station to update, and the PC must be able to communicate with the system.
• If the firmware update is started while the station is operating (such as on a call), the operation will end and the firmware update will begin.
• If power is turned off while updating the firmware, the station may malfunction.
• The station will be inoperable while updating the firmware.
• When the firmware is updated, the station will be automatically restarted.
1 2 369 3
System Settings (Table View)
How to update the firmware
1.
Click
[Browse]
and select the firmware file to be downloaded for each station.
2.
Select the station to update the firmware from "Station List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type for a batch selection and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations for which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
3.
Click
[Update]
.
• The firmware update may take approximately ten minutes per station.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to back to the "Update Firmware" screen without updating the firmware.
5.
Click
[OK]
.
• The result is displayed in "Station List" > "Status." In Process: The firmware is being updated.
Success: Update successful.
Failed: Update failed. Try updating again.
10.2 Initialization
When initializing the station, all settings go back to the default values, and the system log and incoming/outgoing call history are erased.
Stations are also deleted from the settings in IX Support Tool.
To initialize a station, start from
“Initialization (→page 547)” in the Settings (Station View).
370
System Settings (Table View)
10.3 Settings File Backup
Download the setting file from the station and back it up.
Important • Setting files are downloaded via
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
on the downloading station. Files cannot be downloaded unless the PC can communicate with the system.
• When first configuring settings using a web browser, or when changing the configuration using a web browser after configuring settings using IX Support Tool, it may not be possible to download the setting files. In this case, download the setting files using a browser.
1 2
How to download setting files
1.
Select the station to download the setting file from "Station List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type for a batch selection and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations for which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
2.
Download the file.
[Settings]
: Download only the setting file.
[Sounds]
: Download the setting file and audio file for a custom tone.
[Image]
(for IX-MV7-*): Download the setting file and image file for the image on the reception screen.
[Schedule]
(except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA): Download schedule setting files (for transfer, etc.). Schedules for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are downloaded from
[Settings]
.
371
System Settings (Table View)
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Setting File Download" window without downloading.
4.
Click
[OK]
Step 2.
.
• The file download result is displayed in "Station List" - "Status." In Process: The file is in the process of downloading.
Success: Download is completed.
Failed: Download failed.
Unavailable: This is displayed when a file that cannot be uploaded to a station is selected to download in • Downloaded files are saved as follows in "aiphone" - "AIPHONE_IX_SupportTool" - "SystemData" within the folder specified during installation.
– Setting file: "NewIXSystem(set system name).db" – Sound file: Saved as a WAV file inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" – Image file: Saved as a PNG file inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" – Schedule file: Saved inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" as "SCHED_CHIME.txt," "SCHED_GROUP.txt," "SCHED_OUTPUT.txt," "SCHED_TRANSFER.txt," or "SCHED_REC.txt" (the saved content differs depending on the station).
372
System Settings (Table View)
10.4 syslog (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Move row
Up to 50 station number rows can be displayed at a time. Switch the display as follows.
[Previous]
: Display the previous 50 rows.
[Next]
: Display the next 50 rows.
[Display]
: Enter the station number and click
[Display]
to move the cursor to the entered row.
■ IPv4 Address Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Address Description Settings Default values ■ Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for syslog server.
1.0.0.1-223.255.255.254 or hostname(1-64 alphanumeric characters) Set the IPv6 address for syslog server.
::FF:0-FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname(1-64 alphanumeric characters) Set the port number of syslog server.
1-65535 514 373
System Settings (Station View)
Important • Depending on the language settings of the station (IX-MV7-*or IX-MV), the content of the settings may differ from this manual.
• The symbols indicate the following: ♦: Indicates a required field. A value should be entered. Retain the default settings, unless a change is necessary.
♠:The content of the settings item can be copied to other stations. For how to copy, refer to
“Copy settings (Settings (Station View)) (→page 83)” .
System Settings (Station View)
1. Station Information
1.1
Identification
Configure the station number, station name, and location of the station to register in the system. Up to 500 stations can be registered.
Important • Always configure
before setting "Identification." • Enter the language configured in
, the characters on the station screen may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, enter information in the setting data using alphabetical characters only.
• Results when searching by station will be listed in order of station number.
■ Number♦ Description Settings Default values Set an unique number for each station. The station number will be displayed on the screen of the destination during call, page, etc.
This is also used to search stations by station number for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV.
3-5 digits Start from 0001.
■ Name Description Settings Default values Remarks Set the station name.
The station name will be displayed on the screen of the destination during call, page, etc. This is also used to search stations by station name for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV. 1-24 alphanumeric characters IX-MV7-*, IX-MV: Master Station (Number); IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): Video Station (Number); IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): Audio Station (Number); IX-RS-*: Handset Sub Station (Number);IXW-MA: I/O Adaptor (Number) If left blank, station name will be the same as station number.
■ Location (except IXW-MA) Description Select the Location of the station.
The location will be displayed on the screen of the destination during call, page, etc.
Settings Default values -
Select one from the Location registered in “Location (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 406)”
.
375
System Settings (Station View)
1.2
ID and Password
Set the ID and password for logging in via a web browser, and the ID and password for ONVIF/RTSP authentication.
■ Administrator ID♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the ID of the administrator account for logging in to the Web System Setting Server.
For IX-MV7-*, configure the administrator ID used to access the station's Settings screen.
1-32 alphanumeric characters admin ■ Administrator Password♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Password of the administrator account for logging in to the Web System Setting Server.
For IX-MV7-*, configure the administrator password used to access the station's Settings screen.
1-32 alphanumeric characters admin ■ User ID♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the ID of the user account for logging in to the Web System Setting Server.
1-32 alphanumeric characters user ■ User Password♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Password of the user account for logging in to the Web System Setting Server.
1-32 alphanumeric characters user ■ ONVIF ID (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the ID to access this station from 3rd party products using ONVIF.
The settings of IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) cannot be changed from their default values. (They are not shown in the Settings screen.) 1-32 alphanumeric characters aiphone 376
System Settings (Station View) ■ ONVIF Password (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Password to access this station from 3rd party products using ONVIF.
The settings of IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) cannot be changed from their default values. (They are not shown in the Settings screen.) 1-32 alphanumeric characters aiphone ■ RTSP ID (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*) ♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the ID to access this station from 3rd party products using RTSP.
1-32 alphanumeric characters aiphone ■ RTSP Password (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*) ♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Password to access this station from 3rd party products using RTSP.
1-32 alphanumeric characters aiphone Note • The "Administrator ID" and "User ID" cannot be identical.
• The ONVIF port number is "10080" and the RTSP port number is "554." • To view video from IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) using a 3rd party product, refer to
• The ONVIF ID and ONVIF Password of IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) can be changed on a 3rd party product. If changed on a 3rd party product, the Settings screen will not show the changed content.
• The "Administrator Password," "User Password," "ONVIF Password," and "RTSP Password " are displayed as "*****" on the screen.
377
1.3
Time
Set the date and time for each station.
System Settings (Station View)
1.3.1
Time Zone
■ Select time zone♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Time Zone.
Select from 99 regions When a new system is createdthe the following settings will be set to these defaults depending on the language selected.
Japanese: (GMT+09:00) Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo English: (GMT-08:00) Pacific Standard Time (US), Tijuana French: (GMT+01:00) Brussels, Madrid, Copenhagen, Paris Spanish: (GMT+01:00) Brussels, Madrid, Copenhagen, Paris Dutch: (GMT+01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm Traditional Chinese: (GMT+08:00) Taipei Simplified Chinese: (GMT+08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi
1.3.2
Daylight Savings Time
■ Enable automatic daylight savings time♠ Description Settings Default values The daylight saving time is set automatically according by region selected in "Select Time Zone".
• Yes • No No
1.3.3
Date and Time
Enter the time for each station. Time is used for incoming calls, outgoing calls, and the system log.
Important
• The time cannot be set unless the “Association Settings (→page 160)”
is performed and the PC is connected to the same network as the station.
378
System Settings (Station View)
How to configure the date and time
1.
Select "Year," "Month," "Day," "Hour," "Minute," and "Second." • Click
[Sync with PC]
to synchronize with PC.
2.
Click
[Apply]
.
• If "Association Settings" has not been configured, the following screen will be shown.
Click
[OK]
and use
“Association Settings (→page 160)” .
• If the PC cannot communicate with the system, the following screen will be shown.
Click
[OK]
, and then ensure the PC can communicate with the system.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
379
1.4
Expanded System
System Settings (Station View) Description Not used.
380
System Settings (Station View)
2. Network Settings
2.1
IP Address
Configure the hostname, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for each station.
Important • When a setting related to the IP address is updated on a station, it will restart. In some cases, it may take up to 10 minutes for the station to start up.
■ Hostname (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description
Go to
“DNS (→page 384)” to set Hostname.
Settings Default values 1-64 alphanumeric characters Note • Communication from IX Support Tool to the stations use the IP address.
■ Static / DHCP♠ Description Settings Default values Select Static or DHCP for the selected IP version.
For IPv4 • Static • DHCP For IPv6 • Static • Stateless • DHCPv6 • Static 381
System Settings (Station View) Important • IPv4 and IPv6 cannot be mixed in the same system.
• When selecting "DHCP" for IPv4, configure the system so that the DHCP server assigns a Static IP Address to each station.
• When selecting "Stateless" for IPv6, do not change the prefix of the device so that it can transmit RA.
• When selecting "DHCPv6" for IPv6, configure the system so that the DHCP server assigns a Static IP Address to each station. DUID of the station is "00030001 + MAC address." • When setting up a product from another manufacturer, such as a DHCP server, refer to its manual.
2.1.1
IPv4 Address
Important
Mask," and "Default Gateway" are entered.
■ IP Address♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IP Address.
The IP Address should be unique.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
■ Subnet Mask♦♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Default Gateway♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Subnet Mask.
128.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
Set the Default Gateway.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
2.1.2
IPv6 Address
Important
Address" and "Default Gateway" settings are input.
■ IP Address♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IP Address.
The IP Address should be unique.
2000::0 - 3FFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or FD00::0 - FDFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF 382
System Settings (Station View) ■ Default Gateway♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Default Gateway.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF 383
System Settings (Station View)
2.2
DNS
When IPv4 or IPv6 is configured by Hostname for each item, or when using the email function configured in
for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), a DNS server must be configured for name resolution.
2.2.1
Primary Server♠
■ IPv4 Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for DNS Primary Server.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
Set the IPv6 address for DNS Primary Server.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF
2.2.2
Secondary Server♠
■ IPv4 Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for DNS Secondary Server.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
Set the IPv6 address for DNS Secondary Server.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF 384
2.3
SIP (except IXW-MA)
Configure SIP settings.
System Settings (Station View)
2.3.1
SIP Connections
■ SIP Signaling Port♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Port Number for SIP.
Set the same port number for each station to communicate.
1 - 65535 5060 ■ User Agent (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the User Agent.
1-36 alphanumeric characters
2.3.2
SIP Server (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure integration with 3rd party SIP based PBX systems. Please contact your local Aiphone distribution for more information.
385
System Settings (Station View)
2.3.2.1 Primary Server
■ ID♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Password♠ Description Settings Default values Configure the user ID for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters Configure the user password for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters Note • The "Password" is displayed as "*****" in the Settings screen.
■ IPv4 Address♠ Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for SIP Primary Server. Go to
“DNS (→page 384)” to set Hostname.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) ■ IPv6 Address♠ Description Settings Set the IPv6 address for SIP Primary Server. Go to
“DNS (→page 384)” to set Hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Default values ■ Port♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Port Number for SIP Primary Server.
1 - 65535 5060
2.3.2.2 Secondary Server
■ ID♠ Description Settings Default values Configure the user ID for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Password♠ Description Settings Default values Configure the user password for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters 386
System Settings (Station View) Note • The "Password" is displayed as "*****" in the Settings screen.
■ IPv4 Address♠ Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for SIP Secondary Server. Go to
“DNS (→page 384)” to set Hostname.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) ■ IPv6 Address♠ Description Settings Set the IPv6 address for SIP Secondary Server. Go to
“DNS (→page 384)” to set Hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Default values ■ Port♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Port Number for SIP Secondary Server.
1-65535 5060
2.3.2.3 Tertiary Server
■ ID♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Password♠ Description Settings Default values Configure the user ID for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters Configure the user password for digest authentication with SIP server.
1-24 alphanumeric characters Note • The "Password" is displayed as "*****" in the Settings screen.
■ IPv4 Address♠ Description Settings Default values -
Set the IPv4 address for SIP Tertiary Server. Go to “DNS (→page 384)”
to set Hostname.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) ■ IPv6 Address♠ Description Settings Default values -
Set the IPv6 address for SIP Tertiary Server. Go to “DNS (→page 384)”
to set Hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) 387
System Settings (Station View) ■ Port♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Port Number for SIP Tertiary Server.
1-65535 5060
2.3.3
Miscellaneous
■ Register Transmission Interval [sec] (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX SS(-*))♦ ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Transmission Interval to send Regist to SIP server.
10 - 14400sec 3600 sec ■ DTMF digit interval timeout [sec] (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) ♦ ♠ Description Settings Default values Configure the time to timeout signal reception, when a DTMF signal is not received from the VoIP Phone for a continuous period of time.
1 - 10sec 5 sec Important • Configure the IP-PBX and VoIP Phone DTMF with outbound.
■ Call health check timer♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the timer to transmit re-INVITE while calling and monitoring.
• Do not transmit re-INVITE: Do not detect communication errors.
• 80-3600 sec: Select to set between 80-3600 sec (by 1 sec).
90 sec 388
System Settings (Station View)
2.4
Multicast Address (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
“All Page (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 452)” , and
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 419)”
.
Note • A multicast address must be configured to utilize All Page.
for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)
■ For Call / Paging (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 or IPv6 Multicast Address. The Multicast Address should be unique.
[IPv4]: 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255
[IPv6]: FF10::0 - FF1F:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF ■ For Call (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 or IPv6 Multicast Address. The Multicast Address should be unique.
[IPv4]: 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255
[IPv6]: FF10::0 - FF1F:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF 389
System Settings (Station View)
2.5
Video (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
Configure video settings.
2.5.1
Video Encoder 1
Configure video settings when placing a call between stations, during communication, or when calling a VoIP phone.
Configure video settings for IX-MV7-* in “Master Station Video Setting (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 395)” .
■ Video Codec (for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select Video Codec.
• H.264 / AVC • Motion-JPEG H.264 / AVC 390
System Settings (Station View) Note • For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), "Video Codec" is set to "H.264 / AVC" and cannot be changed.
■ Resolution (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select the video resolution of Video Encoder 1.
• 320×240 (QVGA) • 640×480 (VGA) IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 640×480 (VGA) IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 320×240 (QVGA) ■ Frame Rate [fps] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Frame Rate [fps] of Video Encoder 1.
1, 2 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)), 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps For IX-DA and IX-DF(-*), when the frame rate is set to 7.5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 fps, the frame Rate will be 5 fps after approx. 10 min of an outgoing call.
15 fps Note • The frame rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
■ Select Profile [H.264 / AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the H.264/AVC Profile of Video Encoder 1.
• Baseline • Main • High Main ■ I-picture interval [H.264/AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the interval to send H.264/AVC I-picture of Video Encoder 1.
1 - 100 15 ■ Bit rate [kbps] [H.264 / AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the H.264/AVC Bit Rate of Video Encoder 1.
32 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)), 64, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, 2048 kbps 1024 kbps Note • The bit rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
391
System Settings (Station View) ■ Select Quality [Motion-JPEG] (for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select the Quality of Motion-JPEG of Video Encoder 1.
1 (low) - 10 (high) 6 ■ RTP Start Port♦ Description Settings Default values ■ RTP End Port♦ Description Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive RTP for Video Encoder 1.
Set the difference to 90 or greater in the range of (RTP Start Port) - (RTP End Port).
1 - 65534 30000 Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive RTP for Video Encoder 1.
Set the difference to 90 or greater in the range of (RTP Start Port) - (RTP End Port).
1 - 65535 31000 392
System Settings (Station View)
2.5.2
Video Encoder 2
Set when transmitting video using ONVIF.
Important • These settings may be changed by ONVIF-compliant 3rd party products, if utilized. Refer to the manual of the 3rd party product to be used.
■ Second Video Encoder (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Second Video Encoder.
Set to "Enable" to send the video using ONVIF.
• Enable • Disable Enable ■ Video Codec (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select the Video Codec of Video Encoder 2..
• H.264 / AVC • Motion-JPEG H.264 / AVC ■ Resolution (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select the video resolution of Video Encoder 2.
• 320x240(QVGA) • 640x480(VGA) • 800x480(WVGA) (For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) • 1280x720(HD) (For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) • 1280x960(SXVGA) (For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 1280x720(HD) IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 320x240(QVGA) ■ Frame Rate [fps] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Frame Rate [fps] of Video Encoder 2.
1, 2 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)), 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps For IX-DA and IX-DF(-*), when the frame rate is set to 7.5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 fps, the frame Rate will be 5 fps after approx. 10 min of an outgoing call.
IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 10 fps IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 15 fps Note • The frame rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
393
System Settings (Station View) ■ Select Profile [H.264 / AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the H.264/AVC Profile of Video Encoder 2.
• Baseline • Main • High Main ■ I-picture interval [H.264/AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ Description Settings Default values Set the interval to send H.264/AVC I-picture of Video Encoder 2.
1 - 100 IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 10 IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 15 ■ Bit rate [kbps] [H.264 / AVC] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the H.264/AVC Bit Rate of Video Encoder 2.
32 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)), 64, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, 2048, 4096 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF( *)), 8192 (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) kbps IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*): 2048 kbps IX-DA, IX-DF(-*): 1024 kbps Note • The bit rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
■ Select Quality [Motion-JPEG] (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select the Quality of Motion-JPEG of Video Encoder 2.
1 (low) - 10 (high) 6 ■ RTP Start Port♦ Description Settings Default values ■ RTP End Port♦ Description Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive RTP for Video Encoder 2.
Set the difference to 10 or greater in the range of (RTP Start Port) - (RTP End Port).
1 - 65534 32000 Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive RTP for Video Encoder 2.
Set the difference to 10 or greater in the range of (RTP Start Port) - (RTP End Port).
1 - 65535 33000 394
System Settings (Station View)
2.5.3
Master Station Video Setting (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure video settings for the IX-MV7-* camera.
Important • When sending video to an VoIP Phone, configure to the same video settings as the VoIP Phone.
• Video is not sent when making an outgoing call to a VoIP Phone.
■ Video Streaming Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Video Streaming of IX-MV7-*. Video cannot be distributed to 3rd party products not compatible with ONVIF or to IX-MV. The Video Codec is H.264 / AVC.
• Enable • Disable Enable ■ Frame Rate [fps]♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Frame Rate [fps].
0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps 15 fps Note • The frame rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
■ Select Profile Description Settings Default values Set the profile for Video Streaming.
• Baseline • Main • High Main ■ I-picture interval♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Bit rate [kbps]♠ Description Settings Default values Select the interval to send I-picture for Video Streaming.
1 - 100 15 Select the bit rate [kbps].
32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, 2048 kbps 1024 kbps 395
System Settings (Station View) Note • The bit rate may be lower than the set value depending on the video being sent, the number of recipient stations, and the network environment.
396
System Settings (Station View)
2.5.4
Using a 3rd party product to monitor video/audio from IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)
IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) support ONVIF Profile S and RTSP.
Video and audio of IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) can be monitored on a 3rd party product.
Important • Video from IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) camera cannot be viewed simultaneously by more than two 3rd party products.
• Audio will not be distributed if
“Audio Codec♠ (→page 398)” is set to "G.722."
Configuring IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), and IX-DA so that video can be viewed on a 3rd party product.
1.
Select "Enable" for
“Second Video Encoder (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♠ (→page 393)” .
2.
Configure video and audio settings.
• Configure video to
“Video Encoder 2 (→page 393)” , and audio to
“Audio 2 RTP Start Port♦ (→page 400)” and “Audio 2 RTP End Port♦ (→page 400)” .
Important
• Configure “Video Encoder 2 (→page 393)” according to the specification of the product.
3.
Register IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) with a third party product. Enter the following as necessary.
• For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*) – ONVIF ID: Configure in
“ONVIF Password (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))♦♠ (→page 377)” .
– ONVIF Password: Configure in
“RTSP Password (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS *)♦♠ (→page 377)”
.
– ONVIF communication port number: 10080 – RTSP ID: Configure in
“RTSP ID (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*)♦♠ (→page 377)”
.
– RTSP communication port number: 554 • For IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) – ONVIF ID: aiphone – ONVIF Password: aiphone – ONVIF communication port number: 10080 – RTSP ID: aiphone – RTSP Password : aiphone – RTSP communication port number: 554 • For how to register, refer to the instruction manual of the product to be registered.
Important • "ONVIF ID" and "ONVIF Password" can be changed on the third party product.
• If changed on a third party product, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) will not show the changed content on IX Support Tool.
397
2.6
Audio (except IXW-MA)
Configure the settings for audio.
System Settings (Station View) ■ Audio Codec♠ Description Settings Default values Select the Audio Codec.
• G.711 (μ-Law) • G.711 (A-Law) • G.722 (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA and IX-SS(-*)) G.711 (μ-Law) 398
System Settings (Station View) Important • When changing from "G.711" to "G.722" or from "G.722" to "G.711," the station will restart when the change is applied. In some cases, it may take around 10 minutes to restart the station.
• Stations with different audio codecs (G.711 and G.722) selected cannot ring, call, monitor, or page each other.
• When changing "G.711" to "G.722" and "G.722" to "G.711," change the custom tones used for the following subcategories to audio files with appropriate audio sample rates.
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)”
– "Call Origination" -
“Ringback Tone (except IX-MV) ♠ (→page 423)”
– "Call Origination" -
“Busy Tone (except IX-MV)♠ (→page 429)”
– "Call Origination" -
“Error Tone (Call Failed) (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)♠ (→page 430)”
– "Incoming Call" -
“Ringtone (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV)♠ (→page 432)”
– "Incoming Call" -
“Call Button (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 433)”
– "Incoming Call" -
“Option Input (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 434)”
– "Relay Output" -
– "Relay Output" -
“Relay Control (start) (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 445)”
– "Relay Output" -
“Relay Control (end) (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 446)”
– "Option Input Page" -
“Message File Name (→page 454)”
– "Network Camera Integration" -
“Event Tone (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)”
– "Network Camera Integration" -
“Event Tone (for IX-MV)♠ (→page 460)”
– "Paging Settings" -
– "Communication Audio Messages" - "Start Communication" - “Message (→page 489)”
– "Communication Audio Messages" - "Code Received" -
– "Chime" - "Weekly Schedule" -
– "Chime" - "Daily Schedule" - “Chime (→page 494)”
– "Speed Dials / Favorites" - "How to configure group message paging" -
– "Speed Dials / Favorites" - "How to configure all message paging" -
– "Volume / Tone" -
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Communication End Pretone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♠ (→page 530)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Call Queue Notification (for IX-MV7-*)♠ (→page 530)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Paging Pretone (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♠ (→page 531)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Auto Answer Tone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♠ (→page 531)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“On Hold (for IX-MV7-*)♠ (→page 532)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Key Received (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♠ (→page 532)”
– "Volume / Tone" -
“Error (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♠ (→page 533)”
– "Communication" -
– "Monitor" - “Monitored Notification (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♠ (→page 537)”
■ Audio RTP Transmission Interval [msec]♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Audio RTP Transmission Interval. This setting is ignored when transmitting to multiple stations (paging, etc.) 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 msec 20 msec 399
System Settings (Station View) ■ RTP Idle Detection Time [sec]♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the time to detect RTP idle state for Audio.
When Audio RTP is not received during communication, monitoring, or receiving a page, connection will be disconnected after the set time.
10 - 180 sec (by 1 sec) 10 sec ■ Audio 1 RTP Start Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive Audio RTP, such as communication between IX systems.
Set the difference to 210 or greater in the range of (Audio 1 RTP Start Port) - (Audio 1 RTP End Port).
1 - 65534 20000 ■ Audio 1 RTP End Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive Audio RTP, such as communication between IX systems.
Set the difference to 210 or greater in the range of (Audio 1 RTP Start Port) - (Audio 1 RTP End Port).
1 - 65535 21000 ■ Audio 2 RTP Start Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive Audio RTP using ONVIF.
Set the difference to 10 or greater in the range of (Audio 2 RTP Start Port) - (Audio 2 RTP End Port).
1 - 65534 22000 ■ Audio 2 RTP End Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the range of port numbers to transmit and receive Audio RTP using ONVIF.
Set the difference to 10 or greater in the range of (Audio 2 RTP Start Port) - (Audio 2 RTP End Port).
1 - 65535 23000 400
System Settings (Station View)
2.6.1
Audio Buffer
■ Packets Buffered at Audio Start♠ Description Settings Default values Set the number of packets to accumulate before playing audio.
0 - 4 1 ■ Maximum Packets Buffered Description Settings Default values Set the maximum number of packets that can be accumulated.
If a packet is received beyond the set value, it is removed from the oldest packet.
It should be greater than the number of
“Packets Buffered at Audio Start♠ (→page 401)” .
2 - 10 3 401
System Settings (Station View)
2.7
Packet Priority
Configure the Packet Priority and VLAN for video, audio, and SIP packets.
Important • When a setting related to VLAN is updated at a station, it will restart. In some cases, it may take around 10 minutes for the station to start up.
■ TOS Value (Audio) (except IXW-MA)♦ ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Packet Priority (TOS Value) for Audio.
0x00 - 0xFF 0x00 ■ TOS Value (Video) (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) ♦ ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Packet Priority (TOS Value) for Video.
0x00 - 0xFF 0x00 ■ TOS Value (SIP) (except IXW-MA)♦ ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Packet Priority (TOS Value) for SIP.
0x00 - 0xFF 0x00 ■ VLAN Setting♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for tagged VLAN.
• Disable • Enable Disable Important • When "VLAN Setting" is set to "Enable" and the configuration is applied to the station, ensure that the station cannot communicate with switches, PCs, and stations not configured on the VLAN.
402
System Settings (Station View) ■ VLAN ID♦♠ Description Settings Default values ■ VLAN Priority♠ Description Settings Default values Set the VLAN ID.
1 - 4094 1 Set the VLAN priority.
0 (low) - 7 (high) 0 403
2.8
NTP
System Settings (Station View)
2.8.1
Enable NTP♠
Description Settings Default values Select Yes / No Use to synchronize the time with an NTP server. If this is set to "Yes," be sure to
configure the other items in “NTP (→page 404)” .
• Yes • No Use No Use
2.8.2
Synchronization Interval [hour]♦ ♠
Description Settings Default values Set the interval to synchronize with the NTP server.
1-255 hours (1 hour units) 24 hours
2.8.3
Primary Server 2.8.3.1 Address♠
■ IPv4 Description Settings Default values
Set the IPv4 address for NTP Primary Server. Go to “DNS (→page 384)”
to set hostname.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) 404
System Settings (Station View) ■ IPv6 Description Settings Default values
2.8.3.2 Port♦ ♠
Description Settings Default values -
Set the IPv6 address for NTP Primary Server. Go to “DNS (→page 384)”
to set hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Set the port number for NTP.
1 - 65535 123
2.8.4
Secondary Server 2.8.4.1 Address♠
■ IPv4 Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Description Settings -
Set the IPv4 address for NTP Secondary Server. Go to “DNS (→page 384)”
to set hostname.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) -
Set the IPv6 address for NTP Secondary Server. Go to “DNS (→page 384)”
to set hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Default values
2.8.4.2 Port♦ ♠
Description Settings Default values Set the port number for NTP.
1 - 65535 123 405
System Settings (Station View)
3. System Information
3.1
Location (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Register a location.
For how to register a location, refer to
“Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” .
3.2
Address Book (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the IX-MV7-* and IX-MV Address Book.
Calling, paging, monitoring, line monitoring, and malfunction monitoring can be performed for any station registered in the Address Book. Network cameras can be monitored and outgoing calls can be made to VoIP phones.
Important • Always configure
before setting "Address Book." • Enter the language configured in
avoid this, enter information in the setting data using alphabetical characters only.
3.2.1
Station List
Register the stations in the Address Book.
List of stations that can be registered to the Address Book 3 2
VoIP Phone Registration
Register the VoIP phone in the Address Book.
1
Details on VoIP phones registered in “VoIP Phone Registration (→page 408)” will be shown.
406
System Settings (Station View) Important • Stations where
“IP Address (→page 381)” is not configured cannot be registered to the Address Book.
• Results when searching by station will be listed in order of station number.
How to create Station List
1.
VoIP phones are registered in
“VoIP Phone Registration (→page 421)” .
2.
Identify the station to be registered in the Address Book using "List of stations that can be registered to the Address Book," and then configure "Select." • Register stations in which " By default, " ✔ ✔ " has been selected to the Address Book. For IX stations, stations for which "SIP" was selected will be registered in the Address Book as VoIP phones.
(register)" is set for all.
Click "Network Camera" (IX-MV7-* only) -
[Network camera selection]
to select the network camera to
of the selected network camera will be displayed.
If a network camera is associated with a station, the video from the network camera will be displayed when placing a call, during a communication, or when monitoring.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
407
System Settings (Station View)
3.2.1.1 VoIP Phone Registration
On the "Address Book" screen, click
[VoIP Phone Registration]
. The following window will be shown.
“Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)”
1 2
How to perform VoIP Phone Registration
1.
In the "Station List," enter the "Number♦," "Name," and "Location." • Number: 3-32 digits • Name: 1-24 alphanumeric characters
• Location: Select a location registered in “Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” .
2.
Click
[Update]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to close the "VoIP Phone Registration" screen without registering a VoIP Phone.
• The registered VoIP Phone is displayed on the Station List.
408
System Settings (Station View)
3.2.2
Network Camera List
IX-MV7-* and IX-MV support the ONVIF interface standard "ONVIF profile S." Video and audio of 3rd party network camera can be monitored on the IX-MV7-*, IX-MV screen.
Register the network camera in the Address Book.
Up to 500 network cameras can be registered.
Configure
“Network Camera Integration (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 456)” to configure event notification-
related settings for the network camera.
“Network Camera Registry (→page 412)”
List of network cameras that can be registered to the Address Book If no network camera is registered, this will not be shown.
Click
[Delete]
. The network camera will be deleted.
How to create Network Camera List
1.
Register the network camera in
“Network Camera Registry (→page 412)” .
2.
Identify the network camera to be registered in the Address Book using "List of network cameras that can be registered to the Address Book."
3.
Click the cells ("Select," "PTZ Operation," and "Audio Monitoring) that correspond to Steps 2.
• Select: Register network cameras with " ✔ " selected to the Address Book.
All items are "blank (unregistered)" by default.
■ Camera Name♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Network Camera Name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters 409
System Settings (Station View) ■ Hostname Description Settings Default values ■ IP Address (IPv4) Description Settings Default values ■ IP Address (IPv6) Description Settings Default values ■ ID♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Password♦ Description Settings Default values Set the hostname.
Go to
“DNS (→page 384)” to set Hostname.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the IPv4 address for Network camera.
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254
Set the IPv6 address for Network camera.
::FF:0-FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF Enter ID of the network camera.
1-32 alphanumeric characters Enter Password of the network camera.
1-32 alphanumeric characters Note • "Password" is displayed as "*****" in the Settings screen.
■ PTZ Operation Description Settings Default values Configure whether to allow network camera PTZ operation from the station.
• Enable • Disable • Enable 410
System Settings (Station View) ■ Audio Monitoring Description Settings Default values Configure whether to allow monitoring of network camera audio from the station.
• Enable • Disable • Enable Note • "Allow PTZ" and "Audio Monitoring" are set to "Enable" for IX-MV and cannot be changed.
4.
When done, click
[Update]
.
5.
Click
[OK]
.
411
System Settings (Station View)
3.2.2.1 Network Camera Registry
Registration cannot be performed if the PC is not connected to the same network as the network camera.
Click
[Network Camera Selection]
Search List." to search a network camera. (Searching may take several minutes.) When searching is done, the network cameras connected in the network will be shown in the "Network Camera Important • Network camera registration is configured via
“Association Settings (→page 160)” on at least one IX-MV7-* or IX-MV station,
and cannot be configured if the PC cannot communicate with the system (this is because, when registering a network camera, the network camera is searched through IX-MV7-* or IX-MV).
Note • When searching on the station, the numbers will be displayed in the order they were registered.
1 2 3 4 If the video profile cannot be obtained, nothing will be shown.
5 412
System Settings (Station View)
How to register a new network camera
1.
To search by specifying an IP address, select "Manual Network Camera Configuration," and enter the "IP Address (hostname) ♦," "ID♦," and "Password ♦" of the network camera.
2.
To select from the Network Camera Search List, select "Select from Network Camera Search List." Select the network camera(s) to register from the "Network Camera Search List" and then enter the "Hostname," "ID♦," and "Password♦." • When entering the Hostname, configure
.
• To search again, click
[Search]
. It is also possible change the search time.
3.
Click
[Get Network Camera Information]
.
(Obtaining the video profile may take several minutes.) • When video profiles are successfully obtained, they will be shown in "Network Camera Information."
4.
Choose the video profile(s) to be registered from the list.
5.
Click
[Register]
to register a network camera.
6.
When done, click
[Update]
.
7.
Click
[OK]
.
413
System Settings (Station View)
3.3
Group (for Master) (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the group for group calls, group pages, and contact input calls.
Up to 50 groups per station (50 stations per group) can be registered.
Stations other than IXW-MA can be registered to groups.
Important • Always configure
before setting "Group (for Master)." • Enter using the language configured in
. However, if the language displayed on the screen for IX-
incorrectly. To avoid this, enter information using alphabetical characters only.
• Only a single VoIP Phone can be registered to each group.
• All pages, groups pages, message pages, and external input pages cannot be sent to VoIP Phone.
• Stations
“IP Address (→page 381)” has not been configured and that have not been registered in
“Address Book (for IX-MV7 * and IX-MV) (→page 406)”
cannot be registered to groups.
• Groups calls and calls by Option Input cannot be made to IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*).
• Groups calls and calls by Option Input cannot be made from IX-MV to IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*.
• Results when searching by station will be listed in order of group number.
1 Group Information 2 3 4 List of stations that can be registered to group
How to configure groups
1.
Enter the following information in "Group Information." • Group Number: 01 - 99 Group numbers must be unique.
• Group Name: 1 - 24 alphanumeric characters
2.
Identify the station to be registered from the "List of stations that can be registered to group."
3.
Search for the group for registering the station in Step 2.
414
System Settings (Station View)
4.
Click the cells that correspond to Steps 2 and 3. Select an audio protocol and video protocol setting value for each, and register to a group.
The number of registered stations will be shown in "Total."
Audio Protocol
• Blank: Select to not register to a group.
• U: Belongs to group. Paging audio is transmitted in unicast.
• M: Belongs to group. Paging audio is transmitted in multicast.
Video Protocol (only when IX-MV7-* is both the station to configure and register)
• Blank: Video will be transmitted as multicast.
• U: Video will be transmitted as unicast during group calls. Unicast can be used to send video to up to 20stations.
• M: Video will be transmitted as multicast during group calls.
The video protocol pull-down menu is shown when the audio protocol setting is selected.
All items are blank by default.
5.
When done, click
[Update]
.
6.
Click
[OK]
.
Important • If "M" is selected or "blank" is selected for the video protocol, be sure to configure
“Multicast Address (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) (→page 389)” .
• For VoIP phones or stations in which "SIP" was selected in
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 419)”
, "M" cannot be selected.
Note • When making a group call, the audio protocol will be set to "U" and cannot be changed.
415
System Settings (Station View)
3.4
Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA)
Register audio files to be used for ringback tones, ringtones, message paging, etc.
The numbers of audio files that can be registered to each station are as follows.
Station Type
IX-MV7-* IX-MV IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*) IX-SSA(-*) IX-SS-2G IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) IX-RS-*
Information that can be saved to the station
Max. 100 files (with 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes per file) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Max. 100 files (total length of within 200 seconds and 8 Mbytes) Sound file format • File Type: .wav
• Sample Size: 16 bits
is "G.722") • Channel: 1 (monaural) • File Name: 1-82 alphanumeric characters (without file extensions) For IX-MV7-*, search for audio files used for message paging by file name by entering either a letter or number as the first character.
Note • If using a file for a ringback tone, ringtone, or network camera event tone, add a period of silence in the .wav file if the tone is to be intermittent.
• Sample files of custom tones are provided on our website ( https://www.aiphone.net/product/ ) for download and use as audio sources.
416
System Settings (Station View)
How to register an audio file
1.
Click
[Browse]
at the end of the row for the station in which the file is to be registered.
2.
Select the audio file to register, and click
[Open]
.
3.
Information on the selected audio file will be shown.
• Name: Shows the file name of the audio file. Up to 24 alphanumeric characters will be shown.
The name will be shown as the setting value when configuring the ringback tone etc.
If the file name of the audio file exceeds the character limit above, it will only partially be shown.
• Browse for .wav file: The audio file reference destination is shown.
4.
When done, click
[Update]
.
5.
Click
[OK]
.
How to delete a custom tone
1.
Check the
[Delete]
box of the audio file to delete.
2.
Click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
Note • "Name" can be deleted from the Settings screen by selecting
“Upload Settings To Station (→page 145)” - "Sounds" to upload
the setting file, and then deleting the audio file from the station.
417
4. Call Settings
System Settings (Station View)
4.1
Station Information (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G)
Configure the call button function.
■ Call Button Function Description Settings Default values Select the Call button Function when call button is pressed (for IX-RS-*: Call/Talk button).
• Call: Outgoing call • Call, Cancel Call, End Communication: Out going call, Cancel outgoing call, End Communication • Call, Answer Call, End Communication: Outgoing call, Answer call or page, End communication Call Note • Contact input calls and communication switched from a contact input call cannot be ended by pressing the Call button (IX-RS *: Call/Talk button).
4.2
Called Stations (Master Stations) (for IX-MV7-* or IX-MV)
A call destination does not have to be set up. Any intercom station registered in
“Station List (→page 406)” can be
called.
418
System Settings (Station View)
4.3
Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA)
Configure the group to call when a call is made using the call button or via contact input.
• Stations other than IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*): Up to 20 stations can be configured in a single group, and up to 10 groups can be configured.
• IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA,IX-SS(-*),(for placing a call button call): Up to 20 stations can be configured in a single group, and only a single group can be configured.
• IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) (for placing a contact input call): Up to 20 stations can be configured in a single group, and up to nine groups can be configured.
Any station other than IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), IXW-MA can be registered as a call recipient.
Important • An IX-RS, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) must be registered under Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) to use Door Release while in communication with IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*). An IX-RS cannot place a call to IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) even IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) is under Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations.) Group Number
VoIP Phone Registration
Register the VoIP phone as a call recipient.
2 1 Click to delete the registration.
Important • Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 381)” is not configured cannot be registered as destinations.
• If the station registered to the call destination is anything other than IX-MV7-* or IX-MV, one of the following must be configured to receive incoming calls.
– Set to "Call, Answer Call, End Communication" in
“Call Button Function (→page 418)” .
– Configure "Option Input" -
to "Answer Call / Page." • Do not register the same station to a group more than once.
• Only one VoIP Phone can be registered to each group.
How to configure destinations (Door/Sub Stations)
1.
Select the group to configure from "Group Number." The Settings screen for the selected group will be displayed.
• Use the following groups when configuring IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*) destinations.
– Group used to place a call by operating this device/pressing the call button: "Group 10" – Groups used to place a call by Option Input: "Group 01 - 09" 419
System Settings (Station View)
2.
Select the settings and register the station to the group.
• For group number 01 for stations other than IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) and for group number 10 for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), Stations number 1 - 20 are registered beforehand in IX-MV7-* and IX MV will be set to "U" ahead of time.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Number Description Settings Default values Configure the stations to be registered as a call destination (Number).
Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
3-32 digits ■ Protocol (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values Configure the protocol used for outgoing calls.
• U: The station will be registered in the call destination. An outgoing call is transmitted as unicast.
• M: Station will be registered in the call destination. Video is transmitted as multicast for an outgoing call. This can be configured if the originating station is IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX DF(-*) and the destination station is IX-MV7-*, IX-MV.
• SIP: Select this to call an IX station as a VoIP phone.
U Important
.
How to delete a call destination.
1.
Click
[Delete]
for the desired station.
2.
Click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
420
System Settings (Station View)
4.3.1
VoIP Phone Registration
Register the VoIP Phone in Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations). When registering a VoIP Phone, be sure to configure
“SIP (except IXW-MA) (→page 385)” .
On the "Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations)" screen, click
[VoIP Phone Registration]
. The following window will be shown.
“Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)”
1 2
VoIP Phone registration
1.
In the "Station List," enter the "Number♦," "Name," and "Location." • Number: 3-32 digits • Name: 1-24 alphanumeric characters
• Location: Select a location registered in “Register location (except IXW-MA) (→page 174)” .
2.
Click
[Update]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to close the "VoIP Phone Registration" screen without registering a VoIP phone.
421
System Settings (Station View)
4.4
Call Origination (except IXW-MA)
Configure outgoing call settings.
4.4.1
Call Origination Advanced Settings How to configure call destination advanced settings
1.
Select the call method to configure in "Call Button / Option Input #." • "Call Button (except IX-MV)": Displays settings related to outgoing calls linked that placed by the call button.
• Option Input 1 - 6: Displays settings related to outgoing calls when "Call" is selected for Option Input" -
. Setting for the selected call method will be displayed.
2.
Configure the setting of each item.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Call Method (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the Call Method to change call destinations automatically by time delay or schedule.
• Standard Destination: Do not change call destination automatically.
IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are fixed to "Standard Destination" and cannot be changed.
• Change Destination by Time Delay: Change destination group from (→page 424)” after
and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♦ (→page 425)” . Up to 8 groups can be used.
• Change Destination by Schedule: Change destination group by
“Destination by Time Delay Settings (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*))
“Destination Dwell Time[sec] (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*),
“Schedule Settings (except IX MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 426)” .
Standard Destination 422
System Settings (Station View) ■ Ringback Tone (except IX-MV) ♠ Description Settings Select the sound to be played by the station when placing a call. For IX-MV7-*, this will also sound when monitoring.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Call Button • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • Except IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 1 Option Input 1 • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • Except for IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 2 Option Input 2 • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Call Pattern 3 Option Input 3 • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Call Pattern 4 Option Input 4 • IX-MV7-*: Call Pattern 4 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Call Pattern 5 Option Input 5 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Call Pattern 6 Option Input 6 • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): Tremolo Sound ■ Call Timeout (except "Call Button" - IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the Call Timeout for outgoing call.
• 10-600sec: Select to set between 10-600 sec (by 1 sec).
• Infinite: Keep calling until call is answered.
60sec Note • For "Call Button", the outgoing call time for IX-MV is set on the station.
423
System Settings (Station View) ■ Ringback Tone Count [time(s)] (except "Call Button" IX-MV) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the play count of ringback tone for outgoing call.
• 1 - 20 times • Infinite: The ring back tone continues to play for the amount of time set in
“Call Timeout (except "Call Button" - IX-MV) (→page 423)” .
Infinite Note • For "Call Button", the ringtone count for IX-MV is set on the station.
■ Call Destination ("Option Input 1 - 4" - for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Configure the call destination group and call priority.
Enter the group number directly, or click
[Open]
to select a group.
Settings Default values • Call Destination: 01 - 99. Select from groups registered in
“Group (for Master) (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 414)” .
• Priority: Normal/Priority/Urgent • Call Destination: ― • Priority: Normal ■ Standard Mode Settings (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Select the destination group when "Standard Destination" is selected in "
“Call Method (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 422)” .
Settings Default values
The call group number for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) is fixed to "10" and cannot be changed for "Call Button," or can be selected from "01 - 09" for "Option Input 1." • Priority: Normal/Priority/Urgent Call Button • Call Destination: 01 (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are "10") • Priority: Normal Option Input 1 - 5 • Call Destination ― (01 for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Priority: Normal Option Input 6 • Call Destination: 01 • Priority: Urgent ■ Destination by Time Delay Settings (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX SS(-*)) Description
configured in "Destination Dwell Time[sec]." is set to "Change Destination by Time Delay." Up to 8 groups can be configured, and it will switch between groups in order by the time Settings Default values
• Priority: Normal/Priority/Urgent • Call Destination: • Priority: Normal 424
System Settings (Station View) ■ Destination Dwell Time[sec] (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))♦ Description Settings Default values Set the delay time to change the call destination when "Change Destination by Time Delay" is selected in
“Call Method (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 422)” .
10-600sec / 1 sec step 30 sec 425
System Settings (Station View)
4.4.1.1 Schedule Settings (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
to "Change Destination by Schedule."
How to configure the Weekly Schedule
Configure the switch time for the call destination, the call destination group, and the call priority each day from Sunday to Saturday. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
1.
Configure "Start Time," "End Time," "Call Destination," and "Priority" for each day.
2.
When done, click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to start changing the call destination.
00:00 - 23:59 ■ End Time Description Settings Default values ■ Call Destination Description Settings Set the time to stop changing the call destination. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59 Set the call destination to change within the schedule.
01 - 10. Select from groups registered in
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 419)” .
Default values ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of calls.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent 426
System Settings (Station View)
How to delete the Weekly Schedule
1.
Return the settings to their default values and click
[Update]
.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
How to configure Daily Schedule
Configure the switch time for the destination, the call group, and the call priority in units of one day. A schedule one year from the set day can be configured. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
Calendar Set Schedule List
1.
Select the day to set a schedule from "Calendar."
2.
Configure "Start Time," "End Time," "Call Destination," and "Priority," and click
[Add]
.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to start changing the call destination.
00:00 - 23:59 ■ End Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to stop changing the call destination. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59 427
System Settings (Station View) ■ Call Destination Description Settings Set the call destination to change within the schedule.
01 - 10. Select from groups registered in
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 419)” .
Default values ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of calls.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent
How to delete Daily Schedule
1.
Select the day for which to delete a schedule from "Calendar."
2.
Schedules for the selected day are displayed in the "Set Schedule List." • If a weekly schedule is configured for the selected day of the week, it will also be displayed.
3.
Click
[Delete]
for the schedule to be deleted, and click
[Update]
.
• Refer to “How to delete the Weekly Schedule (→page 427)”
to delete a weekly schedule.
428
System Settings (Station View)
4.4.2
Tone Settings
Configure the busy tone and error tone when making an outgoing call.
■ Busy Tone (except IX-MV)♠ Description Settings Select the sound to be played when call destination station is busy.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) 429
System Settings (Station View) ■ Error Tone (Call Failed) (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♠ Description Settings Select the sound to be played when outgoing call has failed.
• None (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are Busy Tone) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are Error Tone) • Pre Tone 1 (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3 (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Error (IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are Error Tone)
4.4.3
Call Restart Function
■ Call Restart Function (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Call Restart Function.
Call Restart Function: When the station is reset during an outgoing call, the outgoing call will be resumed automatically up to 2 times.
• Enable • Disable Disable 430
System Settings (Station View)
4.5
Incoming Call (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA)
Configure incoming call settings.
4.5.1
Call Answer Settings
■ Auto Answer♠ Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF to automatically answer the individual call. Auto Answer: When receiving an individual call, answer automatically. When transferring a call, it must be answered manually.
• ON: Auto Answer.
• OFF: No Auto Answer.
• IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-RS-*: OFF • IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G: ON Important • For IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G, if Auto Answer is set to "OFF," be sure to configure one of the following. If not configured, calls will not be received.
– Set to "Call, Answer Call, End Communication" in
“Call Button Function (→page 418)” .
– Configure "Option Input" -
to "Answer Call / Page." Note • For IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), Auto Answer is set to "ON" and cannot be changed.
431
4.5.2
Ringtone
System Settings (Station View) ■ Ringtone (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV) ♠ Description Settings Select the ringtone to be played for incoming call.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Call Pattern 3 432
System Settings (Station View) ■ Ringback Tone Count [time(s)] (except IX-MV7-*) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the play count of ringtone for incoming call.
• Infinite: Keep ringing until the call is answered or canceled.
• 1 - 20 times Infinite ■ Call Button (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Select the ringtone for incoming call. Ringtone can be set per each source station.
IX-MV7-*: Ringtone can be set per priority.
IX-MV: Same for all priority. Set ringtone to "Normal" priority.
• None (IX-MV7-* only) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (IX-MV: Busy Tone) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (IX-MV: Error Tone) • Pre Tone 1 (IX-MV7-* only) • Pre Tone 2 (IX-MV7-* only) • Pre Tone 3 (IX-MV7-* only) • Communication End Pretone (IX-MV7-* only) • Call Queue Notification (IX-MV7-* only) • Waiting Reply Tone (IX-MV7-* only) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Call Pattern 1 433
System Settings (Station View) ■ Option Input (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Select the ringtone for incoming call by Option Input. The ringtone can be set per each source station.
IX-MV7-*: The ringtone can be set per priority.
IX-MV: Same for all priorities. Set the ringtone to "Normal" priority.
• None (IX-MV7-* only) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (IX-MV: Busy Tone) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (IX-MV: Error Tone) • Pre Tone 1 (IX-MV7-* only) • Pre Tone 2 (IX-MV7-* only) • Pre Tone 3 (IX-MV7-* only) • Communication End Pretone (IX-MV7-* only) • Call Queue Notification (IX-MV7-* only) • Waiting Reply Tone (IX-MV7-* only) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Call Pattern 2 ■ Call Button Ringtone Count [time(s)] (for IX-MV7-*) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the play count of ringback tone for incoming call from call button.
• Infinite: Keep ringing until the call is answered or canceled.
• 1 - 20 times Infinite ■ Option Input Ringtone Count [time(s)] (for IX-MV7-*) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the play count of ringback tone for incoming call from the option input.
• Infinite: Keep ringing until the call is answered or canceled.
• 1 - 20 times Infinite 434
4.5.3
VoIP Phone (except IX-MV)
System Settings (Station View) ■ VoIP Phone Call Priority Description Settings Default values Select the call priority from VoIP phones.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent Normal 435
System Settings (Station View)
5. Option Input/Relay Output Settings
5.1
Option Input
Configure the input terminal settings for each station. The number of input terminals varies by station.
5.1.1
Option Input Advanced Settings
Select the Option Input Number to configure for
[Call Button / Option Input #]
. The selected Option Input setting information will be displayed (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), and IXW-MA).
5.1.1.1 Name (except for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA)
Description Settings Default values Set the Name of the Option Input. 1-24 alphanumeric characters 436
System Settings (Station View)
5.1.1.2 Function
Description Settings Configure the contact input functions. The functions that can be selected differ depending on the station.
• No Function
• Answer Call / Page (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA): Answer incoming call or page.
• Paging (for IX-MV7-*): Page to destination. Be sure to also configure
“Option Input Page (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 453)” .
• External Input Page (for IX-MV7-*): Page using an external sound source. Only one input terminal may be configured. Be sure to also configure
“Option Input Page (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 453)” .
• Turn LCD On (for IX-MV7-*): Turn LCD backlight of IX-MV7-* on.
• Relay Latch Reset (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G): Reset latch relay output using the option input. "Relay Latch Reset" is selected in "Option Input" - "Function"
and "Latch Output" is selected in "Relay Output" - “Function (→page 440)” .
• Bathroom Indicator Reset (for IXW-MA): Not used.
• API (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)): Send CGI command set by
“API 1 (→page 438)” and “API 2 (→page 438)” .
No Function Default values
5.1.1.3 Type
Description Settings Default values Select the type of the option input.
• Make • Break Make
5.1.1.4 Detection Time
■ Detection Time Range Description Settings Default values Select the Detection Time Range for Option Input.
• 0 (Immediate): Detect at input less than 200 msec.
• 200 - 2000 [msec] • 3 - 600 [sec] 0 (Immediate) Note • The Detection Time Range for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*) is "200-2000 [msec]" and cannot be changed.
■ Detection Time♦ Description Settings Default values Configure the contact input search time within the range set in "Detection Time Range." The settings will be configured as follows according to the information set in "Detection Time Range." • If set to 0 (Immediate): Configuration unnecessary.
• If set to 200 - 2000 [msec]: Configure from 200 - 2000 msec (by 100 msec).
• If set to 3 - 600 [sec]: Configure from 3 - 600 sec (by 1 sec).
437
System Settings (Station View)
5.1.1.5 API (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
■ API 1 Description Settings Default values -
Enter the CGI command sent when "API" is selected in “Function (→page 437)” .
1-128 alphanumeric characters ■ API 2 Description Settings Default values -
Enter the CGI command sent when "API" is selected in “Function (→page 437)” .
1-128 alphanumeric characters 438
System Settings (Station View)
5.2
Relay Output
Configure the output terminal settings for each station. The number of output terminals varies by station.
Important • The four relay output methods are shown below. Redundant configuration is possible for each output terminal. If multiple commands occur during a single relay output, the last command will take priority.
– Function selected in “Function (→page 440)”
–
“Option Relay Control (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) (→page 442)”
–
“Schedule Settings (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 447)”
–
5.2.1
Relay Output Advanced Settings
The relay output setting information selected in
[Relay Output #]
will be shown. (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX SSA(-*), and IXW-MA) 439
System Settings (Station View)
5.2.1.1 Name (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA)
Description Settings Default values Set the name of the Relay Output.
1-24 alphanumeric characters
5.2.1.2 Function
Description Settings Default values Select the function of the Relay Output. Different function can be selected depending on the station type.
• No Function • Status Output (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA): Relay Output during the status.
The details setting can be set in operates when "Volume / Tone" -
“How to configure Status Output (→page 440)” .
• External Audio Output (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)): Relay output during Line audio output. Contact continues to output while audio is playing. This
“Audio Output (for Door) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-SS-2G, and IX-MV) (→page 534)”
is set to something other than "Built-in Speaker for Communication and Paging." • Door Release (except for IXW-MA): Relay output when door release is activated or, entering the authentication key using keypad of the station or the VoIP Phone. Configure the output time in
• Latch Output (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G): Latch relay output by event trigger. Continue to output until latch reset trigger input. Ignore set
“Output Time [msec / sec]♦ (→page 443)” . Configuration can be set in
“How to configure Latch Output (→page 441)” .
• Contact Input Call / Communication State (for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)): Relay output during the contact input call and communication until reset. The contact will continue to output during operation.
• Bathroom Indicator (for IXW-MA): Not used.
• Contact Change SIF Event (for IXW-MA): Relay output when Contact Change SIF Event is received from another station. Output Time is the same as Option Input Detection Time or Relay Output Time of the SIF command originating station. Set in "SIF" - "Transmission Trigger" -
“Change contact (→page 477)” .
Relay Output 1 • Except IXW-MA: Door Release • IXW-MA: No Function Relay Output 2 - 10 • No Function Note • If "Automatically configure door release for all stations?" is set to "No" in
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
, the default value for "Relay Output 1 (except IXW-MA)" will be "No Function."
How to configure Status Output
is set to "Status Output," select the operating state for when the relay output occurs. This can be selected for each operation priority (multiple selections allowed).
The operating states that can be selected vary by station type.
440
System Settings (Station View) Note • For "Outgoing Page" and "Incoming Page," relay output is performed even during message paging and external input paging.
• For "Monitored," relay output is performed even during scan monitoring.
How to configure Latch Output
is set to "Latch Output," select the operating state for when the relay output occurs. This can be selected for each operation priority (multiple selections allowed).
Choose from two restoration methods for relay output.
• Option Input (default value): Reset Latch Output by the Option Input.
• End Communication: Reset Latch Output by ending communication or the option input.
All items are set to "Option Input" by default.
.
How to configure Contact Change SIF Event
is set to "Contact Change SIF Event", select the station for interlocking with Contact Change SIF Event of Relay Output 1.
■ Number Description Settings Default values Set SIF Origination Station Number. Enter the station number or select station from the list.
3-32 digits 441
System Settings (Station View)
5.2.1.3 Option Relay Control (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*))
Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Option Relay Control when using the speed dial of IX-MV7-* to control the output.
If set to "Enable," contact will be output according to the "Speed Dials / Favorites" -
“How to configure Option Relay Control (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 524)”
setting.
If "How to configure optional relay" -
was set to "Enable" for the station that
For IXW-MA, this can be controlled as an optional relay if set to "Enable" only when
MV7-*.
• Enable • Disable Disable 442
System Settings (Station View)
5.2.1.4 Output Time Range
Description Settings Default values
Select the Output Time Range for relay output if “Function (→page 440)” is set to "Door
Release" or if the output terminal is controlled via
“CGI Integration (→page 473)” .
• 0 (Momentary) (for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)): Outputs while an output command is received. However, this is set to 10 sec and cannot be changed if a relay output command is received via CGI.
• 200-2000 [msec] • 3-600 sec (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • 3-300 sec (for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) 200-2000 [msec] Important • If set to "0 (Momentary)," the operation when the door on the other station is released will be as follows.
IX-MV7-* or IX-RS-*: When the Door Release button is pressed or Authentication Key is input by the keypad, a relay output command is sent and the output command ends immediately. The output command will not continue even if the Door Release button is held.
IX-MV: The relay output command continues while the Door Release button is pressed, and ends once it is released.
■ Output Time [msec / sec]♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Output Time within the range selected in
“Output Time Range (→page 443)” .
.
• If set to 0 (Momentary): Configuration unnecessary.
• If set to 200-2000 [msec]: Configure from 200 - 2000 msec (by 200 msec).
• If set to 3-600 sec: Configure from 3 - 600 sec (by 1 sec).
• If set to 3-300 sec: Configure from 3 - 300 sec (by 1 sec).
400 [msec]
5.2.1.5 Door Release Authorization (except IXW-MA)
Description Settings Default values Set the Authentication Key when "Door Release" is selected in
the relay output will be activated. Configure "Door Release" -
IX-MV7-* or a VoIP phone.
for releasing the door that is connected to the station. When the "Authentication Key" is confirmed,
“Authentication Key (→page 455)” .
This will also be the authentication key used to release the door using the numerical keypad on • Except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): 1-20 digits • IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): 1-4 digits
• IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) not configured: 20 random digits • IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) configured: 4 random digits 443
System Settings (Station View) Important • Configure the Authentication Key using 1 to 4 digits to release when using the IX-MV.
• Configure a different Authentication Key for each output terminal. (The same key cannot be used.) • Configure an Authentication Key that is different from the Authentication Key configured in "Communication Audio Messages"
. If the setting is the same, multiple functions might operate.
• To release the door using the numerical keypad, enter "**Authentication Key*" on the IX-MV7-* or VoIP Phone numerical keypad (if the Authentication Key is "0000" enter "**0000*").
444
System Settings (Station View)
5.2.1.6 Sound Settings (except IX-MV and IXW-MA)
■ Door Release Description Settings Default values Select the Door Release sounds to be played.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3 (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Operation Sound ■ Relay Control (start) (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the sound to be played when Option Relay is activated.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values None 445
System Settings (Station View) ■ Relay Control (end) (except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Select the sound to be played when Option Relay is deactivated.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values None 446
System Settings (Station View)
5.2.1.7 Schedule Settings (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Important • Regardless of the configuration in
“Function (→page 440)” , the relay will continue to output during the time period set in the
schedule. However, if a door release operation or other command occurs during the relay output, the last command will be given priority, and the relay output will stop even if it is still within the time set in the schedule.
How to Configure the Weekly Schedule
Configure the time to perform relay output for each day of the week from, Sunday to Saturday. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
1.
Configure "Start Time" and "End Time" for each day.
2.
After done, click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to start the relay output.
00:00 - 23:59 ■ End Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to end the relay output. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59
How to delete the Weekly Schedule
1.
Return settings to their default values, and click
[Update]
.
447
System Settings (Station View)
How to configure Daily Schedule
Configure the time at which relay output will be performed, in units of one day. A schedule one year from the set day can be configured. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
Calendar Set Schedule List
1.
Select the day to set a schedule from "Calendar."
2.
Configure "Start Time" and "End Time," and click
[Add]
.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
448
System Settings (Station View) ■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ End Time Description Set the time to start the relay output.
00:00 - 23:59 Settings Default values Set the time to end the relay output. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59
How to delete Daily Schedule
1.
Select the day for which to delete a schedule from "Calendar."
2.
Schedules for the selected day are displayed in the "Set Schedule List." • If a weekly schedule is configured for the selected day of the week, it will also be displayed.
3.
Click
[Delete]
for the schedule to be deleted, and click
[Update]
.
• Refer to “How to delete the Weekly Schedule (→page 447)”
to delete a weekly schedule.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
5.2.2
Option Relay Control Authentication Key (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS( *))
Description Settings Default values
If “Option Relay Control (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) (→page 442)”
is
set to "Enable" and "Speed Dials / Favorites" -
Relay Output may be controlled.
“TLS (→page 524)” is set to "Enable" on the
requesting station, configure the key used to decrypt encrypted communication.
If this matches the "Option Relay Control Key" of the station that performs the operation, the To use this, be sure to configure "Speed Dials / Favorites" -
“Option Relay Control Key (→page 525)” .
1-20 digits Note • Only one Option Relay Control Authentication Key can be set for each station. It will be shared with multiple Relay Output.
449
System Settings (Station View)
6. Paging Settings
Important • All pages, groups pages, message pages, and external input pages cannot be sent to VoIP Phone.
6.1
Paging Origination (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure settings related to outgoing paging.
■ Paging Timeout [sec]♦ ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the time for outgoing paging duration.
10-600sec / 1 sec step 30 sec ■ Paging Wait Timer [sec] (for IX-MV7-*)♦ ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the time to wait for a response from all destination stations when outgoing paging is activated. Paging starts after this time without a response form all destination.
1-20sec (by 1 sec) 10 sec Important • A page may not be sent to a station if a response is received after "Paging Wait Timer [sec]" elapses. If multiple stations receive pages, configure a longer Paging Wait Timer.
Note • The Paging Wait Timer for IX-MV is set to "10 sec" and cannot be changed.
■ Urgent Page Response (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for the paging destination station can answer the urgent page.
• Enable • Disable Disable 450
System Settings (Station View) Important • If the station being called is IX-MV, end operations can be performed even if Urgent Page Response is set to "Enable." ■ Lock Paging (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable to lock paging function.
• Enable: Page button will be hidden • Disable Disable Note
.
451
System Settings (Station View)
6.2
All Page (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
When paging all stations, the default setting is set to multicast. When unicast is required, configure the following settings.
Address Book Station List 1 2 Important • Unicast can reach up to 50 stations. If you need to page more than 50 stations are to be paged at once, use multicast.
• When paging stations in multicast, configure
“Multicast Address (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*)) (→page 389)”
.
How to configure All Page
1.
Search for stations to transmit via unicast from "Station List."
2.
Place a check in the cell corresponding to Step1.
• Unchecked: Multicast transmission • Checked: Unicast transmission • By default, all are set to "Unchecked" (multicast transmission).
3.
After done complete, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
452
System Settings (Station View)
6.3
Option Input Page (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure contact input paging.
.
■ Destination Description Settings Default values ■ Group Number Description Settings Default values ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the destination group for paging.
• All Page: Page all stations that are registered in the address book. • Group: Page the group that is set in "Group Number." All Page Set the destination group for paging.
Enter the group number, or click
[Open]
to select group.
01 - 99, or select from groups registered in
“Group (for Master) (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 414)” .
Set the priority for paging.
• Normal • Urgent Normal 453
System Settings (Station View) ■ Message File Name Description Settings Select the message to be sent for message paging. Available when "Message Page" is selected
in "Option Input" - “Function (→page 437)” .
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values None ■ Play Count [time(s)] Description Settings Default values Set the play count for message paging.
1 - 20 times 1 time 454
System Settings (Station View)
7. Function Settings
7.1
Door Release (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) 7.1.1
Door Release Assignment
Configure the connected station and the authentication key to release the door during a call.
For IX-RS-* settings, refer to
“Door Release Assignment (for IX-RS-*) (→page 543)”
.
■ Contact Assignment Description Settings Default values Select which relay output will be used for door release during call or monitoring.
• Originating Station: Use origination station relay output for door release.
• Destination Station: Use destination station relay output for door release.
Destination Station ■ Authentication Key Description Settings Default values When "Destination Station" is selected in "Contact Assignment", set the Authentication Key for door release.
Authentication key must match with the destination station's authentication key, which is set in
"Relay Output" - “Door Release Authorization (except IXW-MA) (→page 443)”
to allow door release.
• IX-MV7-*: 1-20 digits • IX-MV: 1-4 digits Random characters (compatible with default value of "Relay Output" - "Authentication Key") Note • If "Automatically configure door release for all stations?" was set to "No" in
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
, a default value of "Authentication Key" will not be configured.
• The default values for the authentication key and door release key vary depending on the station type set in "IX Support Tool Settings" of
“Create new system/import setting data (→page 123)”
.
– System without IX-MV, IX-DA, or IX-BA: 20 digits.
– System with IX-MV, IX-DA, or IX-BA: 4 digits • If the destination station's Authentication Key is four characters or longer, the Door Release Key for IX-MV will release the door if the first four digits match.
455
System Settings (Station View)
7.2
Network Camera Integration (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure network camera profile (video profile) and event related settings.
To configure the settings, register a network camera in the Address Book of the IX-MV7-* or IX-MV which will receive
the event in "Address Book" - “How to create Network Camera List (→page 409)”
.
Important • For network camera event registration,
“Association Settings (→page 160)” must be configured for the IX-MV7-* or IX-MV. If
the programming PC is not connected to the same network or cannot communicate with multicast transmission, it is not be possible to configure. (this is because network camera events are obtained over multicast via IX-MV7-* or IX-MV when registering network camera events).
7.2.1
Profile Setting
Configure when changing the profile selected when a network camera is registered in "Address Book" -
“How to create Network Camera List (→page 409)”
.
If no network camera is registered, this will not be shown.
■ Profile Description Settings Default values Select the profile of the network camera.
On the first screen, the profile that was selected when registering the network camera will be displayed. Refer to the manual of the network camera for the details.
7.2.2
Event Registration
Configure the network camera event to register in IX-MV7-* or IX-MV.
When the registered event is received, network camera monitoring will be performed and the notification tone will be played, or the outgoing call command will be sent to the set Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*).
How to configure network camera event setup
The network camera event must be registered.
Click
[Open Network Camera Event Registry]
. The "Open Network Camera Event Registry" window will be shown.
456
System Settings (Station View) 1 2 3 4 5 If no event is obtained, this will not be shown.
1.
Select the station to register the network camera event from "Station List."
2.
Select the network camera(s) to monitor events from "Network Camera List" (multiple selections allowed).
• Network cameras registered in the Address Book in "Address Book" -
“How to create Network Camera List (→page 409)” will be shown.
3.
Click
[Get Network Camera Events]
.
(Obtaining the events may take several minutes.) • Once events are successfully obtained, they will be shown in "Event List."
4.
Select the events to monitor from "Event List." (Multiple selections allowed) • For details on events, refer to the manual of the network camera.
457
System Settings (Station View)
5.
Click
[Register]
• Click
[Cancel]
to register the event.
• The network cameras and events registered in event registry will be shown.
to back to the "Network Camera Integration" screen without registering the event.
If no event is registered, this will not be shown.
■ Event Description Settings Default values Displays topics (events) registered in
“How to configure network camera event setup (→page 456)” .
To delete the registered event, click
[Update]
with "Event" set as blank.
For details of the Event, refer to the manual of the network camera.
■ Function (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select the function when receive the topic from the network camera.
• Monitor: Play the notification tone and begin network camera monitoring.
• Call: Place an outgoing call from the station configured in
“Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)” .
Configure “ID (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)”
,
“Password (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)” , and “Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)”
“Call Destination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 460)” “Priority (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 460)” .
458
System Settings (Station View) ■ Event Tone (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Select the tone to be played when receiving event from the network camera.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Call Pattern 3 ■ ID (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values -
If "Call" is set in “Function (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 458)” , configure the administrator ID of the
station set in “Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)” .
1-32 alphanumeric characters ■ Password (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values -
If "Call" is set in “Function (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 458)”
, configure the administrator password of the station set in
“Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)” .
1-32 alphanumeric characters Note • "Password" will be displayed as "****" in the Settings screen.
■ Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) Description
If "Call" is set in “Function (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 458)”
, configure from which station to make the outgoing call.
Enter the station number directly, or click
[Open]
to select a station.
For the configured station, set
“CGI Functionality (→page 473)” to "Enable."
Settings Default values Select from the stations registered in
“Address Book (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 406)” .
IXW-MA cannot be selected.
459
System Settings (Station View) ■ Call Destination (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the destination station number or group number when the station configured in
“Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)” makes an outgoing call.
Number: 3-5 digits Group Number: 01 - 99 ■ Priority (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select the call priority when the station configured in
“Call Origination (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 459)” makes an outgoing call.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent ■ Event Tone (for IX-MV)♠ Description Settings Select the tone to be played when receiving event from the network camera. The tone will be the same for all network cameras and events registered in the station.
• Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Call Pattern 3 ■ Play count of Event Tone♠ Description Settings Default values
Set the play count for Network Camera Event Tone when “Function (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 458)”
is set to "Monitor." The ringtone count will be the same for all network cameras and events registered to the station. If "Call" is set, the ringtone count for the event notification tone will be 1 only.
• Infinite: Play the ringtone while receiving an event that occurred on the network camera.
• 1 - 20 times 1 time 460
System Settings (Station View)
7.3
Paging Settings (except for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, or IXW-MA)
Configure incoming page settings.
7.3.1
Paging Pretone Setting
■ Paging Pretone Description Settings Default values Select the Paging Pretone.
• None • Call Pattern 1 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 2 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 3 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 4 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 5 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 6 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Tremolo Sound (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Busy Response Tone (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Operation Sound (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Error (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
(Except for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*) and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*).) Pre Tone 2 Important • Configure a tone with a shorter duration than the paging pretone on the paging origination station. Configuring a longer tone might prevent the station from receiving audio when paging begins.
461
System Settings (Station View)
7.4
Bathroom Call (for IXW-MA)
This function cannot be used outside Japan.
462
System Settings (Station View)
7.5
Configure this section when email notification of station operation is required.
Be sure to configure
“DNS (→page 384)” for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*).
7.5.1
Server Settings
■ SMTP Server♠ Description Settings Default values ■ SMTP Port♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the SMTP server.
When choosing an IPv4 address, enter the IP address or the hostname.
For an IPv6 address, configure using the IP address (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*)) or hostname. Configure this if connecting by hostname.
If a hostname is used, configure
1 - 255 alphanumeric characters Set the port number for SMTP.
1 - 65535 25 ■ SMTP Encryption♠ Description Settings Default values Select the encryption type for SMTP.
• OFF • TLS • STARTTLS OFF 463
7.5.2
Authentication Settings
System Settings (Station View) ■ SMTP Authentication♠ Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for SMTP Authentication.
• ON • OFF OFF ■ Mode♠ Description Settings Default values Select the SMTP Authentication Mode.
• LOGIN • CRAM-MD5 LOGIN ■ ID♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Password♠ Description Settings Default values Set the ID for SMTP authentication.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the Password for SMTP authentication.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Note • "Password" will be displayed as "*****" on the screen.
464
7.5.3
Email Addresses
System Settings (Station View) ■ Destination 1♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Destination 2♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Destination 3♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Source Address♠ Description Settings Default values Set the destination email address.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the destination email address.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the destination email address.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Set the source email address.
1-64 alphanumeric characters 465
System Settings (Station View)
7.5.4
Email Event Trigger
Set the email event trigger which initiates the message sending process. Configure the email event trigger for each destination address.
■ Outgoing Normal Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an outgoing call is placed at "Normal" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Incoming Normal Call (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an incoming call is received at "Normal" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 466
System Settings (Station View) ■ Outgoing Priority Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an outgoing call is placed at "Priority" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Incoming Priority Call (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an incoming call is received at "Priority" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Outgoing Urgent Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an outgoing call is placed at "Urgent" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Incoming Urgent Call (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when an incoming call is received at "Urgent" priority.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Door Release Activated (for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IX-RS-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Door Release is activated.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Call Failed (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send email when outgoing call has failed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Latch Reset (IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G only) Description Settings Default values Send email when reset latch relay output. ("Latch Output" is selected in "Relay Output" -
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 467
System Settings (Station View) ■ Error Description Settings Default values Send email when a communication error has occurred.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Station Restarted Description Settings Default values Send email when the station has reset.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ SD Card Error (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send email when a microSD access error is detected. If the error is detected continuously, mail will not be sent an additional time.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Recording Memory Full (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send email when a microSD card meets following criteria. If the error is detected continuously, mail will not be sent an additional time.
• When “Prevent Overwrite♠ (→page 486)” is set to "Enable"
– Recorded recordings exceeds 950 – Storage capacity remaining 5%
• When “Prevent Overwrite♠ (→page 486)” is set to "Disable"
– Recorded recordings exceeds 999 – Storage capacity remaining 0% • Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Line Supervision (Passed) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Line Supervision is passed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Line Supervision (Failed) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Line Supervision is failed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 468
System Settings (Station View) ■ Device Check (Passed) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Device Check is passed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Device Check (Failed) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send email when Device Check is failed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Subject♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Subject of email per Event Trigger. This will be used for all recipient addresses.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Important • "UTF-8" encoding is used for "Subject." Depending on the email client, the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, set the encoding method to "UTF-8."
7.5.5
Periodic Log Transmission (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure settings related to sending periodic logs. These can be configured for each recipient email address.
■ Periodic Log Transmission Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for send station log periodically.
• Enable • Disable Disable ■ Periodic Log Transmit Time Description Settings Default values Set the time to send the periodic log.
00:00 - 23:59 00:00 469
System Settings (Station View) ■ Periodic Log Transmit Interval Description Settings Default values Select the interval to send the periodic log.
1 Day - 7 Day Daily ■ Periodic Log Transmission Subject Description Settings Default values Set the email subject for Periodic Log Transmission. This is used for all destination addresses.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Important • "UTF-8" encoding is used for "Periodic Log Transmission Subject." Depending on the email client, the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, set the encoding method to "UTF-8." 470
System Settings (Station View)
7.5.6
Send Test Email (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Send a test email to the address specified in
.
Click
[Send]
to send a test email to the configured address.
Important
to communicate with the system.
Example of sending an email message: When sending a test email from the station (Station Number: 001, Station Name: Intercom Station 1, Location: Office).
From Date and time To CC Subject Text △△△△@△△△△△ .com
11/20/2018 15:22 [email protected]
001 Intercom Station 1 Test Email Test Email sent at "20181120 15:22:46." Station Number: "001" Station Name: [Intercom Station 1] Station location: [Office] Important • "UTF-8" encoding is used for "Subject," "Periodic Log Transmission Subject," and "Image Filename." Depending on the email client, the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, set the encoding method to "UTF-8." 471
System Settings (Station View)
7.5.7
Additional Settings (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
■ Attach Image♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Image Filename♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable to send an image with the email when "Outgoing Normal Call", "Outgoing Priority Call" and "Outgoing Urgent Call" is selected in
“Email Event Trigger (→page 466)” .
• Enable • Disable Disable Set the filename of a image file when "Attach Image" is enabled.
1-64 alphanumeric characters Important • "UTF-8" encoding is used for "Image Filename." Depending on the email client, the characters may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, set the encoding method to "UTF-8." 472
System Settings (Station View)
7.6
CGI Integration
For the details of CGI functionality, contact the local Aiphone representative.
■ CGI Functionality Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for CGI functionality.
• Enable • Disable Disable Important • CGI controls may fail when multiple CGI commands are received.
473
System Settings (Station View)
7.7
SIF Integration
For the details of SIF functionality, contact the local Aiphone representative.
7.7.1
SIF Functionality
Description Settings Default values
7.7.2
SIP URI Format (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠
Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for SIF functionality.
• Enable • Disable Disable Select Enable / Disable when SIP URI Format is used for station destination. If set to "Enable," TERMID cannot be used.
• Enable • Disable Disable 474
System Settings (Station View)
7.7.3
SIF Settings (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure SIF recipient and communication settings. 16 SIF settings can be set.
Note • There are two ways to configure SIF communication: manually configuring settings or uploading a file in
“SIF Communication Settings (sif.ini) (→page 484)”
. The latest setting will take priority.
■ Program Type♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Program Type for SIF.
0000-1111
■ IPv4♠ Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6♠ Description Set the SIF IPv4 destination address.
Go to
“DNS (→page 384)” to set Hostname..
1.0.0.1 - 223.255.255.254 or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Settings Set the SIF IPv6 destination address.
Go to
“DNS (→page 384)” to set Hostname.
::FF:0 - FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname (1-64 alphanumeric characters) Default values ■ Destination Port♠ Description Settings Default values Set the Port Number for destination.
1-65535 475
System Settings (Station View) ■ SSL♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Connection♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for SSL.
• Disable • Enable Select Socket / HTTP for connection.
• Socket • HTTP 476
System Settings (Station View)
7.7.4
Transmission Trigger (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
be configured for each recipient.
■ Begin Outgoing Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when outgoing call is placed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Communication (Source) (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning communication.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Door Release Indication (for IX-MV7-* and IX-RS-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when door release request is sent.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Communication (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending communication.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Change contact Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when Option Input contact or Relay Output contact is changed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 477
System Settings (Station View) ■ Unit error Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when communication error has occurred.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin broadcast (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when paging is started.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End broadcast (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when paging has ended.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Transfer (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when communication begins after transferring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Transfer (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when communication ends after transferring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Periodical Transmission Description Settings Default values Periodically send the station status using SIF command. The interval is set in
“Periodical Transmission (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) (→page 483)”
.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Initialization Notice Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the station is booted.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 478
System Settings (Station View) ■ End Outgoing Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending a outgoing call.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Incoming Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning a incoming call.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Incoming Call (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending a incoming call.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Latch Reset (except IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command by reset latch relay output. ("Latch Output" is selected in "Relay Output" -
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Change Call Destination (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when changing call destination by delay time or schedule, or making an absent transfer, delay transfer or schedule transfer by the destination station. • Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Call Failure (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when failed to place a call.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Incoming Transfer Call (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning Absent Transfer, Delay Transfer or Schedule Transfer. • Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 479
System Settings (Station View) ■ Begin On Hold (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning a call on hold.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End On Hold (IX-MV7-* only) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending a call on hold.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Incoming Page (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning a incoming page.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Incoming Page (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending a incoming page.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Paging Failure (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when failed to send a page.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Monitoring (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning monitoring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Monitoring (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending monitoring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 480
System Settings (Station View) ■ Monitoring Failure (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when failed monitoring.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Monitored (except IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning being monitored.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Monitored (except IX-MV7-* and IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending being monitored.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Communication (Destination) (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning a communication.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Privacy (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning privacy mode.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Privacy (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending privacy mode.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Keypad Input (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when entering number using a keypad.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 481
System Settings (Station View) ■ Speed Dial Input (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when pressing a speed dial button.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Begin Record (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when beginning recording.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ End Record (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when ending recording.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Recording Memory Full (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when a microSD card meets following criteria. If the error is detected continuously, SIF command will not be sent an additional time.
• When “Prevent Overwrite♠ (→page 486)” is set to "Enable."
– Recorded recordings exceeds 950 – Storage capacity remaining 5%
• When “Prevent Overwrite♠ (→page 486)” is set to "Disable."
– Recorded recordings exceeds 999 – Storage capacity remaining 0% • Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Passed Line Supervision (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the result of Line Supervision is passed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Failed Line Supervision (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the result of Line Supervision is failed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Passed Device Check (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the result of Device Check is passed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send 482
System Settings (Station View) ■ Failed Device Check (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when the result of Device Check is failed.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ SD Card Error (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when a microSD access error is detected.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ SIP Registration Failure (except IXW-MA) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when REGISTER request for SIP server has a failure.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send ■ Network Camera Event (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Send SIF command when receiving event from the network camera.
• Checked: Send • Unchecked: Do not send Unchecked: Do not send
7.7.5
Periodical Transmission (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
■ Periodical Transmission Interval♦ Description Settings Default values
• If set to 1[sec]-59[sec]: Set from 1 - 59 sec (by 1 sec).
• If set to 0[min]-1440[min]: Set from 0 - 1440 min (by 1 min).
0 min (do not send) 483
7.7.6
SIF File Management
System Settings (Station View) Important • To upload a SIF setting file,
“Association Settings (→page 160)” must be preformed in the uploading station. And the
programming PC and the station must be connected to the same network.
■ SIF Communication Settings (sif.ini) Description Settings Default values -
Upload: Click
[Browse]
, select a file, and click
[Upload]
.
Download: Click
[Download]
to save the file.
■ SIF Parameter Settings (sif_conf.ini) Description Settings Default values -
Use "sif_conf.ini" to upload or download SIF details if “Program Type♠ (→page 475)” is set to
"0000," "0001," or "0011." Upload: Click
[Browse]
to select a file, and then click
[Upload]
.
Download: Click
[Download]
to save a file.
484
System Settings (Station View)
7.8
Record (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*))
Configure settings related to video and audio recording. If there is no video, configure only audio recording. When recording audio during a call, audio will be recorded from both sides.
The following SD standards are required to record video and audio.
Standards
microSDHC microSDXC (for IX-MV7-*)
Memory Capacity
Max. 32 GB Max. 128 GB FAT32
Format
exFAT
Speed Class
SD speed class 10 SD speed class 10 UHS speed class 1 Important • A microSD card is not included with this station.
• The device may not operate correctly depending on the microSD card.
• If the card contains data other than video/audio files, it may not have enough space to record video/audio.
• Depending on the size of the image, recording with the network camera may not be possible.
Note • A maximum of 999 video/audio files can be saved. However, this may vary depending on the size of the video/audio files and the capacity of the microSD card.
• Line Supervision and Device Check results are also saved to the microSD card.
• Aiphone assumes no responsibility for microSD cards. Please be aware of this in advance.
■ Record Mode (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select the Record Mode.
• No Recording • Event Recording: Automatically record when the trigger set in " Record Event" has occurred.
• 24/7 Recording: Keep recording 24/7 while station is operating normally.
No Recording 485
System Settings (Station View) ■ Record Event Description Settings Default values Configure the trigger in use to start recording video/audio automatically. For stations other than IX-MV7-*,"Record Mode" must be set to "Event Recording." Select from the following. (Multiple selections allowed) • Not selected: Video/audio is not automatically recorded.
• Incoming Call (for IX-MV7-*): Record start when station receives Incoming Call. If a call is automatically answered, recording will start when communication starts.
• Communication (Master) (for IX-MV7-*): Recording starts when communication begins.
• Monitor (for IX-MV7-*): Recording starts when monitoring begins. Recording is not possible during Scan Monitor.
• Outgoing Call (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)): Video recording will start when a call is placed. Audio recording will start once the outgoing call is answered. For IX-SSA(-*), audio recording will start once the outgoing call is answered.
• Communication (Door) (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)): Recording starts when communication begins.
• Monitored (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)): Recording starts when station is Monitored. Recording is not possible during Scan Monitor.
• Schedule (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)): Record during schedule set in
“Weekly Schedule (→page 488)” .
Not selected Important • If "Schedule" is selected, video/audio recording will continue for the time configured in
, regardless of what is configured for other triggers.
■ Recorded Device (IX-MV7-* only) Description Settings Default values Set the Recorded Device when IX-MV7-* is displaying video from an IX Station and a Network Camera simultaneously.
• IX Station: Record IX Station video and audio.
• Network Camera: Record Network Camera video and IX station audio.
IX Station ■ Prevent Overwrite♠ Description Settings Default values Set prevent overwriting the old recorded file, when the number of saved video/audio files, the entire storage space of the microSD card, or the video/audio recording storage space of the microSD card is full.
• Enable • Disable Disable ■ Video Recording File Length♠ Description Settings Default values Select the recording file length to split recording. Once recording has reached this time, a new recording file will be made automatically.
• 5 min • 10 min • 20 min • 40 min • 60 min 10 min 486
System Settings (Station View) Note • If the Video Recording File Length is changed during recording video/audio, the setting will not be applied until the recording is completed.
■ Event Recording Timer (for IX-MV7-*) ♠ Description Settings Default values Set the recording duration when the event trigger has occurred.
• Disable: Does not stop until the operating status ends or the record button is tapped.
• 5 sec • 10 sec • 30 sec Disable ■ Manual Recording (for IX-MV7-*) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for manual recording.
• Enable • Disable Enable ■ Audio Recording (for IX-MV7-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for audio recording with video.
• Enable • Disable Enable 487
System Settings (Station View)
7.8.1
Schedule Settings (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) 7.8.1.1 Weekly Schedule
Configure this when "Schedule" is selected in for each day.
.
Configure the video and audio recording time for each day from Sunday to Saturday. Up to 12 schedules can be set
How to configure a Weekly Schedule
1.
Configure "Start Time" and "End Time" for each day of week.
2.
When done, click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values Set the Start Time to begin recording.
00:00 - 23:59 ■ End Time Description Settings Default values Set the End Time to stop recording. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," the end time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59
How to delete a Weekly Schedule
1.
Return the settings to their default values and click
[Update]
.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
488
System Settings (Station View)
7.9
Communication Audio Messages (for IX-RS-*, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*), IX-SS-2G)
Configure communication audio message.
Communication Audio Messages: Send messages to destination station when beginning communication or by keypad input from the other station (IX-MV7-*) .
7.9.1
Start Communication
■ Message Description Settings Default values Select the message to be sent to destination station when beginning communication.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
None 489
System Settings (Station View)
7.9.2
Code Received
Configure the message to be sent when the code is received. Four patterns can be set for the received code and message.
■ Code Description Settings Default values Set the code to play message by keypad input from IX-MV7-*.
1-20 digits Note • Enter " Authentication Key " on the numerical keypad (if the Authentication Key is "0000" enter " ■ Message Description Settings Default values 0000 ").
Set the code to play message by keypad input from IX-MV7-*.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
None 490
System Settings (Station View)
7.10 Chime (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA)
Configure the chime tone to be played from this station linked with the set schedule.
7.10.1 Weekly Schedule
Configure the start time and chime tone to play for each day of the week, from Sunday to Saturday. 50 schedules can be set for each day.
How to configure a Weekly Schedule
1.
Configure "Start Time" and "Chime" for each day of week.
2.
When done, click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Start Time Description Settings Default values Set the Time to ring Chime.
00:00 - 23:59 491
System Settings (Station View) ■ Chime Description Settings Default values Set the sound for chime.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
None
How to delete a Weekly Schedule
1.
Return the settings to their default values and click
[Update]
.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
492
System Settings (Station View)
7.10.2 Daily Schedule
Configure the start time and the chime tone in units of one day.
A schedule one year from the set day can be configured. 50 schedules can be set for each day.
Calendar Chime Schedule List
How to configure Daily Schedule
1.
Select the day to set a schedule from "Calendar."
2.
Configure "Start Time" and "Chime," and click
[Add]
.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
493
System Settings (Station View) ■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ Chime Description Settings Set the Time to ring Chime.
00:00 - 23:59 Default values Set the sound for chime.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
None
How to delete Daily Schedule
1.
Select the day for which to delete a schedule from "Calendar."
2.
Schedules for the selected day are displayed in the Chime "Set Schedule List." • If a weekly schedule is configured for the selected day of the week, it will also be shown.
3.
Click
[Delete]
for the schedule that you want to delete, and click
[Update]
.
• Refer to “How to delete a Weekly Schedule (→page 492)” to delete a weekly schedule.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
494
System Settings (Station View)
7.11 CSR
Generate the signature request (CSR) submitted when a request is made to the Server Certificate Authority (CA) Important • To generate a signature request,
“Association Settings (→page 160)” must have been completed on the station to generate
the request, and the PC must be able to communicate with the system.
How to generate a CSR
1.
Input each item.
2.
Click
[Create]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to back to the Settings screen without generating the CSR.
4.
Specify the save location and store your created file in it.
• The default file name is "CSR." This file name must be changed.
5.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Country Description Settings Default values Set the country name.
The two-letter code ■ State/County/Region Description Settings Default values Set the State/County/Region.
1-128 alphanumeric characters 495
System Settings (Station View) ■ City/Locality Description Settings Default values ■ Organization Description Settings Default values Set the City/Locality.
1-128 alphanumeric characters Set the organization name.
1-128 alphanumeric characters ■ Organizational Unit Description Settings Default values Set the department name.
1-64 alphanumeric characters ■ Common Name Description Settings Default values Set the common name.
1-64 alphanumeric characters The station's IP address is listed.
496
System Settings (Station View)
7.12 SSL Certificate
Upload the Server Certificate received from the Certificate Authority (CA) as well as the CA certificate.
Important
be able to communicate with the system.
• When uploading the SSL certificate, restart the station. This may take approx. 10 minutes in total. The station will not function until complete.
• The server certificate must be uploaded when uploading a CA certificate.
How to upload SSL Certificates
1.
Click
[Browse]
in the Server Certificate to select a file.
2.
If required, click
[Browse]
in the CA Certificate to select a file.
3.
Click
[Upload]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
• Click , and upload the Server Certificate and CA Certificate files.
• When uploading is completed, the station will restart.
[Cancel]
to back to the Settings screen without uploading the file.
5.
Click
[OK]
.
497
System Settings (Station View)
7.13 IEEE 802.1X
(except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure the settings for IEEE802.1X Authentication.
Important • Authentication may be impossible if there is a time difference between the authentication server and station.
• Upload the certificate prior to configuration.
• To upload/delete an IEEE802.1X certificate,
“Association Settings (→page 160)” must have been completed on the station to
upload/delete, and the PC must be able to communicate with the system.
• When changes to IEEE802.1X settings are updated on the station, or after uploading a certificate, restart the station. Restart may take up to 10 minutes in total. The station will not operate until restart is complete.
■ IEEE 802.1X
Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for IEEE802.1X function.
• Enable • Disable Disable ■ EAP♠ Description Settings Select the EAP method for IEEE802.1X authentication when
is set to "Enable".
• TLS • PEAP TLS Default values ■ EAP User Name♠ Description Settings Default values Set the EAP User Name.
1 - 32 alphanumeric characters ■ EAP Password♠ Description Settings Default values Set the EAP Password when "EAP" is set to "PEAP".
1 - 32 alphanumeric characters 498
System Settings (Station View) Note • "EAP Password" is shown as "*****" in the Settings screen.
How to upload IEEE802.1X certificates
1.
Click
[Browse]
next to the Certificate Authority to select a file.
2.
If
“EAP♠ (→page 498)” is set to "TLS," click
[Browse]
next to the Client Certificate to select a file.
3.
If "
“EAP♠ (→page 498)” " is set to "TLS," click
[Browse]
next to Client Private Key to select a file.
4.
Click
[Upload]
.
5.
Click
[OK]
• Click and upload each file.
• When uploading is completed, the station will restart.
[Cancel]
to back to the Settings screen without uploading the file.
6.
Click
[OK]
.
How to delete IEEE802.1X certificates
1.
Click
[Delete]
to delete the uploaded file.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
499
System Settings (Station View)
7.14 Display Mode (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure IX-MV7-* Master UI Mode, for both Standard and Receptionist modes.
7.14.1 Master UI Mode
Description Settings Default values Set the User Interface Mode.
• Standard: All functions can be used.
• Receptionist: Only outgoing call can be used. Refer to
“Receptionist Mode (→page 502)” for
detail settings.
Standard Important • When the "Master UI Mode" setting is applied to the station it will restart. This may take up to 10 minutes and the station cannot be used until it has finished restarting.
500
System Settings (Station View)
7.14.2 Standard Mode
■ Home Screen Description Settings
Select the layout of top image when “Master UI Mode (→page 500)” is set to "Standard."
• Option 1: • Option 2: Default values Option 1 501
System Settings (Station View)
7.14.3 Receptionist Mode
Configure Receptionist Mode screen if
“Master UI Mode (→page 500)” was set to "Receptionist."
Important • In receptionist mode, the following operations are limited.
– Calling can only be done in the method configured in
“Button Function (→page 508)” .
– Auto Answer is enabled even if
“Auto Answer♠ (→page 431)” was set to "OFF." However, the call will not be received if
“Reject Incoming Call (→page 509)” was set to "Enable."
– For "Option Input" -
“Function (→page 437)” , only "Call" and "Turn LCD On" are valid.
7.14.3.1 Color Scheme
Description Settings Select the Color Scheme of Receptionist Mode.
Example where "Layout 1" was set in
• Light: • Dark: Default values Light 502
System Settings (Station View)
7.14.3.2 Screen Layout
Description Settings Select the Screen Layout of top image for Receptionist Mode.
Example where "Light" was set in
• Layout 1: • Layout 2: • Layout 3: Default values Layout 1 503
System Settings (Station View)
Customizing each screen layout
The layout of each characters screen's, images, and button displays can be customized.
The following spaces are customized by configuring
“Company Information (→page 505)”“Greeting Information
(→page 506)”“Images (→page 507)”“Button Function (→page 508)” .
Layout 1
“Receptionist Image (→page 507)”
Recommended resolution (W x H): 800 x 340
“Company Information (→page 505)”
Recommended resolution (W x H): 800 x 100
“Greeting Information (→page 506)”
Recommended resolution (W x H): 400 x 240
“Button 1 (→page 508)” “Button 2 (→page 508)”
Layout 2
Recommended resolution (W x H): 460 x 80
“Company Information (→page 505)”
“Button 3 (→page 508)” “Button 4 (→page 508)”
“Receptionist Image (→page 507)”
Recommended resolution (W x H): 460 x 480
“Greeting Information (→page 506)”
“Button 2 (→page 508)” “Button 3 (→page 508)”
Recommended resolution (W x H): 400 x 240
Layout 3
“Receptionist Image (→page 507)”
Recommended resolution (W x H): 800 x 120
Recommended resolution (W x H): 400 x 120
“Greeting Information (→page 506)”
“Company Information (→page 505)”
“Button 1 (→page 508)” “Button 2 (→page 508)” “Button 3 (→page 508)”
504
7.14.3.3 Company Information
System Settings (Station View) ■ Name Description Settings Default values ■ Text Size♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Bold Description Settings Default values ■ Text Color Description Settings Default values Enter the Company Information.
0-40 alphanumeric characters Set the text size of Company Information.
12 - 24 pt (by 1pt) 12pt Select ON / OFF for Bold text.
• OFF • ON OFF Set the text color of Company Information.
• Option 1 "Black" if "Light" was set in
“Color Scheme (→page 502)” . "White" if "Dark" was set.
• Option 2
"Blue" if “Color Scheme (→page 502)”
was set to "Light." "Orange" if "Dark" was set.
Option 1 505
7.14.3.4 Greeting Information
System Settings (Station View) ■ Greeting Description Settings Default values ■ Text Size♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Bold Description Settings Default values ■ Text Color Description Settings Default values Enter Greeting text.
0-100 alphanumeric characters (Up to 10 line breaks can be inserted.) Set the text size of Greeting.
12 - 70 pt (by 1 pt) 12pt Select ON / OFF for Bold text.
• OFF • ON OFF Set the text color of Company Information.
• Option 1 "Black" if "Light" was set in
“Color Scheme (→page 502)” . "Blue" if "Dark" was set.
• Option 2
"Blue" if “Color Scheme (→page 502)”
was set to "Light." "Orange" if "Dark" was set.
Option 1 506
System Settings (Station View)
7.14.3.5 Images
Upload the image file to be shown on the reception screen. Upload an image file that matches the layout set in
“Screen Layout (→page 503)” . Refer to
“Customizing each screen layout (→page 504)”
for the recommended resolution of the image file for each screen's layout.
■ Company Image Description Settings Register an image file to be displayed in Image Space 1.
Supported file format • Message File Name: within 20 characters (excluding extension).
• File format: png • Resolution Width: 400 - 800 pixels Height: 80 - 480 pixels Register: Click
[Browse]
Delete: Place a check in to select a file.
Supported file format: png
[Delete]
.
Default values ■ Greeting Image Description Settings Default values Register an image file to be displayed in Image Space 2.
Supported file format • Message File Name: within 20 characters (excluding extension).
• File format: png • Resolution Width: 400 - 800 pixels Height: 80 - 480 pixels Register: Click
[Browse]
to select a file.
Delete: Place a check in
[Delete]
.
■ Receptionist Image Description Settings Default values Register an image file to be displayed in Variable Space.
Supported file format • Message File Name: within 20 characters (excluding extension).
• File format: png • Resolution Width: 400 - 800 pixels Height: 80 - 480 pixels Register: Click
[Browse]
to select a file.
Delete: Place a check in
[Delete]
.
507
System Settings (Station View)
7.14.3.6 Button Function
Configure the buttons to be shown on the reception screen and their function. Refer to
“Customizing each screen layout (→page 504)” for configuration.
■ Button 1 Description Settings Default values ■ Button 2 Description Settings Set the function of Button 1.
• Group Call: Call group number set by
“Group Call Destination (→page 509)” .
• Select By Name: Select destination station by name.
• Select By List: Select destination station by list.
• Enter Number: Enter destination station number by keypad.
• Hide: Button is not displayed.
Hide Configure the function of Button 2.
• Group Call: Call group number set by
“Group Call Destination (→page 509)” .
• Select By Name: Select destination station by name.
• Select By List: Select destination station by list.
• Enter Number: Enter destination station number by keypad.
• Hide: Button is not displayed.
Hide Default values ■ Button 3 Description Settings Default values ■ Button 4 Description Settings Default values Configure the function of Button 3.
• Group Call: Call group number set by
“Group Call Destination (→page 509)” .
• Select By Name: Select destination station by name.
• Select By List: Select destination station by list.
• Enter Number: Enter destination station number by keypad.
• Hide: Button is not displayed.
Hide Configure the function of Button 4.
• Group Call: Call group number set by
“Group Call Destination (→page 509)” .
• Select By Name: Select destination station by name.
• Select By List: Select destination station by list.
• Enter Number: Enter destination station number by keypad.
• Hide: Button is not displayed.
Hide 508
System Settings (Station View) ■ Button Name for Group Call Description Settings Default values Configure the name of the button when "Group Call" is selected for "Button 1" through "Button 4." If there is more than one "Group Call" set, they share the name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Button Name for Select By Name Description Settings Default values Configure the name of the button when "Select By Name" is selected for "Button 1" through "Button 4." If there is more than one "Select By Name" set, they share the name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Button Name for Select By List Description Settings Default values Configure the name of the button when "Select By List" is selected for "Button 1" through "Button 4." If there is more than one "Select By List" set, they share the name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters ■ Button Name for Enter Number Description Settings Default values Configure the name of the button when "Enter Number" is selected for "Button 1" through "Button 4." If there is more than one "Enter Number" set, they share the name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters -
7.14.3.7 Group Call Destination
Description Settings Default values
7.14.3.8 Reject Incoming Call
Configure the call destination group number when a button is pressed, if "Group Call" was selected for "Button 1" through "Button 4." If "Group Call" is set for multiple buttons, they will all share the same call destination group.
Enter the group number directly, or click
[Open Group List]
to choose a group.
01 - 99 Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for incoming calls in Receptionist Mode.
• Enable: Do not receive incoming calls.
• Disable: Receive incoming calls.
Disable 509
System Settings (Station View)
7.15 Bathroom Link
This function cannot be used outside Japan.
510
System Settings (Station View)
8. Transfer Settings
8.1
Absent Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the settings for absent transfer.
Absent Transfer: If an incoming call is received during absent transfer, the incoming call can be automatically transferred to a transfer destination.
For IX-MV7-*
For
IX-MV
Important • When an incoming call is received from a VoIP Phone, the call will be received without transferring even when transfer is set. To transfer the call, configure transferring on the IP-PBX.
• Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 381)” has not been configured cannot be configured as transfer destinations.
■ Absent Transfer Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Absent Transfer. The setting can also be changed with the button on the station.
If "Transfer Destination List" ("Transfer Destination" for IX-MV) is not configured, this cannot be set to "Enable." • Enable: Set absent transfer.
• Disable: Do not set absent transfer.
Disable 511
System Settings (Station View) ■ Transfer Destination List (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) for absent transfer. Up to 10 transfer destination stations can be configured. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), the transfer will be made only to the station entered in "No.01." Click
[Open]
to choose a station.
For IX-MV, a VoIP phone cannot be set as the transfer destination.
Important • Do not configure multiple VoIP Phone. If multiple VoIP Phone are configured, calls will be transferred to only one VoIP Phone.
■ Transfer Destination (for IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (number) for absent transfer. Only one transfer destination station can be configured.
Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
3-5 digits ■ Re-Transfer Destination (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (number) for absent re-transfer for a transferred call. Only a single station can be configured as the transfer destination. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), the call will be received without transferring it again.
Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
3-32 digits 512
System Settings (Station View)
8.2
Delay Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the settings for delay transfer.
Delay Transfer: A call can be automatically transferred to another station after a certain period of time (delay time) elapses.
For IX-MV7-*
For
IX-MV
Important • When an incoming call is received from a VoIP Phone, the call will be received without transferring even when transfer is set. To transfer the call, configure transferring on the IP-PBX.
• Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 381)” has not been configured cannot be configured as transfer destinations.
■ Delay Transfer Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Delay Transfer.
To enable Delay Transfer, set transfer or re-transfer destination.
If "Transfer Destination List" ("Transfer Destination" for IX-MV) is not configured, this cannot be set to "Enable." • Enable: Delay transfer enabled.
• Disable: Delay transfer disabled.
Disable 513
System Settings (Station View) ■ Delay Time [sec]♦ Description Settings Default values Set the delay time between receiving and transferring a call.
1-300 sec (by 1 sec) 30 sec ■ Transfer Destination List (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) for delay transfer. Up to 10 transfer destination stations can be configured. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*) the transfer will be made only to the station entered in "No.01." Click
[Open]
to choose a station.
For IX-MV, a VoIP phone cannot be set as the transfer destination.
Important • Do not configure multiple VoIP Phone. If multiple VoIP Phone are configured, calls will be transferred to only one VoIP Phone.
■ Transfer Destination (for IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (number) for delay transfer. Only one transfer destination station can be configured.
Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
3-5 digits ■ Re-Transfer Destination (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (number) for delay re-transfer for a transferred call. Only a single station can be configured as the transfer destination. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), the call will be received without transferring it again.
Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
3-32 digits 514
System Settings (Station View)
8.3
Schedule Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the settings for Schedule Transfer.
Schedule Transfer: A call can be automatically transferred to another station when a call comes in during the time period set up in
“Weekly Schedule (→page 515)” and
“Daily Schedule (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 517)” .
Important • When an incoming call is received from a VoIP Phone, the call will be received without transferring even when transfer is set. To transfer the call, configure transferring on the IP-PBX.
• Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 381)” has not been configured cannot be configured as transfer destinations.
• Incoming calls will be transferred during the time period set in "Schedule Transfer," regardless of what was set in
“Absent Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 511)” and
“Delay Transfer (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) (→page 513)”
.
■ Schedule Transfer Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Schedule Transfer.
To enable Schedule Transfer, set transfer or re-transfer destination.
If
“Weekly Schedule (→page 515)” or
“Daily Schedule (for IX-MV7-*) (→page 517)” is not
configured, this cannot be set to "Enable." • Enable: Schedule transfer enabled.
• Disable: Schedule transfer disabled.
Disable
8.3.1
Weekly Schedule
Configure the transfer destination and transfer time for every day from Sunday through Saturday.
For IX-MV7-*, up to 12 schedules can be set for each day, and for the IX-MV, one schedule can be set for each day.
For IX-MV7-*
For
IX-MV How to configure the Weekly Schedule
1.
IX-MV7-*: Configure the "Transfer Destination," "Re-Transfer Destination," "Start Time," and "End Time" for each day of the week.
515
System Settings (Station View) IX-MV: Configure "Transfer Destination," and "Start Time" and "End Time" for each day of week.
2.
When done, click
[Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Transfer Destination Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) for a scheduled transfer.
• IX-MV7-*: Up to 10 transfer destination stations can be configured for each of the 12 schedules, and for each day of the week. However, if the station making the outgoing call is an IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), the transfer will only be made to the station entered in "No.01." • IX-MV: Only a single transfer destination station can be set for each day of the week. A VoIP phone cannot be set as the transfer destination.
Enter Number manually, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
IX-MV7-*: 3-32 digits IX-MV: 3-5 digits Important • Do not configure multiple VoIP Phone. If multiple VoIP Phone are configured, calls will be transferred to only one VoIP Phone.
■ Re-Transfer Destination (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination when performing a schedule transfer again for a transferred call. Only a single station can be configured as the transfer destination for each of the 12 schedules for each day of the week. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), the call will be received without transferring it again.
Enter Number manually, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
3-32 digits ■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ End Time Description Settings Default values Set the Start Time to enable schedule transfer.
00:00 - 23:59 Set the End Time to disable schedule transfer.
00:00 - 23:59
How to delete the Weekly Schedule
1.
Return the settings to their default values and click
[Update]
.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
516
System Settings (Station View)
8.3.2
Daily Schedule (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure the transfer destination and time for each individual day.
A schedule one year from the set day can be configured. 12 schedules can be set for each day.
Calendar List of Configured Schedules
How to configure Daily Schedule
1.
Select the day to configure a schedule from "Calendar."
2.
Configure "Transfer Destination," "Re-Transfer Destination," "Start Time," and "End Time," and click
[Add]
.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Transfer Destination Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) for schedule transfer. Up to 10 transfer destination stations can be configured for each of the 12 schedules for each day of the week. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), he transfer will be made only to the station entered in "No.01." Click
[Open]
to choose a station.
Important • Do not configure multiple VoIP Phone. If multiple VoIP Phone are configured, calls will be transferred to only one VoIP Phone.
517
System Settings (Station View) ■ Re-Transfer Destination Description Settings Default values Configure the transfer destination station (Number) when performing schedule transfer again for a transferred call. Only a single station can be configured as the transfer destination for each of the 12 schedules on each day. However, if the station making the outgoing call is IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*), the call will be received without transferring it again.
Enter Number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a station.
3-32 digits ■ Start Time Description Settings Default values ■ End Time Description Set the Start Time to enable schedule transfer.
00:00 - 23:59 Settings Default values Set the End Time to disable schedule transfer. If this is set earlier than "Start Time," End Time will be for the following day.
00:00 - 23:59
How to delete Daily Schedule
1.
Select the day to delete a schedule from "Calendar."
2.
Schedules for the selected day are displayed in the "Set Schedule List." • If a weekly schedule is configured for the selected day of the week, it will also be shown.
3.
Click
[Delete]
for the schedule to delete, and click
[Update]
.
• Refer to “How to delete the Weekly Schedule (→page 516)”
to delete a weekly schedule.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
8.4
Lock Transfer (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF to Lock Transfer function. When set to "ON", transfer function cannot be changed by user account.
• ON: Cannot be configured with user privileges.
• OFF: Can be configured with user privileges.
OFF 518
System Settings (Station View)
9. Station Settings
9.1
Speed Dials / Favorites (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure the Speed Dial button settings for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV.
9.1.1
Advanced Speed Dial Button Settings
Select the functions to assign to each Speed Dial button.
Up to eight Speed Dial buttons can be set for IX-MV7-*, and six for IX-MV.
How to configure the Speed Dial buttons
1.
Select the Speed Dial button to configure in "Speed Dial #." • The settings of the selected Speed Dial button are displayed.
2.
Configure each item.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
519
System Settings (Station View)
9.1.1.1 Speed Dial Name (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Set the Speed Dial Name.
1-24 alphanumeric characters The entire name may not be shown on the station screen, depending on the number of characters.
Important
• Enter button names in the language configure in
information using alphabetical characters only.
. However, if the language displayed on the screen for IX-MV7-* differs from that set in "Language," characters on the station screen may appear incorrectly. To avoid this, enter
9.1.1.2 Function
Description Settings Default values
Set the Speed Dial Function. Refer to “How to configure Individual Call (→page 520)” for how to
configure detailed functions.
• No Function • Individual Call: Call individual station set in "Individual Call".
• Group Call: Call group set in "Group Call".
• Group Page: Page group set in "Group Page".
• All Page: Page all stations.
• Group Message Page (For IX-MV7-*): Page message to group set in "Group Message Page".
• All Message Page (For IX-MV7-*): Page message to all stations..
• Monitor (For IX-MV7-*): Monitor station set in "Monitor".
• Network Camera Monitor (For IX-MV7-*): Monitor network camera set in "Network Camera Monitor".
• Scan Monitor (For IX-MV7-*): Start scan monitor sequence set in "Station Settings - Monitor".
• Option Relay Control (For IX-MV7-*): Relay Control set in "Option Relay Control". Relay output will not be controlled for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, and IX-SS(-*).
No Function
How to configure Individual Call
Configure this if "Individual Call" is set in
■ Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination station.
Enter the Station Number or click
[Open]
to choose one. This cannot be configured for IXW-MA.
3-32 digits Important • Stations in which the
“IP Address (→page 381)” has not been configured cannot be configured as destinations.
■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the Priority for the individual calls.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent 520
System Settings (Station View)
How to configure Group Call
Configure if "Group Call" is set in
.
■ Group Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination group.
Enter the group number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a group.
01 - 99 ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of Group call.
• Normal • Priority • Urgent
How to configure Group Page
Configure if "Group Page" is set in “Function (→page 520)”
.
■ Group Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination group.
Enter the group number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a group.
01 - 99 ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of group page.
• Normal • Urgent
How to configure All Page
Configure if "All Page" is set in “Function (→page 520)” .
■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of all page.
• Normal • Urgent
How to configure Group Message Page (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "Group Message Page" is set in “Function (→page 520)” .
■ Group Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination group.
Enter the group number directly, or click
[Open]
to choose a group.
01 - 99 521
System Settings (Station View) ■ Message Description Settings Select the message (audio file) to send during group message paging.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Default values ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of group message page.
• Normal • Urgent ■ Play Count [time(s)] Description Settings Default values Set the message play count of group message page.
1 - 20 times 522
System Settings (Station View)
How to configure All Message Page (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "All Message Page" is set in
■ Message Description Settings Default values Select the message (audio file) to send during all message paging.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ■ Priority Description Settings Default values Set the priority of all message page.
• Normal • Urgent ■ Play Count [time(s)] Description Settings Default values Set the message play count of all message page.
1 - 20 times
How to configure Monitor (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "Monitor" is set in “Function (→page 520)” .
■ Number Description Settings Default values Set the destination station.
Enter the Station Number or click
[Open]
to choose one. This cannot be configured for IX-MV7 *, IX-MV, IXW-MA or VoIP Phone.
3-5 digits Important • Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 381)” has not been configured cannot be configured to be monitored.
523
System Settings (Station View)
How to configure Network Camera Monitor (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "Network Camera Monitor" is set in
.
■ Network Camera Description Settings Default values Set the destination Network Camera.
Enter the number of the network camera set in
“Network Camera List (→page 409)” or click
[Network camera selection]
to choose one.
001 - 050
How to configure Option Relay Control (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure if "Option Relay Control" is set in
Note • When controlling relay output on multiple stations, processing may take some time and control may be delayed.
■ Station List Description Settings Default values Configure the station to control relay output. This cannot be configured for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF( *), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*).
Click
[Open]
to choose a station. Multiple stations (infinite) can be selected.
The selected station is displayed.
Important • Stations that the "IP Address" has not been configured cannot be configured as stations to perform control.
■ Output Time Description Settings Default values Select the Output Time Range for relay output, and set the Output Time within the range.
• 0 (Momentary): Start Relay Output by pressing a Speed Dial button. Stop Relay Output by pressing again the Speed Dial button.
Pressing the Speed Dial button again will stop relay output.
• 200-2000 [msec]: Select this when configuring a value from 200 to 2000 msec (by 200 msec). Enter the time in "Output Time [msec / sec]♦." • 3-600 sec: Select this when configuring a value from 3 to 600 sec (by 1 sec). Enter the time in "Output Time [msec / sec]♦." 0 (Momentary) ■ TLS Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for TLS. When "Enable" is selected, set "Option Relay Control Key" and Relay Output" -
• Enable • Disable Disable Important • If "TLS" is set to "Enable," this may take some time if there are multiple stations to control.
524
System Settings (Station View) ■ Option Relay Control Key Description Settings Default values Set the Option Relay Control Key.
“Option Relay Control Authentication Key (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
1-20 digits
9.1.1.3 Lock (for IX-MV7-*)
Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF to Lock Speed Dial setting. Once set to "ON", Speed Dial function cannot be changed by user account.
• ON • OFF OFF 525
System Settings (Station View)
9.2
Privacy (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
is set to "ON." ■ Privacy♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Privacy function. The setting can also be changed on the station.
• Enable • Disable Disable 526
System Settings (Station View)
9.3
Volume / Tone (except IXW-MA)
Configure the sound settings, such as volume and ringtone.
9.3.1
Volume
■ Handset Transmit (for IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the transmit volume using handset while communicating and paging.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 ■ Handset Receive (for IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the receive volume using handset while communicating. Also sets ringback tone volume.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ Hands-free Transmit (for IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the hands-free transmit volume while communicating and paging.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 ■ Hands-free Receive (for IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the hands-free receive volume while communicating and paging. Also sets ringback tone volume.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) • IX-MV7-*, IX-MV: 6 • IX-RS-*: 10 ■ Headset Jack Transmit (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set the transmit volume using headset jack.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 527
System Settings (Station View) ■ Headset Jack Receive (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set the receive volume using the headset jack.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ Transmit (except IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set the transmit volume while communicating and being monitored.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 ■ Receive (except IX-MV7-*, IX-RS-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the receive volume while communicating and paging. This sets the Ringback Tone volume, as well.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 10 ■ Receive (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the receive volume while communicating. Also sets ringback tone. The calling tone volume will be changed as well.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ External Input Description Not used.
■ External Output (for IX-RS-*) Description Settings Default values Select the transmit volume when using the external output.
1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ VoIP Phone Volume Adjustment (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) Description Settings Default values Select the volume adjustment between VoIP Phone and IX stations.
• -12dB from VoIP, +12dB to VoIP • -6dB from VoIP, +6dB to VoIP • No Adjustment • +6dB from VoIP, -6dB to VoIP • +12dB from VoIP, -12dB to VoIP No Adjustment ■ Ringtone Description Settings Default values Select the volume for Ringtone and Paging Pretone.
0 (Off), 1 (Low) - 10 (High) • IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*): 6 • IX-SS-2G, IX-RS-*, IX-DA, IX-BA, IX-SS(-*): 10 528
System Settings (Station View) ■ Paging (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-SSA(-*)) Description Settings Default values Set the volume while receiving page.
0 (Off), 1 (Low) - 10 (High) 6 ■ Button Feedback (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Button Feedback tone.
• Enable • Disable • IX-MV7-*: Enable • IX-MV: Disable
9.3.2
Tone
■ Communication Timeout Notification (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Select the tone to be played when an outgoing call times out.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Error 529
System Settings (Station View) ■ Communication End Pretone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Select the tone to be played 10 sec before communication, paging or monitoring ends.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Communication End Pretone ■ Call Queue Notification (for IX-MV7-*) ♠ Description Settings Select the tone to be played when receiving a call while communicating.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Call Queue Notification 530
System Settings (Station View) ■ Paging Pretone (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♠ Description Settings Select the sound to be played when placing or receiving a page.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Pre Tone 2 Important • Configure the paging pretone with a longer duration than the paging pretone of the station receiving the page. Configuring a shorter tone might prevent audio from playing on the other station when paging starts. Configure the same tone as that of other IX-MV7-* andIX-MV stations in the system.
■ Auto Answer Tone (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Select the tone to be played.
• Ringtone when receiving an individual call. “Auto Answer♠ (→page 431)” must be set to "ON".
• Ringback tone when placing an individual call. “Auto Answer♠ (→page 431)” must be set to
"ON" at the destination station. (for IX-MV7-*) • None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Pre Tone 1 531
System Settings (Station View) ■ On Hold (for IX-MV7-*) ♠ Description Settings Select the tone to be played while On-Hold.
• None (except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone (Busy Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error (Error Tone for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 1(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 2(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Pre Tone 3(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Communication End Pretone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Call Queue Notification(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Waiting Reply Tone(Except IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values On Hold ■ Key Received (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Configure the tone to send to the destination station when the door release key entered using a keypad on the destination station (station performing a door release operation) matches the authentication key of this station (station connected to the electrical lock). The tone will be heard on the destination station.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values None 532
System Settings (Station View) ■ Error (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Select the tone to be played when error has occurred.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values Error ■ Mic Select Description Not used.
■ Headset Specification (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set the device to be connected to the headset jack.
• Mic Device • Headset Device Mic Device ■ Audio Output (for Master) (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Set using External speaker for Ringtone, Paging Pretone and Paging.
• External speaker output for Ringtone, Built-in Speaker for Communication • External speaker output for Page Pretone, Built-in Speaker for Paging • External speaker output for Ringtone, Paging Pretone and Paging, Built-in Speaker for Communication External speaker output for Ringtone, Built-in Speaker for Communication Note • The tone will play from the speaker of the station even if audio is heard from the external speaker.
533
System Settings (Station View) ■ Audio Output (for Door) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-SS-2G, and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Set using Line Audio / External Speaker or Built-in Speaker while communicating and paging.
• Built-in Speaker for Communication and Paging • Line Audio Output for Communication and Paging (External speaker output for Communication and Paging for IX-RS-*) • Built-in Speaker for Communication, Line Audio Output for Paging (External speaker output for Communication and Paging for IX-RS-*) Built-in Speaker for Communication and Paging 534
System Settings (Station View)
9.4
Communication (except IXW-MA)
Configure the settings for a call.
■ Talk Timeout [sec]♦♠ Description Settings Default values Set the communication timer when placing a call. Communication timer when receiving a call is set at the destination station.
• 30-600 sec: Configure between 30 to 600 sec (by 1 sec).
• Infinite (Except IX-MV): No timeout.
60 sec Important • During a communication with a VoIP phone, this will be the shorter time of the time set for "Talk Timeout [sec]" and the call duration set on the VoIP phone.
■ Communication Start Tone (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*)) ♠ Description Settings Select the tone to be played when communication starts.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
Default values None ■ Force Touch-to-Talk (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for Force Touch-to-Talk (Or Press-to-Talk) when starting communication in hands-free mode.
• Enable • Disable Disable 535
System Settings (Station View)
9.5
Monitor (except IXW-MA, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
Configure the settings for the monitor function.
Important • Monitoring cannot be performed for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, or VoIP phones.
9.5.1
Monitor Timeout [sec] (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♦♠
Description Settings Default values Set the monitoring timer by station. Scan Monitor must be end manually.
• Infinite (For IX-MV7-*): No timeout.
• 10-600 sec: Set 10-600 sec by 1 sec.
60 sec
9.5.2
Scan Monitor (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure monitoring by automatically switching between several stations (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) and network cameras at set intervals. The scan will be performed in registration order.
■ Type Description Settings Default values Select the Station Type.
• IX Station • Network Camera ■ Number Description Settings Default values Set the Station Number.
Enter the Number or click
[Open]
to choose one. This cannot be selected for IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, IXW-MA or VoIP Phone.
3-5 digits 536
System Settings (Station View) Important • Stations in which
“IP Address (→page 381)” has not been configured cannot be configured to be monitored.
■ Network Camera Number Description Settings Default values Set the Network Camera Number.
Enter the number of the network camera set in
“Network Camera List (→page 409)” or click
[Network camera selection]
to choose one.
Select from the network cameras registered in
“Network Camera List (→page 409)”
.
■ Dwell Time Description Settings Default values Set the dwell time to change destination for scan monitor.
• 5 sec • 10 sec • 30 sec 5 sec
9.5.3
Prevent Being Monitored (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF to prevent being monitored.
• ON: Prevent being monitored.
• OFF: Allow monitoring OFF
9.5.4
Monitored Notification (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV) ♠
Description Settings Default values Select the tone to be played when monitored by another station.
• None • Call Pattern 1 • Call Pattern 2 • Call Pattern 3 • Call Pattern 4 • Call Pattern 5 • Call Pattern 6 • Tremolo Sound • Busy Response Tone • On Hold • Operation Sound • Error • Pre Tone 1 • Pre Tone 2 • Pre Tone 3 • Communication End Pretone • Call Queue Notification • Waiting Reply Tone • Select a sound that is registered in
“Custom Sound Registry (except IXW-MA) (→page 416)” .
None 537
System Settings (Station View)
9.5.5
Monitored LED Notification (except IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for status LED notification (Blue flashing) while being monitored by another station.
• ON • OFF OFF 538
System Settings (Station View)
9.6
Master Station Display (for IX-MV7-* and IX-MV)
Configure screen display-related settings.
■ Brightness Description Settings Default values Set the Brightness of Master station display.
1 (Dark) - 10 (Bright) 6 ■ Primary Video Source (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select the primary video source when showing 2 video stream simultaneously.
• IX Station • Network Camera IX Station ■ Aspect Ratio (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select the video aspect for primary video source.
• 16:9 • 4:3 16:9 ■ Time Format (for IX-MV) ♠ Description Settings Default values Select the Time format.
• mm/dd/yyyy (12h) • mm/dd/yyyy (24h) • dd/mm/yyyy (12h) • dd/mm/yyyy (24h) • yyyy/mm/dd (12h) • yyyy/mm/dd (24h) mm/dd/yyyy (12h) ■ Standby LED State♠ Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for stand by status LED.
• ON • OFF ON 539
System Settings (Station View) ■ Keypad (for IX-MV7-*) Description Settings Default values Select ON / OFF for display Keypad to use for door release or playing location message.
• ON • OFF ON 540
System Settings (Station View)
9.7
Camera (for IX-DV, IX-DVF(-*), IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
Configure camera settings.
9.7.1
Adjustment
■ Backlight Compensation♠ Description Settings Default values During an outgoing call or monitoring, video with backlight compensation adjustment will be sent to the destination station.
The adjustment can be removed through operation by the destination station.
• Enable • Disable Disable ■ Low Light Sensitivity♠ Description Settings Default values Send an image that low light sensitivity compensation was performed to the other station, when an outgoing call is made or the station is being monitored and the surrounding area is dark (such as at night). The compensation can be removed on the other station.
• Enable • Disable Disable
9.7.2
Color Settings (for IX-DA, IX-DF(-*))
Important • If these settings are changed while video is displayed, the changes will not be reflected until the video is accessed again.
■ Brightness♦ Description Settings Default values ■ Contrast♦ Description Settings Default values Set the Brightness for camera setting.
1 (Dark) to 100 (Bright) 50 Set the Contrast for camera setting.
1 (Weak) - 100 (Strong) 15 541
System Settings (Station View) ■ Color♦ Description Settings Default values
9.7.3
White LED
Set the Contrast for camera setting.
1 (Weak) to 100 (Strong) 50 ■ Call / Communication♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for white LED while calling or communicating in low light situation.
• Enable • Disable Enable ■ Monitored♠ Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for white LED while being monitored in low light situation.
• Enable • Disable Disable 542
System Settings (Station View)
9.8
Door Release Assignment (for IX-RS-*)
Configure the connected station and door release key for door release during a call.
Configure each station for each group configured in
“Called Stations (Door/Sub Stations) (except IX-MV7-*, IX-MV, and IXW-MA) (→page 419)”
.
How to configure Door Release Assignment
1.
Select the group number to configure from "Number." • Settings for the selected group number will be shown.
2.
Configure each item.
3.
When done, click
[Update]
.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
■ Contact Assignment Description Settings Default values Select which relay output will be used for door release during call.
• Originating Station: Use origination station relay output for door release.
• Destination Station: Use destination station relay output for door release.
Destination Station ■ Authentication Key Description Settings Default values When "Destination Station" is selected in "Contact Assignment," set the Authentication Key for door release.
Authentication key must match with the destination station's authentication key, which is set in
"Relay Output" - “Door Release Authorization (except IXW-MA) (→page 443)”
to allow door release.
1-20 digits Random characters (compatible with default value of "Relay Output" - "Door Release Authorization") 543
System Settings (Station View) Note
"OFF," the default value for "Authentication Key" will not be set.
– IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) not configured: 20 digits.
– IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) configured: 4 digits ■ Door Release by IX-RS Description Settings Default values Select Enable / Disable for door release by IX-RS.
• Enable • Disable Disable 544
System Settings (Station View)
9.9
Line Supervision (for IX-MV7-*)
Configure settings related to Line Supervision and Device Check performed by IX-MV7-*.
Monitor a station other than a VoIP phone registered in “Station List (→page 406)” .
■ Line Supervision Interval Description Settings Default values Set the Line Supervision test interval.
• OFF • 15sec • 20 min • 30 min • 60 min • Daily • Weekly: Select from the day of week drop-down list OFF ■ Line Supervision Schedule Description Settings Default values Set the time when automatic line monitoring starts.
00:00 - 23:59 00:00 ■ Device Check Interval Description Settings Default values Set the Line Supervision test interval.
• OFF • 10 min • 20 min • 30 min • 60 min • 1 day • Weekly: Select from the day of week drop-down list OFF ■ Device Check Schedule Description Settings Default values Set the time when automatic failure monitoring starts.
Set the time when "1 day" or "Daily" is selected in “Device Check Interval (→page 545)” .
00:00 - 23:59 00:00 545
10. Maintenance
System Settings (Station View)
10.1 Firmware Update
Access our website at " http://www.aiphone.net/ " to download the latest version of the firmware.
Important
• To update the firmware, “Association Settings (→page 160)”
must have been performed on the station to update, and the PC must be able to communicate with the system.
• If the firmware update is started while the station is operating (such as on a call), the operation will end and the firmware update will begin.
• If power is turned off while updating the firmware, the station may malfunction.
• The station will be inoperable while updating the firmware.
• When the firmware is updated, the station will be automatically restarted.
How to update the firmware
1.
Click
[Browse]
and select the firmware file to be downloaded.
2.
Click
[Firmware Update]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to back to the "Firmware Update" screen without updating the firmware.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
Note • If updating fails, repeat the procedure.
546
System Settings (Station View)
10.2 Initialization
When initializing the station, all settings go back to the default values, and the system log and incoming/outgoing call history are erased.
Stations are also deleted from the settings in IX Support Tool.
How to initialize
1.
Click
[Initialization]
or
[Initialize User Settings]
.
• Initialization: All settings will revert to their default values. The system log, outgoing/incoming call history, and recorded video/audio data on the microSD card will be cleared.
• Initialize User Settings: Only the content of general user accounts are initialized.
2.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to cancel the initialization.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
Important • After selecting
[Initialization]
, the station will restart. This may take approx. 10 minutes in total. The station will not operate until the restart is complete.
• If initialization fails, the message "Error: Station initialization failed." will appear. If this happens, perform initialization again.
547
10.3 Settings File Backup
Download/upload setting files.
System Settings (Station View)
10.3.1 Setting File Download
Download the setting file from the station and back it up.
Important • Setting files are downloaded via
“Association Settings (→page 160)”
on the downloading station. Files cannot be downloaded unless the PC can communicate with the system.
• When first configuring settings using a web browser, or when changing the configuration using a web browser after configuring settings using IX Support Tool, it may not be possible to download the setting files. In this case, download the setting files using a browser.
Click
[Setting File Download]
. The Setting File Download window will be shown.
1 2
How to download setting files
1.
Select the station to download the setting file from "Station List" (multiple selections allowed).
• To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type for a batch selection and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations for which
“Association Settings (→page 160)” has not been performed cannot be selected.
548
System Settings (Station View)
2.
Download the file.
[Settings]
: Download only the setting file.
[Sounds]
: Download the setting file and audio file for a custom tone.
[Image]
(for IX-MV7-*): Download the setting file and image file for the image on the reception screen.
[Schedule]
(except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA): Download schedule setting files (for transfer, etc.). Schedules for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), or IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are downloaded from
[Settings]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to return to the "Setting File Download" window without downloading.
4.
Click
[OK]
Step 2.
.
• The file download result is displayed in "Station List" - "Status." In Process: The file is in the process of downloading.
Success: Download is completed.
Failed: Download failed. Try downloading again.
Unavailable: This is displayed when a file that cannot be uploaded to a station is selected to download in • Downloaded files are saved as follows in "aiphone" - "AIPHONE_IX_SupportTool" - "SystemData" within the folder specified during installation.
– Setting file: "NewIXSystem(Set System Name).db" – Sound file: Saved as a WAV file inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" – Image file: Saved as a PNG file inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" – Schedule file: Saved inside "(Set System Name)" - "Setting (Hidden Folder)" - "(Station Number)" as "SCHED_CHIME.txt," "SCHED_GROUP.txt," "SCHED_OUTPUT.txt," "SCHED_TRANSFER.txt," or "SCHED_REC.txt" (the saved content differs depending on the station).
549
System Settings (Station View)
10.3.2 Setting File Upload
Upload setting files to a station.
Important
. They cannot be uploaded unless the PC can communicate with the system.
• If a custom tone/image was registered, be sure to upload each file to the station in "Sounds" - "Image." The following will occur if only the setting file is uploaded.
– The default tone will play when the operation that the custom tone was set is performed.
– Images will not be displayed in receptionist mode.
– "Download Settings From Station" will fail.
– "Restore System Settings" will fail.
Click
[Setting File Upload]
and the Setting File Upload window will be shown.
1 2
How to upload setting files
1.
Select the station(s) to upload the setting file to from the "Station List." • To select or unselect stations in a batch, choose the station type and click
[Select]
or
[Unselect]
.
• Stations that have not been associated cannot be selected. 550
System Settings (Station View)
2.
Upload the file.
[Settings]
: Upload only the setting file.
[Sounds]
: Upload the setting file and audio file for a custom tone.
[Image]
(for IX-MV7-*): Upload the setting file and image file for the image on the reception screen.
[Schedule]
(except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), IX-BA, IX-SS(-*), and IXW-MA): Upload the schedule setting files (transfer, etc.). Schedules for IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*) are uploaded from
[Settings]
.
3.
Click
[OK]
.
• Click
[Cancel]
to back to "Setting File Upload" window without uploading the file.
4.
Click
[OK]
.
• The file upload result is displayed in "Station List" - "Status." In Process: The file is in the process of uploading.
Success: Upload is completed.
Failed: Upload failed. Try uploading again.
Unavailable: This is displayed when a file that cannot be uploaded to a station is selected in Step 2.
551
System Settings (Station View)
10.4 syslog (except IX-MV, IX-DA, IX-DF(-*), and IX-BA, IX-SS(-*))
■ IPv4 Address♠ Description Settings Default values ■ IPv6 Address♠ Description Settings Default values ■ Port♦ Description Settings Default values Set the IPv4 address for syslog server.
1.0.0.1-223.255.255.254 or hostname(1-64 alphanumeric characters) Set the IPv6 address for syslog server.
::FF:0-FEFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF or hostname(1-64 alphanumeric characters) Set the port number of syslog server.
1-65535 514 552
https://www.aiphone.net/ AIPHONE CO., LTD., NAGOYA, JAPAN Issue Date: Feb.2019 Ⓑ 0219 MQ 61340
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement